Skip to main content

Full text of "Opening the Third Eye"

See other formats

Awakening the Third Eye 

Third Edition 

Samuel Sagan, M.D. 

www. clairvision. org 

Copyright © Samuel Sagan 1992, 1997, 2007. 
Apart from any fair dealing for the purpose of review or research 

as permitted under the Copyright Act, no part of this book 

maybe be reproduced by any process without written permission. 

Clairvision is a registered trademark of Clairvision School Ltd. 

Table of Contents 


A systematic method 

Chapter 1 — Principles and Method of the Work 

1.1 Do not force, do not concentrate, just be aware 

1.2 No creative visualisation, no imagination, just awareness 

1.3 Trust your experience 

1.4 Don't analyse during an experience 

1.5 Psychic protection 

1.6 Practise, practise, practise... 
17 Why delay? 

1.8 Play with the techniques 

1.9 Remain relative 

Chapter 2 — The Mysteries of the Larynx 

2.1 Throat friction 

2.2 Purposes and effects of the throat friction 

2.3 The mysteries of the larynx 

2.4 Humming sound and the magic of bees 

Chapter 3 — Awakening the Third Eye 

3.1 What is the third eye? 

3.2 First opening 

3.3 Various experiences 

3.4 Experiential references 

3.5 If you are not feeling any vibration at all 

3.6 More about the third eye 

3.7 Third eye meditation 

3.8 More humming/buzzing 

3.9 How to organize your practice 

3.10 The mysteries of the space 

Chapter 4 — Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

4.1 Channel release 

4.2 Connected shaking 

Table of Contents 

4.3 Connected rubbing 

4.4 Vibration = etheric 

4.5 General advice concerning the work on the meridians 

4.6 Shou jue yin, 'Heart Constrictor Meridian' 

4.7 Shou shao yin, 'Heart Meridian' 

4.8 Shou tai yin, 'Lung Meridian' 

4.9 More details on the paths of the meridians 

4.10 The different levels of perception of energy circulations 

4.1 1 Practice 

4.12 Releasing negative energies 

Chapter 5 — Seeing 

5.1 The path of the seers 

5.2 Concerning the practices of eye contact 

5.3 Reconnection with the space 

5.4 Eye contact with focus in the eye and 'seeingness' 

5.5 To end any practice of eye contact 

5.6 To blink or not to blink 

5.7 A few common experiences while practising eye contact 

5.8 What to do with your experiences 

5.9 Watching the graspings of the mind 

5.10 Grasping is the nature of the mind 

5.1 1 Which state of perception is the altered one? 

5.12 Atlantean climax 

5.13 Eye contact, full technique: the triple process of vision, 
including the vision of the heart 

Chapter 6 — Channel Release 2 

6.1 The work on the etheric body 

6.2 Zu shao yang, 'Gallbladder' Meridian 

6.3 The full technique of channel release on a meridian 

6.4 Variation without rubbing 

6.5 The sound of the vibration 

6.6 Zu tai yang, 'Urinary Bladder' Meridian 

6.7 The cosmos in your hands 

6.8 Gestures of energy 

6.9 The energy between your hands 

6.10 Cosmic antenna 

6.1 1 Ribcage practice 

6.12 Zu yang ming, 'Stomach' Meridian 

Table of Contents 

6.13 Jnana-mudra and the energy in the lungs 

Chapter 7 — Seeing (2) 

7.1 The use of darkness 

7.2 Use more candles and oil lamps, less electricity 

7.3 In quest of the ultimate wall rendering 

7.4 The white shawl 

7.5 The basic technique for seeing an aura 

7.6 Where exactly should you look while doing eye contact? 

7.7 Channel release from time to time 

7.8 Working on auras 

7.9 Aura testing 

7.10 Vata, pitta, kapha 

7.1 1 Trans-verbal communication 

7.12 More about seeingness 

7.13 Intermezzo: which eye are you? 

7.14 The yes/yes technique 

Chapter 8 — Practices on the Etheric Body 

8.1 The etheric layer as a whole 

8.2 The life ether 

8.3 Exploring different qualities of the etheric 

8.4 Exploring the limits 

8.5 Exploring the circulations of the etheric 

8.6 The etheric vibration outside your body 

8.7 Vibration meals 

8.8 The vibration in your bath 

8.9 Etheric excretion at the end of a bath 

8.10 Loo practice 

8.11 Releasing into the earth 

8.12 Tree hugging 

8.13 Crying 

8.14 Sucking the citrus 

8.15 Yawning 

8.16 The right side of the ring 

8.17 A note about wrist watches 

Chapter 9 — Awareness 

9.1 Centredness through vigilance in the eye 

9.2 Inner alchemy 

Table of Contents 

9.3 Permanence in the eye 

9.4 The harvest of permanence 

9.5 Practice 

9.6 Practice 

9.7 Practice 

9.8 Test 

9.9 Intermezzo: changes in vision 

9.10 The eye-heart awareness 

9.11 When to start? 

Chapter 10 — A Few Experiences on the Way 

10.1 Tingling in various body parts 

10.2 Let things come and go 

10.3 If a meditation experience becomes too intense... 

10.4 Feeling vibration higher up than between the eyebrows 

10.5 Feeling heat 

10.6 The breath stops 

10.7 The pressure in the eye becomes uncomfortable 

10.8 Controlling headaches 

10.9 Other possible causes of headaches 

10.10 Dizziness 

10.11 Getting fed-up or emotional 

10.12 Hearing sounds 

10.13 When there is no energy, the energy is somewhere else! 

10.14 After sattva: tamas. To fight tamas: rajas. 

Chapter 11 — The Art of Tuning In 

11.1 Tuning in 

11.2 Drinking colours 

1 1.3 Flowers, plants and elemental beings 

11.4 Fighting mental rigidity 

11.5 Trees 

1 1.6 Practice 

1 1.7 Sexually-related feelings 

11.8 You are what you eat 

1 1.9 A few suggestions on how to communicate with angels 

Chapter 12 — Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

12.1 The first reflex whenever you hear cancer 

12.2 Commonly observed facts about the lines 

Table of Contents 

12.3 Ley lines and earth lines 

12.4 What are these lines? 

12.5 Energy wells 

12.6 Lines and spiritual practice 

12.7 Dowsing the lines: the gear 

12.8 Learning the eye-belly attitude for dowsing 

12.9 Dowsing technique 

12.10 Dowsing the lines: do's and don'ts 

12.11 The belly signal 

12.12 Feeling the lines without rods 

12.13 Seeing the lines 

12.14 The aura of the dowser 

12.15 Diagnosing geopathic stress 

12.16 Finding energy wells 

12.17 Can one neutralise noxious earth lines? 

12.18 A geography of enlightenment 

Chapter 13 — Night Practice 1: Theoretical Aspects 

13.1 Critical times 

13.2 Initiatory death and the mystery of the threshold 

13.3 Sleep and subtle bodies 

13.4 Angels and the chiselling of the organs of clairvoyance 

13.5 Night practice and the etheric body 

13.6 Night practice and awareness in the eye (1) 

13.7 Third eye flaring — a possible experience 

13.8 Night practice and awareness in the eye (2) 

13.9 Allow enough normal sleep 

Chapter 14 — Night Practice 2: Instructions for the 

14.1 If you are reading the instructions for friends 

14.2 If you do not have much time 

Chapter 15 — Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of 
the Technique 

15.1 Preparation 

15.2 Phase 1: exhaling 

15.3 Phase 2a: circulating in the body parts 

15.4 Phase 2b: awareness and seeingness of the organs 

15.5 Phase 3: awareness of the breath and countdowns 

Table of Contents 

15.6 Phase 3c: vibration in the nose while inhaling 

15.7 Phase 4 

15.8 Phase 5: recalling the images of the day 

15.9 Phase 6: spontaneous images 

15.10 Experiences during night practice 

15.11 Taking the night at both ends 

15.12 Morning sharing 

15.13 A symbol used as a bridge 

15.14 Keep recalling your dreams across the buffer zone 

15.15 Use the memory of the third eye 

15.16 If you can never remember anything 

15.17 Variation for acupuncturists 

Chapter 16 — Complementary Techniques 

16.1 Neti 

16.2 The use of rhythms 

16.3 Fasting for openings 

16.4 Proper management of sexual energies 

16.5 Vaccinations 

16.6 Telephone 

16.7 Moxas on bai hul (Governor 20) 

16.8 Pony tail 

16.9 Blind walking 

Chapter 17 — Protection 

Protection level 1: Reinforcing the structure 

17.1 Simple things first 

17.2 Get enough sleep and rest 

17.3 The right diet 

17.4 The right physical exercise 

17.5 Be happy! 

17.6 Alcohol and spiritual work — a dangerous mixture 
Protection level 2: Correct management of energies 

17.7 Choose your colours 

17.8 Find your spot 

17.9 How to purify a room 

17.10 Work in harmony with the Moon cycle 

17.11 Frequent use of running water 

17.12 Releasing energies into the elements 

Table of Contents 
Chapter 18 — Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

18.1 The fight or flight reaction 

18.2 Sealing the aura: why and when 

18.3 Opening and closing the aura, introductory practice 

18.4 Protection through being in the eye 

18.5 The will centre 

18.6 Practice 

18.7 Eye-belly awareness 

18.8 Walking from the belly 

18.9 Stimulating the fire 

Chapter 19 — Baby Work 

19.1 The aura of a pregnant woman 

19.2 The aura of a newborn baby 

19.3 Babies are very aware in their eye 

19.4 Watching baby fall asleep 

19.5 Your baby as a meditation teacher 

19.6 A few words to the travellers 

19.7 How long does it last? 

19.8 The fabulous babies 

Chapter 20 — Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

20.1 Where are you speaking from? 

20.2 Speaking from different levels 

20.3 What if you have to display authority? 

20.4 The eye-belly power 

20.5 Inhaling/exhaling 

20.6 Closing the aura through deep exhalation 

20.7 Drawing energy in and out 

20.8 Exhaling when facing a crowd 

20.9 The same protection using normal breathing 

20.10 Sealing the aura 

20.11 Practice 

20.12 What if nothing works? 

20.13 Permanent awareness in the will centre 

20.14 Continual abdominal breathing 

20.15 Stambhasana 

20.16 Practice 

Chapter 21 — There Is No Real Protection But the Power 
of Truth 

Table of Contents 

21.1 Power of Truth 

Chapter 22 — Glimpses of What Comes Next 

22.1 ISIS, the Clairvision techniques of regression 

22.2 The vision of thought forms 

22.3 The transformation of thinking 

22.4 The quest for the Grail 

Appendix 1: Paths of the Meridians 

Gallbladder, Urinary Bladder, and Stomach Meridians 


A systematic method 

The light of the body is the eye: if therefore thine 
eye be single, thy whole body shall be full of light. 
This book describes a systematic process to open the third eye. 
It has been written for those who cannot be satisfied with only an 
intellectual understanding of spiritual realities and who wish to 
gain access to direct experience. 

The development of spiritual vision requires the patient building 
of some new 'organs' of energy, of which the third eye is an 
essential member. These new structures are not physical, 
nevertheless they are very real and tangible. Once fully developed, 
the perceptions coming through them appear clearer, sharper and 
far more substantial than those coming from the physical senses. 
A number of techniques will be described which aim at a 
methodical cultivation of this new form of perception. 
Our approach always emphasizes the superiority of experience over 
mental concepts, of first-hand knowledge over belief. Truly, it is 
not what you presume or accept as true that will bring about a 
spiritual regeneration but what you experience directly. Therefore, 
the reader is not asked to believe what is written here but to 
practise the exercises. 

No former spiritual training or background is expected before 
starting the practices. I suggest that you temporarily forget all 
you know so that you can engage in the techniques with fresh 
awareness. Having shared this knowledge with hundreds of 
students in the courses run by the Clairvision School in Sydney, I 
know that it is not always those who have meditated for years 
who enter the field of perception most easily. To some, spiritual 
knowledge gives wings and provides keys to open all the doors; but 
to others it is more like chains preventing them from absorbing 
anything new. The more you are able to drop any preconceived 
ideas, the easier it will be to 'see'. 

It should be clearly understood that our aim is not to develop the 
blurry atavistic clairvoyance of trance-medium psychics but to 



step towards the vision of the Self. Even though several extra- 
sensory perceptions will arise as you practise the techniques, the 
purpose is clearly to find the Self and to learn to see the world 
from the Self instead of seeing it from your usual mental 

This book should be taken as an introduction, a first thread, 
towards a completely different mode of perception and thinking. 
It has been written to serve the vast number of human beings who 
are presently ready to connect with spiritual realities and to step 
into a new form of consciousness. The techniques it offers are 
designed for people who are part of the world. They do not invite 
you to withdraw from your daily activities but to start 
performing them with a different awareness and a new vision, 
thereby implementing the line of Proverbs 3:6: "In all your ways 
know Him", said by the Talmud to contain the entire essence of 
the Torah. 

After saying these words it may be important to state that the 
Clairvision School is not a 'New Age' organisation. Its methods and 
techniques are based on quite different principles from those 
usually found in the New Age movement. In particular at no time 
do the Clairvision techniques use any channelling, creative 
imagination or positive affirmations. No hypnosis or 
autosuggestion is used either. The techniques of the Clairvision 
School are based on a direct awakening of the body of energy, and 
the philosophy and background of the school are to be found in 
the western tradition of esoteric knowledge. If you happen to 
experience intense openings and realisations while putting our 
techniques into practice, it is quite possible that you too have a 
connection with this tradition. In particular it is expected that 
many will have clear awakenings in the third eye while reading 
the book. 

Awakening the Third Eye is one of the introductory books to the 
Clairvision Corpus, the body of knowledge which is the 
background of the Clairvision School. The Clairvision Corpus 
contains both experiential and theoretical knowledge in the field 
of consciousness and the mysteries of human nature, with a special 
focus on transformation and inner alchemy. Alchemy can be 
defined as the art of raising the level of vibration of matter. 
Inner alchemy therefore refers to a form of spiritual development 
in which the ultimate purpose is not to abandon any connection 



with the manifested creation and dissolve oneself, but to build up 
a vehicle in which the fullness of the Self can be experienced 
permanently, even while living in the physical world. This body of 
immortality corresponds to what the Christian tradition has called 
the glorious body and to the paramam vapuh of the Upanishads. It 
is similar in many ways, if not identical, to the lapis 
phllosophorum or philosophers' stone of the alchemists, and to the 
Grail, heart of the western esoteric tradition. 

Awakening the Third Eye lays the foundations for an experiential 
approach to a work of inner alchemy. Many of the techniques 
given in the beginning are not to be regarded as 'alchemical' in a 
strict sense, but as a necessary preparation without which the 
more advanced phases of the work would not make any sense. 
Rather than first developing theoretical aspects at length, 
indications will gradually be given throughout this book and the 
following ones to clarify the purposes and principles of a work of 
inner alchemy. The nature of our topic will also provide ample 
opportunities to develop various aspects related to subtle bodies. 
Clairvision School 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

1.1 Do not force, do not concentrate, just be aware 

Any authentic spiritual work has finding the Self as a primary 
aim, and the Clairvision techniques are no exception. The essential 
purpose of the process is to 'be more'. It is common to hear that 
human beings are only using a small fraction of their potential. 
Their lives are confined within a limited range of thoughts, 
emotions, sensations and other modalities of conscious existence, 
and yet in most cases they remain completely unaware of these 
limitations. Plato's myth of the cave, even though formulated 24 
centuries ago, remains perfectly relevant: if you have always lived 
inside a dark cellar, to you this cellar is not a cellar, it is the 
whole universe. You can't even conceive of the wonder waiting for 
you if you were to step out and walk in the real world. The work 
suggested in this book is all about stepping out of the cellar and 
starting to behold the magnificence of the world as seen from the 
third eye. 

In India, the coconut is considered to be of deep symbolic 
significance and is used in fire rituals (yajnas) because it has 'three 
eyes'. Two of these are 'blind', meaning they can't be pierced to 
reach the milk, while the third one, in the middle, opens to the 
inside of the fruit. Similarly, the third eye is fundamentally the 
gate that leads to the inner worlds. Therefore this eye allows you 
to know yourself to a depth that surpasses all conventional 
methods of psychotherapy or any method based on analysing with 
the discursive mind. 

Developing the third eye is a direct way of expanding your 
conscious universe and discovering your essential values, so that 
you may fathom your own mystery. Moreover, it is simple. Simple 
does not necessarily mean easy, but this work does not require 
complicated theories or lengthy discussions. Its direction is 
essentially experiential, for the purpose is clearly to be more. And 
being is the most simple thing in the world. A constant 
preoccupation while writing this manual was to relate theory to 
experience and to give techniques and keys to enable you to 
perceive for yourself. 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

The first three chapters are devoted to getting into the main 
aspects of the practice. The remaining chapters are more or less 
independent of each other, so that it is quite possible to read them 
in the order that feels most natural to you. 

Before starting the first technique let us give some basic advice 
regarding the principles and method of the work. 
You should not be confused by the fact that our purpose is a new 
clairvoyance, or vision of the Self. Truly, the Self is already there, 
waiting for you in the background of yourself. You are not going 
to 'build' the Self and its vision, you are going to reveal them or 
rather allow them to reveal themselves. Spiritual development is 
certainly a fight, but the main weapon in this fight is letting go. 
In this perspective of opening it is not appropriate to concentrate, 
to try hard or to force. If you were to do so, what would happen? 
You would operate from your ordinary mind, meaning that 
fraction of yourself with which you presently think — the 
discursive mind that goes on talking in your head all the time. You 
have been conditioned from an early age to do everything from 
the mind. Therefore if you try to 'do' the perception business, you 
are likely to remain caught in your talking mind — a layer which 
is notoriously unfit for any form of spiritual perception. 
Stop doing. Be fully aware, but just aware. Allow what is hidden in 
the depths to come through and be revealed to your consciousness. 
Don't do anything, let things happen. Flow with what comes. 
In the physical world when you want something you have to strive 
for it. But in the spiritual worlds everything is reversed, as on the 
other side of a mirror. If you want something you have to let it 
come to you. It is a new skill which has to be developed. It could be 
called 'active letting go' or 'creative letting go'. It is the capacity to 
be transparent and to let states of consciousness be revealed 
through you. 
Tust be aware, and everything will happen. 

1.2 No creative visualisation, no imagination, just 

In the context of the Clairvision techniques it is advised that you 
never try to visualise or imagine anything. If images, lights, 
spiritual beings or anything else comes to your vision, that is fine. 
But don't make them up, don't try to induce them. Do not actively 
visualise any pattern into your field of consciousness. 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

One of the reasons is: suppose an angel comes to you, truly. If you 
have been trying to visualise angels every morning for a few 
months how will you know whether it is a true angel or one that 
you have made up. 

The problem is not to get into the perception of images or lights. 
If you put the techniques into practice, visions will come. The real 
problem is, once these visions come to you, how to discern what is 
real from what is a fancy of the mind. So the advice is: be 
spontaneous! Never plan or try to attract a vision. Tust practise 
the techniques and then see what comes. This will make it much 
easier to reach the stage where you can rely on your vision. 
This approach should not be understood as a criticism of the paths 
that use creative visualisation or imagination. There are many 
ways. What is true in the context of one particular system of 
development does not necessarily apply to others. In the Clairvision 
style of work the motto is "just awareness". 

1.3 Trust your experience 

Something good to remember is that when there is nothing to 
believe, there is nothing to doubt either! Since you are not trying 
to make anything up, don't waste your time worrying about 
whether you are really seeing what you are seeing. Trust your 

Keep on practising according to our sober principles and your 
clairvoyance will flourish, growing in precision and reliability. As 
perceptions start repeating themselves it will become easier and 
easier to trust them. 

1.4 Don't analyse during an experience 

Do not try to analyse as soon as something happens. Otherwise you 
will lose your perception immediately, because you will be caught 
straight back into the discursive mind. One of the keys to 
perception lies in the cultivation of a superior form of stillness, 
the capacity not to react when something takes place inside. 
Once the experience is over you will have plenty of time to analyse 
it. Anyway, it is not necessarily by analysing or discussing an 
experience that you will derive the most benefit from it. 
Experiences of consciousness are like seeds. It is when you ponder 
on them silently, and digest them, that they will mature into 
greater realisations. 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

1.5 Psychic protection 

Ordinarily, most people are psychically unprotected, for two main 
reasons. Firstly they are not able to see when a negative energy is 
around them and when caution is required. Secondly they have not 
been trained to seal their aura to make it impermeable to external 
influences if needed. 

Being the organ of subtle perception and intuition and the main 
switch of the body of energy, the third eye offers true answers 
to these two problems. 

Firstly it allows you to detect when your energetic environment is 
such that prudence is needed. 

Secondly it should be clear that our method does not only teach 
you how to open your eye but also how to close your aura. From 
the very first techniques the vibration in the third eye will begin 
to awaken a higher density of protective energy in your aura. This 
is not based on positive imagination or autosuggestion but on the 
tangible perception of a vibrating energy all around you. Not only 
during meditation will you be able to awaken this protective 
energy but also in the most varied situations of your daily life, 
such as taking a bus, walking in a busy street or dealing with your 
boss or employees. 

More systematic methods of sealing the aura will be developed at 
length in Chapters 17, 18, 20 and 21 on protection. The capacity to 
detect ley lines (Chapter 12) will also be of great help in 
establishing a sound protective environment. 

1.6 Practise, practise, practise... 

I don't think much will be gained just by reading the 22 chapters 
of this book. Whether you are young or old, healthy or sick, the 
key to success in your spiritual quest lies in three words: practise, 
practise, practise... It is certainly not necessary to withdraw from 
activity and meditate all the time in order to reach a high level of 
spiritual practice. You can follow this book without devoting more 
than ten to twenty minutes daily to meditation exercises. But a 
number of practices will be suggested that are designed to be 
implemented during your daily activities. Try to make them 
habits, and to incorporate this work as much as possible in your 
natural way of life. 

After exploring many different ways of self -transformation one 
often comes to the conclusion that it is not so much the method 
or the style of work that matters, as far as realisation is 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

concerned. What makes all the difference is your capacity to 
persist along a path. Looking at the lives of a number of great 
masters, one discovers that they did not necessarily start at a high 
level. Sometimes they had to face far greater obstacles than those 
you may find on your way. But they persisted, persisted, 
persisted... to the point where no obstacle could resist and huge 
enlightenments opened to them. 'Supernatural persistence' is one 
of the most essential qualities a seeker can develop. The people who 
seem to get into high states of consciousness without having to go 
through any spiritual discipline are usually people who have gone 
through long and intense processes in their former lives. 
Whatever level you may be at, it is by constant attention to all the 
aspects of the practice that success will come to you. 
"Those who say they will die first and then rise are in error. If 
they do not first receive the resurrection while they live, when 
they die they will receive nothing." (The Gospel of Philip, 
Tranlated by Wesley W. Isenberg, in The Other Bible, Harper and 
Row, 1984, p. 96) 

1.7 Why delay? 

Start the practices as you read the book. 

In terms of self-transformation, tomorrow means never. 

Whatever can be done, do it right now. 

Wasted time is known by God. 

1.8 Play with the techniques 

If so many sages have striven towards spiritual enlightenment, it 
is because it is the greatest fun one can have on Earth. If your 
views on spirituality are grim and austere, then you are 
completely missing the point. The most enlightened masters I have 
met were men and women who laughed a lot. So please, be really 
serious with the Clairvision techniques: play with them. If you can 
get as involved and serious as a child who is playing (and if you 
persist) then your chances of success are great. 

1.9 Remain relative 

One of the fascinating discoveries that results from understanding 
the writings of highly enlightened people is that they have seen 
the world in completely different ways. 

In the Indian tradition for instance, take the Tnanis and Sri 
Aurobindo. In the works of Sri Aurobindo, the world is presented 


Chapter 1 - Principles and Method of the Work 

as the progressive incarnation of a divine perfection. Death is a 
mockery, and the Work aims at physical immortality through an 
enlightenment of physical matter. To the Tnanis, on the other 
hand, incarnated life is a fatal mistake. Actually to the Tnanis the 
whole universe is a mistake, a sort of transient, foul and 
nauseating emanation. And the only purpose of life is to take a 
one-way ticket out of it as quickly as possible. 

Sri Aurobindo was universally acclaimed in India as one of the most 
enlightened yogis of all time. But do not think that the Tnanis are 
shallow. A jnana-yogi such as Nisargadatta Maharaj, to take a recent 
example, has deeply impressed his generation, East and West, by 
the immensity of his states of consciousness. 

There is no easy way around this fact: depending on where you are 
looking from, you see the universe and its finality completely 
differently. Please ponder upon this, for it seems to me one of the 
best antidotes for dogma. Whatever your views are, don't make 
them a prison. Always leave space to change your mind and your 
system of the world. 

To the people who wish to engage in the Clairvision style of work, 
I particularly recommend two main bodies of writings: those of 
the Gnostics, and those of Rudolf Steiner. The reasons for this 
choice are that they both arose from vast enlightenments, they 
are full of wisdom and practical information regarding the path of 
inner alchemy and the western esoteric tradition, and last but not 
least... they are totally irreconcilable on a number of key points! If 
you want to operate with the two systems, you have no choice but 
to remain relative as to the value of mental conceptions. 
Once more, it is not what you believe or what you have read that 
will change your spiritual life, it is what you can experience 
directly. Hence the work suggested in this book, which aims at 
giving you the capacity to tune in and reach your own perception 
of spiritual worlds. 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was 

with God, and the Word was God. 

John 1:1 

And he had in his right hand seven stars: and out of 

his mouth went a sharp two-edged sword. 

Revelation 1:16 

2.1 Throat friction 

This practice consists of breathing with a friction at the lower 
part of the back of the throat, while keeping the mouth slightly 
open. The friction is generated during both inhalation and 
exhalation. It creates a 'wind' type of sound. There is neither 
humming nor buzzing, nor any form of chanted sound. The sound 
is roughly the same while inhaling and exhaling. If you can, try to 
make it a low-pitched sound; it will be easier to sustain over long 
periods of time. But before giving more indications and tips on 
the throat friction, let me make a few points extremely clear. 
Don't try to start a quest for the perfect throat friction. Tust do 
a 'kind of' friction sound and let it adjust itself with time. 
If you try to do it too perfectly you will probably end up doing it 
all wrong. (The same applies more or less to all the techniques of 
this book.) By being too finicky your mind is likely to get in the 
way. So just breathe with some vague friction In the throat and 
everything will be fine! Tust read the indications given below, and 
then you can come back to this section in a few weeks to find out 
more precisely where your friction is taking place and adjust the 

Throat friction, tips and traps 

• If you wish to have an immediate demonstration, you can visit 
the Clairvision School's Internet site (section: Clairvision Knowledge 
Bank), where you will find sound files of throat friction. But 
again, keep in mind that any vague friction sound will be enough 
to carry you through the exercises of Awakening the Third Eye. 

• It does not matter whether you are breathing through the nose 
or the mouth, or both at the same time, but the mouth should 
remain slightly open. In this position the lower jaw is loose and 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

relaxed, which generates a certain condition of energy and can be 
enough in itself to induce a slightly altered state of consciousness. 

The friction comes from area L (for larynx) 

• The throat friction is more comfortable and more efficient 
when it comes from the back of the throat, not from the mouth 
and palate [area M on the figure — M for middle of the mouth] 
nor from the area close to the teeth [area F — F for front of the 

If you were to produce your friction from the middle [M] or the 
front [F] of the mouth, the sound would be higher-pitched and 
somewhat shriller or even whistly. Experiment and compare each 

• The correct friction comes from the larynx and the lower 
pharynx, meaning the lower part of the back of the throat [area L 
on the figure]. Then the (correct) sound is lower pitched, deeper 
and more internalised than if it came from the front of the 

• Another possible mistake would be to generate your friction 
from the upper pharynx (nasopharynx), meaning at the back but 
at the top of the throat, behind the inner nasal cavity [area N on 
the figure]. In that case, which is incorrect, the friction would 
resonate more in the nasal sinuses than in the throat. 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

• Often when performing the throat friction you can feel a tiny 
but distinct vibration in the larynx by gently touching your 
Adam's apple with your fingers. (The Adam's apple is the external 
protuberance of the larynx, in the upper part of the middle of 
the throat. It is more marked in men than in women.) In the 
beginning this vibration under the finger is often felt more 
clearly during inhalation than exhalation, even though the same 
sound is produced during both. 

• How deep should the breath be? Its depth and rhythm should be 
as normal. Slightly deeper breathing may be implemented in the 
beginning, in order to generate a clearer friction. But you do not 
need to hyperventilate: this technique does not aim at creating the 
type of breathing used in rebirthing. Our purpose is to activate 
the energy of the larynx through friction. The emphasis is not on 
breathing but on awakening the larynx of energy. 

• The purpose of the throat friction is to reinforce your 
connection with the 'energy', a term that may sound vague in the 
beginning but will become more and more meaningful as you keep 
working on your third eye. As you become more accustomed to 
this friction practice, you will only have to tune into the flow of 
energy around you and the right intensity of the breath will 
follow automatically. Depth and rhythm will vary, for it is the 
nature of energy to vary, and it is our purpose to learn to flow 
with the energy. 

• The energetic action of this friction breathing will be greatly 
enhanced if your neck is straight and vertical, in line with the 
rest of the spine. The more perfectly upright your neck is, the 
more power is released in the larynx. This can be experienced as a 
sudden intensification of the vibration that sometimes takes place 
when slightly moving the neck, thereby coming closer to the 
perfect uprightness. 

• The mouth is only slightly open, but still it is important to 
make sure that it remains open, and more precisely that the lower 
jaw is relaxed so that the upper and lower teeth do not meet. 
When you have become familiar with the vibration between the 
eyebrows (introduced in the next chapter), come back to this 
point: try to practise the throat friction with your mouth tightly 
closed, and then with the mouth slightly open, alternating the two 
positions to feel the difference in your energy. You will notice 
that as soon as the lower jaw is relaxed and slightly dropped, a 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

completely different condition of your energy is generated in 
which the connection with the vibration is enhanced and a general 
opening is favoured. 

Note also that this slightly open position of the mouth is not 
taken to force you to breathe through the mouth instead of the 
nose. Breathe through the nose, the mouth or both at the same 
time, as feels most natural to you. 

• Beginners sometimes feel that this technique makes their throat 
dry or slightly irritated. If so, produce the friction lower down in 
the throat. Beginners often make the friction higher up in the 
throat, closer to the palate, which is irritating to the throat. In 
any case, by practising for a few minutes several times a day this 
inconvenience will soon be overcome. (High quality honey can also 
be used as a soother and awakener.) With practice this friction can 
be maintained effortlessly for hours. 

After a few days of practice the throat friction adjusts itself 
naturally and all irritating sensations disappear. 

• It should be emphasized that the focus of this technique is on 
the larynx, not on the breath. In no way can it be regarded as a 
practice of hyperventilation, since the intensity of the breath is 
just your normal one. It is not even a breathing exercise as such, 
since it is only the mechanical action of the air on the larynx that 
is used, without especially trying to connect with the process of 
respiration. The friction is used to create a stimulation of the 
vibration in the larynx, but at a later stage of the practice it 
becomes possible to awaken the same vibration in the larynx 
without making use of the breath. 

• Why is the protuberance of the larynx called Adam's apple, and 
why is it more marked in men than in women? It is said that 
when Adam tried to swallow the piece of apple of the tree of 
knowledge, it remained stuck in his throat! 

2.2 Purposes and effects of the throat friction 

The throat friction is a sound of energy. It quietens the mind and 
when mastered, instantaneously induces a 'tuned-in' state of 

One of its main actions is to amplify any psychic phenomena. The 
way we will use the throat friction in the following chapter will 
be to connect it with the area between the eyebrows to strengthen 
your awareness of the third eye. In later practices the throat 
friction will be connected with different structures of the body 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

of energy to help reinforce them. 

What does 'connecting' mean? It is a feeling that is easier to 
experience than to describe. Suppose you are trying to connect the 
throat friction with the area between the eyebrows, for instance. 
In the beginning there is a simultaneous awareness of them. Then a 
resonance automatically takes place between the two. The area 
between the eyebrows seems to vibrate together with the throat 
friction. Then a 'mixing' takes place. The throat friction combines 
with the feeling between the eyebrows. There is a communication 
of energy between the larynx and the third eye. That is what is 
meant by 'connecting'. 

There follows a simple but essential experience: the perception of 
the third eye quickly becomes more distinct and tangible. This 
result is clear and instantaneous. The effect of the throat friction 
is to 'give shape', make things more substantial. Therefore, 
whenever you connect the throat friction with a chakra or any 
other organ of energy the organ becomes more perceptible. The 
larynx makes things manifest, it reveals them. 

A similar effect will be observed when working on auras. You first 
have to build up the inner space and engage the process of seeing. 
Then some exercises will show how your perception of non- 
physical halos and auras is instantaneously boosted when combining 
throat friction and vision (see Chapters 5 and 7). The lights and 
colours will appear significantly 'denser' and more tangible. 
The throat friction can also be used to establish a linkage between 
different structures of energy. Not only can you connect the 
friction to the third eye or any other organ of energy, but you 
can also enhance the connection between different organs of 
energy, and link them through the friction. For instance in the 
chapters on channel release you will work at establishing a linkage 
between the energy of the hands and that of the third eye. And in 
the chapters on protection you will learn to connect the third eye 
with belly energies. 

As you advance along this path you will discover several other 
miraculous functions associated with the larynx. For instance, the 
larynx of energy is a wonderful purifier: it can digest all kinds of 
toxic energies. It also plays a major role in the metabolism of the 
nectar of immortality. I recommend that you do not treat the 
throat friction as routine, but regard it as a sacred quest for the 
mysteries of the larynx. 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 
2.3 The mysteries of the larynx 

One finds in the Sanskrit literature some surprising stories about 
the voice. The rishis, or seer-sages of ancient India, were said to 
have many extraordinary abilities called slddhis. One of them was 
the vac-siddhi (vac = voice), by which whatever the rishi said 
would come true. Sometimes just by uttering a word, a rishi could 
materialise a whole army and change the course of history. It 
followed that the spoken word was regarded as sacred and 
unalterable, which was not without its problems at times. For 
instance in the Mahabharata, the longest poem in the recorded 
history of humankind, the five Pandava brothers attend a 
tournament where one of them gains the most beautiful princess 
as a wife. Returning home, the brothers announce to their 
mother, the virtuous Kunti, "We have brought back a treasure." 
Then rather unfortunately the mother exclaims, "Good, let it be 
shared between the five of you," after which the princess has to 
become the wife of the five men, taking turns with each, and 
supposedly without being partial to any of them. 
The creative power of the voice is clearly expressed in Sanskrit, 
where vac, voice, is often regarded as a synonym for saktl, which 
is the creative energy, the power of manifestation. In various 
trends of ancient Greek philosophy one finds a similar concept in 
the logos. The primary meaning of logos is 'word', but it also 
means creative principle. Later, in the gospel of Tohn (originally 
written in Greek), it is also the term logos which is used to 
characterise the creative principle by which the creation was 
manifested: "In the beginning was the logos (Word), and the logos 
was with God, and the logos was God." (Tohn 2:1) Note that the 
first book of the Old Testament also presents a picture in which, 
at various stages of the genesis of the world, God uses the power 
of the Word to create: "And God said, Let there be light: and there 
was light." (Genesis 1:3) "And God said, Let there be a firmament 
in the midst of the waters, and let it divide the waters from the 
waters." (Genesis 1:6) "And God said, Let the earth bring forth the 
living creature..." (Genesis 1:24), and so on. 

In my epic novel, Atlantean Secrets, you will find startling 
descriptions of the mysterious power of the voice cultivated by 
Atlantean initiates, through which they could influence nature, 
perform healings, and accomplish a whole range of miraculous 
feats. Rudolf Steiner in his teachings has also left many indications 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

related to the power of the voice. An aspect he has particularly 
developed is the polarity between voice and generative organs, for 
which he describes many consequences as far as the evolution of 
humankind is concerned. 

Apart from Steiner's indications, certain simple facts show that 
there is a connection between the voice (and therefore the larynx) 
and sexual energy. For instance, it is when the sexual organs 
develop, at puberty, that the male voice changes pitch, due to the 
action of the male hormone testosterone. In women, alterations of 
the voice can also be observed following menopause. 
In astrology, the voice organ is related to the sign of Taurus and 
the sexual organs to Scorpio. The polarity between the sexual 
organs and the larynx is indicated by the opposition between the 
two signs. 

Taurus is ruled by Venus, Scorpio by Mars. Venus and Mars form a 
couple, with dialectically opposed functions. 



Taurus-Scorpio axis on the zodiac 
Another connection between voice and organs of generation can be 
found in ancient Hebrew, where one of the words for voice is 
yedlah, coming from the root yadah, meaning to know. And it is 
certainly no coincidence that the biblical way of referring to 
sexual intercourse is yadah, to know. For instance: "And Adam 
knew Eve his wife; and she conceived, and bore Cain..." (Genesis 4:1) 
In acupuncture the point ql chong (Stomach 30), located on the side 
of the pubic bone, has among its symptoms: sore throat after 
sexual intercourse. One can find several other connections in 
traditional Chinese medicine between sexual energy and throat. For 
instance, among the organs it is the kidney that is said to be the 
storehouse of sexual energy. And in the throat one finds the 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

tonsils, which also have the shape of a kidney. When there is a 
release of 'fire' by the kidney, it may result in an inflammation 
of the pharynx (pharyngitis) or of the tonsils (tonsillitis). 
But let us return to Steiner and look at his views on the future of 
the voice organ. Steiner considered that in the trend of human 
evolution, the importance of certain body parts is slowly waning 
while some other organs will play a more and more essential role 
in the future. The sexual organs belong to the first category, 
while the larynx definitely belongs to the second. 
Steiner has often mentioned that around the middle of Lemuria 
(the epoch that preceded Atlantis), a critical event took place in the 
occult history of humankind. Until then the libido of human 
beings was still directed entirely towards procreation, so that each 
human being was able to generate offspring of its own. In other 
words we were all hermaphrodites. One single being could give 
birth to another being without having to be fecundated by anyone. 
Note that the concept of primordial human beings as 
hermaphrodites is found not only in Steiner but also in several 
myths of various traditions. 

Then Steiner describes how, in the middle of cataclysmic 
alterations of planet Earth, human beings lost half their 
procreative energy. They stopped being hermaphrodites: the sexes 
were separated. Each human being retained only half of the 
procreative energy and from then on had to find someone of the 
other sex in order to have a child. What happened to the other 
half of the procreative energy, the one that was no longer 
available for procreation? According to Steiner, it was redirected 
towards a different function: catching the Ego, or Higher Self. 
Until then human beings had been living like blobs, completely 
disconnected from their Ego. And it was by the redirection of half 
of their sexual force that they established the beginning of a 
connection with the Ego. They became spiritual beings. 
Such a vision suggests quite an interesting way of looking at the 
relation between sexual energy and spirituality, and at sexuality in 
general. For example it presents the sexual instinct as a quest for 
the 'lost half'. And at the same time it suggests that the lost half 
is not ultimately to be found outside, in a union with another 
being, but in a full communion with one's own Spirit. It also 
suggests that the sexual energy and the energy that allows us to 
connect with the Spirit are of fundamentally the same nature, and 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

that the latter is nothing other than a refined and redirected 
form of the former. This conception fits quite well with the 
Taoist systems of inner alchemy, in which one works at refining 
and transmuting the sexual energy in order to generate the 
embryo of immortality, the subtle body in which the fullness of 
the Higher Self can be experienced permanently. 

But let us return to the voice. Steiner describes how, after human 
beings had half of their sexual energy redirected (around the 
middle of the Lemurian epoch), some new organs appeared in the 
human body. The larynx was one of them. This establishes a direct 
connection between the transformed and spiritualised sexual 
energy and the larynx: as long as the hermaphrodite's sexual 
energy was 100% directed towards procreation, the larynx could 
not appear. Once part of the sexual energy was refined in order to 
start 'catching' the Spirit, the larynx started to develop. 
Now, if we try to understand the present function of our larynx, 
we see that through the voice we express our thoughts and our 
emotions, which is a way of giving them a more defined form. As 
soon as you start practising the exercises given in the first 
chapters of this book, you will realize that the throat friction 
makes the third eye more tangible, as if shaping it. You will tune 
into your third eye, and as soon as you start implementing the 
throat friction, the third eye will immediately be perceived more 
clearly and more intensely. 

Steiner predicts that in the future of humankind, the larynx's 
capacity to give form will become extreme, and the creative power 
of the word will manifest even in the physical plane: just by 
saying a word, the corresponding object will be materialised. Even 
though staggering if one measures its implications, this concept is 
after all no different from the vac-slddhl or creative power of the 
word which, according to the Sanskrit texts, the ancient Indian 
rishis had mastered. This suggests that human beings are gradually 
gaining the capacity to create, similar to that of the Elohim in the 
Old Testament. In other words it presents human beings as creative 
gods in the making — a theme that runs through the whole of the 
western esoteric tradition, starting in Genesis when, Adam having 
eaten of the tree of knowledge, the Elohim exclaim: "Behold, the 
man is become as one of us." (Genesis 3:22) All these considerations 
on the larynx lead one to think that there may be some symbolic 
meaning behind the fable that Adam's apple was the piece of the 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

fruit of the tree of knowledge that remained stuck in his throat. 
Interestingly, Steiner foresaw a crucial step in the long-term 
evolution of the larynx: the sexual force having been completely 
transmuted, the procreative function will no longer be 
implemented from the sexual organs but from the larynx. Human 
beings will then have gained the capacity to speak their children 

Another of Steiner's visions which is quite consistent with several 
other sources of the western esoteric tradition, is that with the 
final transmutation of the sexual energy into the creative power 
of the voice will come the end of death: physical immortality. The 
end of the sexual organs means the end of the separation of human 
beings into two sexes. In the gospel of Philip, one of the most 
exciting of the Gnostic gospels, it is unequivocally stated that if 
'the woman' had not been separated from 'the man', she would not 
have to die with 'the man', and it is the separation of the sexes 
that caused the beginning of death. The same text further 
indicates that as long as Eve was in Adam, there was no death. It is 
when she was separated from Adam that death began. If 'the man' 
becomes whole again, it will be the end of death. 

This can be put in parallel with the gospel of Thomas, in which 
Tesus tells his disciples that it is by making the two one that they 
will become the sons of man, and move mountains by saying, 
"Mountain, move!" 

Then the 'lost Word', on which the Masonic tradition is based, will 
have been recovered, and the Temple rebuilt forever. 
The alchemists often defined their art as a way of speeding up the 
natural processes of evolution of nature. For instance they 
considered that all the metals were on their way to becoming gold, 
and that by transmuting base metals into gold one does nothing 
other than achieve within a short time what nature would 
otherwise take a long time to accomplish. I will have several 
occasions in this book and others of the Clairvision Corpus to come 
back to the inner significance of the gold of the alchemists. 
According to them, their gold was 'no common gold'. At this stage 
we could use this concept of 'speeding up' to define inner alchemy: 
inner alchemy aims at achieving now, transformations that 
humankind will only complete much later in its natural course of 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

The throat friction is designed to achieve an alchemical 
transformation of the larynx and start tapping from its creative 
power. In particular, in the Clairvision style of inner alchemy the 
larynx is used extensively to give shape and to 'densify' various 
structures of the body of energy, as you will start experiencing 
with the practices of Chapter 3. 

2.4 Humming sound and the magic of bees 

Sit in a meditation position, with your back extremely straight. 

Become aware of the cervical part of the spine, in the neck, and 

aim for a perfectly vertical position aligned with the rest of the 


Keep your eyes closed. 

Become aware in the larynx. 

Start chanting a continuous humming, buzzing sound, making 

your throat vibrate. Make the sound while both exhaling and 

inhaling. Make short inhalations and long exhalations. 

Remain aware of the physical vibration generated in your larynx 

by the buzzing. 

Continue the practice for a few minutes. Then remain silent and 

motionless for a few more minutes, just feeling the vibration in 

the throat. 


• This technique can be quite intoxicating. If practised long 
enough, it induces a slightly exhilarating altered state of 
consciousness. The effect is strongly reinforced by being aware in 
the third eye at the same time, according to the principles 
developed in the next chapter. 

• One way of practising this exercise is to make your humming 
sound resemble the buzzing of a bee. Then the practice becomes the 
bhramarln technique of Hatha-yoga. If this proves difficult, don't 
worry. Any humming sound will do, provided you create a 
tangible vibration which you can feel when placing your fingers 
on the protuberance of the larynx. 

Bees, who are great experts in humming/buzzing sounds, are 
highly alchemical little creatures. Their connection with the sexual 
energy of plants is easy to observe. For instance, they help many 
plants to reproduce, by carrying pollen (the plant equivalent of 
semen) from one to another. They take the nectar from the 
reproductive parts of plants and turn it into honey. 


Chapter 2 - The Mysteries of the Larynx 

Honey is a remarkable substance in many ways. It keeps for years 
without any preservation process — a very long time, especially if 
you compare it to the lifespan of a worker-bee, which is about one 
or two months. So the bees take a sexually-related product and 
turn it into a non-perishable substance. This of course reminds us 
of the alchemical processes by which the sexual force is 
transmuted and which result in the formation of the body of 
immortality. On a simpler level, royal jelly, another product of 
the hive, is highly sought after and regarded as a substance of 

Honey, interestingly enough, has always been considered an 
excellent remedy for the throat, and bees a symbol of eloquence. 
In Hebrew one of the words for voice is dlbur, coming from the 
root daber that gives the verb ledaber, to speak. And bee is dvora, 
coming from the same root. (The name Deborah comes from the 
Hebrew dvora, bee.) 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

3.1 What is the third eye? 

The third eye is the gate that opens to the space of consciousness 
and to the inner worlds. It is also the main organ through which 
the body of energy can be awakened and governed. So, practically, 
the third eye acts as a 'switch', which can activate higher 
frequencies of the body of energy and thereby lead to higher 
states of consciousness. 

From a therapeutic point of view, it has been my experience over 
the years that many clients get better when they connect with 
their third eye, whatever the nature of their problem. Due to its 
function as a switch, as soon as it is activated the third eye tends 
to set into motion several circulations of energy. This 
automatically results in correcting a number of physical and 
emotional disorders, a process that could be described as a kind of 
self-acupuncture. Moreover, even the beginning of third eye 
awakening tends to put people in touch with more profound 
aspects of themselves, which in itself has a major healing action. 
Of course, I am not suggesting that it is enough to connect with 
the third eye to heal everything, but still the potential of this 
centre is so enormous that I would not be surprised if in the 
coming decades, more and more 'third eye therapies' were 

From a spiritual point of view, in both the Christian and Hindu 
traditions one finds texts that compare the body to a temple. If 
we were to develop the analogy, we could compare the third eye to 
the temple's portal. By crossing the portal one goes from the 
profane to the sacred, from the stage where one reads and thinks 
about spiritual life to the stage where one starts experiencing it. 
The third eye has always been regarded by those who seek to know 
themselves as a most precious jewel, hence the precious stone 
placed on the forehead of statues of buddhas. 
In this chapter we will describe how to begin to establish a 
connection with the third eye (practice 3.2). Then we will cover a 
technique of meditation (3.7) through which the third eye can be 
further explored and developed. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

3.2 First opening 

Preliminary advice for the opening practice 

This opening practice is designed to give you a first 'thread' to the 
third eye, by awakening a certain feeling between the eyebrows. It 
is designed to be practised only once, or a few times within a 
short period of time. Then the work on the eye will be continued 
with the meditation technique indicated below (3.7), and with all 
the other practices of the book. 

A good way to start is to choose a day when you don't have 
anything else to do, at the beginning of a weekend for instance, 
and to focus intensely on the practices. After this strong initial 
imprint it will be easier to follow the rest of the techniques. 
You can either do the practices alone or with friends, which will 
make the energy more intense. The best day of the month to start 
is the one preceding the Full Moon. However you do not have to 
worry too much about the calendar. The important thing is to do 
it, rather than wait for the perfect time. 

Preferably wear light-coloured clothes (white is best). Avoid 
wearing black. 

Remember that you are dealing with subtle perception. The 
vibration should not be expected to feel like a dagger in your 
forehead. Even if you can only perceive a faint little tingling or 
pressure between the eyebrows, that will be enough to start the 
process. All the other practices in the book will contribute to 
enhancing and developing the perception. 

Remember, no imagination, no visualisation. Let things come to 
you. A certain tiny vibration is already present between the 
eyebrows in everybody. The purpose is to reveal this natural 
vibration, in order to cultivate it later on. 

Read the instructions given in the following section carefully a 
few times before putting them into practice. 


Choose a quiet room where no one will disturb you for at least an 
hour. You do not have to be alone, you can implement this practice 
together with friends. But there should not be anyone in the room 
who is not practising with you. 
Light candles around the room. 
Take off your shoes. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Undo your belt, tie, or other restrictive clothing. 

Take off your watch. 

Lie down on the floor, on a carpet, blanket, or thin mat. The arms 

should not be crossed but should lie by your side. It is preferable 

to have the palms facing upwards. 

The legs should not be crossed. 

Close your eyes. Keep your eyes closed until the end of the 


Relax for 2 or 3 minutes. 

Do 5 or 10 minutes of humming sound (section 2.4). 

Phase 1 

Become aware in the throat. Start breathing with the throat 

friction, as explained in the last chapter (section 2.1). 

Become aware of the vibration generated in the larynx by the 


Be just aware, without any particular concentration. 

Flow with the energy. If some movements take place in your body 

or in your consciousness, let them happen. 

Continue for 5 to 10 minutes, breathing with the friction, aware 

of the vibration in the larynx. 

Phase 2 

Maintain the throat friction. 

Instead of placing your awareness in the larynx, now become aware 

in the area between your eyebrows. 

Do not concentrate. If you 'grasp' the area between the eyebrows 

with too tight a focus, the process can't unfold. Flow with the 

energy. Follow what comes spontaneously. If the breath naturally 

changes and becomes more intense, then follow the breath. But 

make sure that you maintain some friction in the throat 

throughout these first 5 phases of the practice. 

Remain 'just aware' between the eyebrows, breathing with the 

throat friction, for about 5 minutes. Time precision is not 

relevant for this practice, so there is no need to look at your 


Phase 3 

Place the palm of your hand in front of the area between the 
eyebrows. The hand does not touch the skin, it is about 3 to 5 
centimetres (1 or 2 inches) away. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Note that the hand does not touch the skin. 

For a few minutes, stay lying on the floor with the eyes closed, 
breathing with the throat friction, aware between the eyebrows, 
and the palm 1 inch in front of this area. 

Phase 4 

Keep your hand in front of you or put it back by your side, as 

you prefer. 

Remain with your eyes closed, breathing with the throat friction, 

aware between the eyebrows. 

Start looking for a vibration between the eyebrows. It can take 

different forms: either a clear vibration or a tingling, or even a 

rather blurry pressure, a weight or a density between the 


Do not try hard. Remain vacant, let things happen. 

Note that your eyes remain closed during all phases of this 


Phase 5 

As soon as the faintest feeling of vibration or tingling, pressure, 

pulsation, density or weight is perceived, proceed as follows: start 

connecting the throat friction with the feeling between the 


Connecting means being aware of both the friction and the 

vibration (or density, or pressure...) between the eyebrows at the 

same time. As you proceed, the link between the friction energy 

and the third eye will be perceived more and more clearly. 

The vibration will change as you combine it with the friction. It 

will become more subtle, and yet more intense at the same time. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

If vibration or tingling is felt in some other part of the body, for 
instance the whole of the forehead, the arms or even the whole 
body, do not pay any attention to it. Just remain aware of the 
vibration (or density, or pressure...) between the eyebrows. 
Continue this phase for about 10 minutes, building up the 
vibration between the eyebrows by connecting it with the throat 

Remember, no imagination, no visualisation. Just flow with what 

Phase 6 

Stop the throat friction. 

Do not focus on the vibration any more. 

Remain with your eyes closed, just aware between the eyebrows 

for another 10 minutes or more. 

Be extremely still, feeling the energy around you. The more 

motionless you become, the more you can tune in. 

Observe if any feeling of light or colours can be perceived between 

the eyebrows. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• Do not concentrate or 'grasp' the area between the eyebrows, 
just keep a very gentle focus in the area. Grasping would only 
block the process. Do not try to 'do', let things happen. 

• Focussing between the eyebrows just means being aware of this 
area, and not directing your eyeballs as if trying to look at this 
area. If you were to implement such movements of the eyeballs, it 
would create a tension that could only disturb the natural course 
of the experience. So the eyeballs are not directed in any particular 
direction. Same throughout the book. 

• A common experience, in the beginning, is to feel vibration (or 
pressure, density...) not only in the area between the eyebrows, 
but also in other parts of the forehead or the face. If this happens 
don't pay attention to it, just focus on the vibration between the 
eyebrows, connecting it with the throat friction. With practice, 
everything will fall into place. 

• If you practise with friends, make sure you are not touching 
each other, in order to avoid inappropriate transfers of energy. 

• If the experience becomes too intense, all you have to do is open 
your eyes and you will be brought back to your normal state of 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

First opening, synopsis of the practice 
Lie down and relax. 

1) Throat friction + awareness in the larynx 

2) Throat friction + awareness between the eyebrows 

3) Same as 2) + palm of the hand in front of the third eye 

4) Throat friction + looking for vibration, tingling, 
pressure, density... between the eyebrows 

5) Connecting the throat friction 

with the vibration between the eyebrows 

6) Motionlessness — connecting with the energy around you 

3.3 Various experiences 

In Chapter 10 you will find a summary of the most common 
experiences encountered when starting to work on the third eye 
according to the principles and techniques developed in this book. 
As far as this first opening is concerned, the only things that 
matter are the vibration (or tingling, or density...) between the 
eyebrows, and the light, if you happen to perceive it. The best 
attitude is to pay no attention to any other manifestations that 
may occur while implementing the practice. 

When dealing with the third eye and with etheric energy, 
especially in the beginning, minor manifestations may take place, 
such as tingling or even twitching, here and there in the body, or 
images flashing back to your consciousness. Let them come and let 
them go, for they do not mean much. Just follow the technique as 
if nothing was happening. 

It may be that the vibration, tingling, density or light you will 
feel between the eyebrows will be quite intense, but it really does 
not matter if they happen to be faint or blurry. As we will see 
later, the intensity of the energy can vary greatly from one day 
to the next for the same person, so it may just be that you have 
attempted the 'first opening' on a low intensity day. However 
faint these qualities may be, they are a first thread, and a 
systematic technology will be gradually introduced in the book to 
transform them into a clear perception of the third eye. 

3.4 Experiential references 

vibration ~ etheric (life force) 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

colours, light ~ astral 
purple light ~ astral space 

As you practise the various techniques working on the third eye, 
you will encounter mainly 3 types of experiences between the 
eyebrows: 1) vibration, 2) colours and light, 3) purple light. 
Roughly speaking, the first one indicates an activation of the 
etheric layer, the second indicates the astral, while the perception 
of the purple light indicates that a connection has been made with 
the astral space (the terms etheric and astral will be developed 
further on in this book). 

Of course these indications are far too simplified to be completely 
exact. But from an experiential point of view they provide helpful 
references to allow you to find your way in the beginning. 
1) Vibration, tingling, a feeling of pressure, weight, or density, all 
have the same significance when felt between the eyebrows. They 
indicate that something is being activated in the etheric part of 
your third eye. 

The etheric body is the layer of life force, equivalent to the prana 
of the Indian tradition and the qi of traditional Chinese medicine. 
(The third eye is not a physical organ, it is predominantly etheric 
and astral.) 

The vibration (or any of its equivalents, such as tingling, pulsing, 
pressure, density...) is the sensation by which the etheric is 
perceived. Whenever you feel it somewhere in your body, it 
indicates that the etheric layer is activated in this area. So the 
perception of the vibration between the eyebrows is nothing other 
than a perception of the etheric part of the third eye. 
Since tingling, pressure, density or weight have more or less the 
same significance, to simplify I shall refer to all of them by the 
same word: vibration. Therefore, whenever you read 'vibration' in 
this book, it refers to any or all of these different forms. For 
instance, "Build up the vibration between the eyebrows," means: 
build up the modality that is most natural to you — vibration, 
pressure, density, or their equivalent. Anyway after some time 
the vibration will be perceived as all of these simultaneously. 
There are different levels of vibration, just as there are different 
levels of etheric energy, some more subtle than others. The 
intensity of the vibration may vary from one day to the next. 
Apart from quantitative variations, it is also the quality of the 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

vibration that tends to vary naturally from one day to another. 
Consequently it is important not to cling to any modality but to 
flow with what comes each day. After some time the experience 
will become more stable and the energy movements will be more 
under your control. 

2) The second type of experience that can take place between the 
eyebrows is that of (non-physical) lights of various sorts, from a 
vague haze, cloud, or glow, to colours and organised patterns. These 
various manifestations can be regarded as equivalent, and indicate 
that something is being activated in the astral part of your third 
eye. To simplify, I will refer to all of them by the term 'light'. So 
each time you read 'light' in this book, it means all or any of 
these: haze, colours, light patterns, shining dots or anything that 
glows. Choose the one that comes most naturally to you and let it 
be gradually refined into a more and more brilliant light. 

The astral body is the layer of mental consciousness and emotions. 
The equation '(non-physical) light = astral' is not absolute, for 
certain high frequencies of light come from far above the astral 
layer. But as you will quickly learn to recognize, the lights and 
colours that commonly appear between the eyebrows when you 
'switch on' your eye are a clear indicator that the astral part of 
the third eye is being activated. 

3) The purple light is often perceived as the background of the 
other lights or colour patterns. It gives the feeling of an expanse 
or of a space that extends in front of your third eye. The deeper 
you contact the purple light, the more you perceive it as a space 
that is not only in front of you but all around you. This space 
corresponds to what esotericists call the astral space. 

This space of consciousness is not always perceived as purple, but 
also as dark blue or even black. What matters most is the feeling 
of space, whatever the colour of darkness perceived. I will 
therefore use the word 'space' for the dark expanse at the 
background of the third eye, regardless of its colour. 
Note that the perception of the purple space is quite simple, and 
that many people have experienced it (in particular during 
childhood) without realizing its real nature. 

3.5 If you are not feeling any vibration at all 

Here are a few indications for those who might not seem to feel 
any vibration between the eyebrows while implementing the 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

It is possible, and not uncommon, that the vibration is there but 
you are not registering it. Maybe you are expecting something 
extraordinary, or very intense. Maybe it is too simple. This 
vibration has always been between your eyebrows and you never 
paid any attention to it. 

Maybe you are blocking the process by trying too hard. Make sure 
you do not concentrate, let things happen. Don't look for the 
vibration, let it come to you. Continue with the practice, insist, 
but in the spirit of letting go. 

There is another reason you may not feel any vibration at all: it 
may be that you are getting light instead of vibration. Remember 
our simple references: 

vibration ~ etheric 
light ~ astral 
If you are perceiving light in any form (from a simple blurry 
whitish haze to the wonderful purple of the space, through various 
types of colours and patterns), then you are already in the astral, 
hence no longer in the etheric. You can't (in the beginning anyway) 
be outside and inside a house at the same time. Consequently, if 
you are getting light, it is quite possible you have bypassed the 
level of the vibration. In that case, just go on with your practice 
with the light instead of the vibration. In the scheme of our 
meditation technique (section 3.7), go from phase 2 to phase 3. 
Don't worry about the vibration, connect the throat friction with 
the light. 

After implementing these practices with hundreds of students at 
the Clairvision School, I have never seen one who did not manage 
to feel the vibration after a bit of practice. Follow the 
Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, where it is advised that those who 
seek do not cease until they find, "and when they find they will 
be astonished." Persist, persist, persist... and everything will come. 

3.6 More about the third eye 

A useful hint is to consider the eye as a patch or a 50 cent coin on 
the forehead. In reality, the third eye is more like a pipe or a 
tunnel, going from the area between the eyebrows to the occipital 
bone at the back of the head. 
The tunnel of the third eye 

All along the tunnel are a number of centres of energy, through 
which one can connect with different worlds and areas of 
consciousness. This explains why different systems may 'locate' the 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

third eye in different places: each of them chooses a different 
centre along the pipe, or even a structure of energy adjacent to 
the tunnel, as a reference point. 

Another important point to keep in mind is that the third eye is 
not physical. The grossest part of the third eye is a structure of 
energy belonging to the etheric body or layer of life force. The 
etheric body has many connections with the physical body and 
therefore the third eye, being the 'main switch' of the etheric 
body, is also closely connected to certain structures of the physical 
body, for instance the pituitary and pineal glands. 
However it would be over-simplified to say that the third eye is 
the pineal gland or the pituitary gland, as stated by certain books. 
As explained before, the tunnel of the third eye is not physical. It 
impacts its energy on a number of structures of the physical 
body, including the frontal sinus, the optic nerves and their 
chiasma, the nerves of the cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone, 
the pituitary and pineal glands, some of the nuclei at the centre of 
the brain, the ventricles of the brain, and others. It would be far 
too simplistic and limiting to pick one of these physical structures 
and label it 'third eye'. Once more the third eye is not physical, it 
is an organ of energy. It may have some privileged connections 
with certain physical structures, but it cannot be limited to any 
of them. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

In the beginning, do not worry about any other part of the 
tunnel, just remain aware between the eyebrows. One has to start 
somewhere, and this particular centre between the eyebrows has 
the great advantage of creating a protective energy all around you 
in your aura as soon as you activate it. Other centres of the 'pipe' 
will be introduced later. 

So in this book, whenever we talk about 'the eye', we mean the 
area between the eyebrows. That does not mean the area between 
the eyebrows is the whole third eye, of course. But in the early 
stages of our training it is the area we will use and develop as the 
main switch, the place to remain aware of permanently. If you get 
sensations in other areas of the head, don't try to suppress them, 
but don't pay attention to them either. Keep your focus between 
the eyebrows. 

3.7 Third eye meditation 

Let us now start our main technique of meditation. The initial 
stages of this meditation process are not intended to project you 
into spectacular states of transcendence, but to work at building 
up the third eye systematically and later on to achieve true inner 
silence. As will be discussed in Chapter 9 on awareness, one of the 
principles of our approach is that one cannot fight mentally 
against the mind. One cannot force the mind into being silent. But 
one can build a structure beyond the mind, from which the mind 
can be mastered. In that sense the third eye can be compared to a 
control tower, similar to that of the 20th hexagram of the I 
Ching. The first phases of this meditation process aim at 
structuring the third eye and imprinting it as tangibly as possible 
into your system. 

Phases 4 and 5 deal with the inner space and the mysterious 
vortices. During the first weeks of your practice, to simplify you 
may decide to bypass phase 5 (the vortex), going straight from the 
phase on the space to the 'non-technique' or meditation proper, 
when you remain 'just aware' above the head. 


Remove shoes, belt, tie and watch. 

Sit cross-legged on the floor or on a chair with your back straight. 
You do not have to be on the floor but your back should be very 
straight. If you sit on a chair it is preferable not to lean back 
against it, so that you allow a free flow of energies. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Meditation phase 1: the larynx of energy 

Close your eyes. Keep your eyes closed until the end of the 


Start breathing with the throat friction (section 2.1). 

The friction breathing generates a vibration in the throat. Become 

aware of the vibration in the larynx. Use the friction to intensify 

the vibration in the larynx. 

The vibration in the throat is made of two parts: one physical, 

created by the mechanical action of the breathing, and a more 

subtle one, like a tingling, that can still be perceived when you 

stop the breath. 

Use the throat friction to intensify the non-physical tingling. 

Adjust the position of your spine. Look for the absolute 

uprightness. Align the neck with the rest of your back in quest of 

a perfectly straight posture. Make sure that the head, the neck 

and the rest of the back are in a straight line. 

Watch how the vibration in the larynx and the flow of energy in 

the throat can be enhanced by getting as close as possible to a 

perfectly vertical posture. 

Cultivate stillness. 

Meditation phase 2: vibration in the eye 

Keep on breathing with the throat friction, but drop the 

awareness of the throat. Become aware of the vibration between 

the eyebrows. 

Connect the vibration in the eye (i.e. between the eyebrows) with 

the throat friction. 

If you are not too sure of what 'connecting' means, just remain 

aware of both at the same time: the throat friction, and the 

vibration between the eyebrows. Very quickly, it will become clear 

that a certain interaction takes place between the throat and the 

eye. That is what is meant by connecting. 

Phase 2 consists of using the throat friction as an amplifier, to 

cultivate and build up the vibration in the eye. 

If you have the choice between heavy density and subtle tingling, 

rather go for the tingling. Avoid grasping. Keep the experience 


Meditation phase 3: light in the eye 

Maintain the throat friction. (The eyes remain closed till the end 
of the meditation.) 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Drop the awareness of the vibration. Instead, start looking between 
the eyebrows for a fog or a haze, a glow, or any form of light or 
colour. All of these can be regarded as different modalities of the 
'light' which of course, in the context of this book does not refer 
to physical light but to spiritual light, perceived with your eyes 

Remember, no imagination, no visualisation — just awareness of 
what is in front of you. 

As soon as you perceive any of these modalities of light (fog, glow, 
colour...) even very vaguely, connect it with the throat friction. 
Just as in phase 2 you were connecting the friction with the 
vibration between the eyebrows, you are now connecting the 
friction with the light. Instead of amplifying the vibration, you 
are now working at amplifying the light. 

As you go on practising you will perceive brighter and brighter 
parts of the light. Gradually drop the awareness of the hazier 
parts to focus on the most shining ones. Connect your amplifier- 
friction with the most luminous part of the light. 
A common experience is that of tiny shining particles of light, 
spread in the space in front of you and drifting in various 
directions. As you connect the friction with these luminous 
particles, some will enter you and go straight into your heart, 
feeding it with a precious energy. 

Meditation phase 4: awareness in the space 

Remain in the eye, between the eyebrows. 

Instead of focussing on the light itself and on its shining particles, 

become aware of the background of the light. The darkness or the 

purple light at the background of all the colours will give you the 

feeling of a space, extending in front of you. 

The space may appear purple, dark blue, or even just dark. More 

than the colour it is the feeling of expanse that matters. 

Tust remain aware in the space. Let yourself be absorbed in it. 

At this stage the throat friction can be decreased or even dropped. 

Start breathing with the friction again if the mind goes 

wandering with thoughts. 

Meditation phase 5: spinning in the space 

Start spinning into the space in front of you, spiralling forwards 
and clockwise, as if you were falling forwards into a tunnel. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Spin as if you were caught in a vortex. 

The vortex is there, in the space, waiting for you. Do not try to 

make up a spiralling movement. Rather let yourself be caught by 

the vortex and carried by its natural motion. 

As you go on spinning, the qualities and colour of the space will 

sometimes change, as if you were projected into a completely 

different area. Tust acknowledge the various feelings and continue 

with the vortex. 

From time to time, or even constantly if you wish, you may use 

the throat friction to amplify the vortex effect. 

Non- technique 

Drop any awareness of the breath, of the eye, of the space... 

Just become aware above the head. 

Doing nothing, looking for nothing, being 'just aware'. 

Not even aware of yourself — just aware. 

Remain extremely motionless. 

Practise the art of losing control. 

Let the awareness take over, above the head. 

Coming back and finishing the meditation 

Become aware again between the eyebrows. 

Listen to the sounds outside. 

Become aware of your body. Take a few long inhalations. 

Take as much time as you wish to come back fully, and then click 

the fingers of the right hand and open the eyes. 

Tips, Phase 1 (Vibration in the Larynx) 

• It does not matter if in the beginning you find it difficult to 
separate the physical vibration from the non-physical one. It is 
enough to get a vague sense of the vibration, both physical and 
non-physical, for the process to follow its course. Anyway, by 
trying to be too precise your mind would probably get in the way 
and block the process. 

All that is related to the vibration will probably become clearer 
after reading Chapters 4, 6 and 8 and practising the channel 
release techniques. 

• In the beginning it may be helpful to place your hand close to 
your throat, about 1 inch away, to enhance the feeling of energy 
in this area. Later on, this won't be necessary. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

• For this practice as for any work on the larynx of energy, it is 
crucial for the neck to be as vertical as possible. 

What obvious differences can one observe between the bodies of 
animals and those of human beings? A major one is that the human 
spine is vertical while animals live mostly in a horizontal position. 
Similarly, while animals have a larynx, it is not vertical. This gives 
us a clue about the importance of verticality for the larynx to 
achieve its cosmic status in connection with the Spirit. Another 
clue can be found by perceiving what happens when you 
implement the first phase of the meditation: as soon as you reach 
a perfectly vertical position of the neck, a sudden enhancement of 
the vibration takes place in your larynx. 

Tips, phase 2 (vibration in the eye) 

• The larynx of energy acts as an amplifier and a giver of shape. 
By connecting the area between the eyebrows with the friction 
coming from the throat, you work at building up the third eye. 
In terms of experience, the intensification of the vibration in the 
eye that takes place as soon as you connect it with the friction 
indicates that the action of the larynx is taking place. 

• As explained before, the vibration can also be felt as a tingling, a 
pressure, a density... This phase works at building the etheric layer 
of the third eye. 

Tips, phase 3 (light in the eye) 

• In the beginning, connecting the light in the eye with the 
throat friction just means feeling the two simultaneously. Then it 
automatically happens that an exchange takes place between the 
two, by which the energy generated by the throat friction is 
communicated to the part of your (third) eye that perceives light. 
In practice the experience is quite simple: the friction seems to 
'feed' the light, to make it more tangible and brighter, which is 
another example of how the larynx can be used to 'give shape'. 

• Most of the students who think they can't see the light actually 
see it but don't recognize it. You have to accept that in the 
beginning, the feeling of light may be faint, like a blurry whitish 
haze for instance. And yet this faint glow is the first thread. Use 
the amplifying effect of the larynx to develop it. Practise, 
practise, practise... and the humble glow will turn into an 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Tips, phase 4 (the space) 

• A common experience when reaching perception of the purple 
space, is that of an immense feeling of relief in the heart, as if a 
huge weight had suddenly been lifted. As soon as you contact the 
inner space, your heart feels immensely lighter. Some explanations 
for this will be found in section 3.10. 

Tips, phase 5 (the vortex) 

• The clockwise direction should not be taken as systematic and 
compulsory. As always, you have to follow the energy of the 
instant, and that may sometimes make you spin backwards and 
anticlockwise. Nevertheless, when no particular wind takes you 
backwards, it is preferable to move forwards and clockwise. 

• The vortex is both a vortex and a tunnel at the same time. It is 
preferable not to have fixed expectations as to what it should look 
like. Let the perception arise by itself gradually. 

• Spinning in the space leads to an elaborated science of the 
vortices, through which one can travel far in space and time. This 
introduces a form of travelling in which the purpose is not to 
project yourself outside your body, but to go so deep inside that 
there is nothing left to get out of. The vortex effect that leads 
from one space-time to another is used intensively in ISIS, the 
Clairvision techniques of regression. 

• Approach the vortex with great respect and wonder, as you 
would approach an archangel aeons older than you, and it will take 
you into extraordinary mysteries. 

Thoughts during meditation 

If thoughts arise during meditation do not pay attention to them, 
just follow the process. You will soon notice that a strong 
vibration between the eyebrows tends to quieten the mind and 
significantly slow down its continuous flow of thoughts. So no 
need to fight mentally against the thoughts. Tust don't focus your 
attention on them. Each time you get distracted by a thought, 
simply go back into the eye and continue the exercise. Persist in 
the process, and as the third eye develops, thoughts will 
automatically become less and less of a problem. Past a certain level 
of development the third eye gives the capacity to get completely 
out of the mind and thus out of the thoughts at will. 
Often, when the level of thoughts becomes disturbing, one can 
quieten them down by intensifying the throat friction, which has 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

the action of reinforcing the vibration in the eye. But remember 
that in our meditation, the purpose is not to make the mind silent 
— a notoriously hopeless exercise — but to build the third eye. 
Once this is achieved, thoughts won't matter any more. 
Synopsis of the third eye meditation 
Preparation: sitting with your back vertical 

1) Throat friction + vibration in the larynx 

2) Throat friction + vibration between the eyebrows 

3) Throat friction + light between the eyebrows 

4) Space 

5) Spinning in the space: the vortex 
Non-technique: just awareness above the head 

Suggested times for each phase: 

• For a 30 minute meditation: 5 minutes for each of the 5 phases, 
plus 5 minutes above the head. 

• For a 60 minute meditation: Phase 1, 5 minutes. Phase 2, 10 
minutes. Phase 3, 10 minutes. Phase 4, 10/15 minutes. Phase 5, 
15/20 minutes. 5 minutes above the head. 

• For a 10 minute meditation: take roughly 2 minutes for each 

Do not neglect phase 1, even when short of time, for it is an 
essential part of the process. 

3.8 More humming/buzzing 

This technique uses the humming sound we practised in section 2.4. 
Sit with your back straight and become aware in the throat. 
Repeat phases 1, 2 and 3 of the third eye meditation, using 
humming/buzzing instead of the throat friction. 
Then let yourself be immersed in the space, as in phases 4 and 5, 
using humming sound from time to time to penetrate deeper into 
the space. 


• These humming sounds provide a powerful way to project 
yourself into the space. Don't hesitate to have recourse to them 
whenever you are disturbed by thoughts or mental activities 
during your meditation. 

3.9 How to organize your practice 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

During the first days of your practice do as much meditation as 
you can, repeating the first opening practice (section 3.2), and 
using the third eye meditation (3.7), as well as its equivalent with 
the humming sounds (3.8) and any other techniques you may pick 
up from the rest of the book. This strong initial imprint will 
make it easier to follow the rest of the process. 
Then a good way to proceed is to spend some time every morning 
practising the third eye meditation (3.7) and other exercises. For 
instance, meditate for 20 or 30 minutes, then practise the channel 
release exercises (Chapters 4, 6 and 8) for 10 minutes, then the 
techniques on seeing (Chapters 5 and 7) for 10 minutes, then the 
techniques on protection (Chapters 18 and 20) for 10 minutes. Do a 
night practice (Chapters 13, 14, 15) every evening before going to 
sleep, and possibly in the afternoon or early evening, for instance 
if you are tired after coming home from work. 

If you have more time it is certainly possible, and beneficial, to 
devote longer periods to the exercises. Yet it should be clear that 
the Clairvision techniques have been designed for those who live in 
the world. They do not invite you to withdraw from your 
activities, but to start performing them with a new awareness, as 
will be discussed in Chapter 9. 

To succeed, the secret is not so much to spend long hours 
meditating but to incorporate more and more of these practices 
into each of your daily activities. The cornerstone of our method 
is to maintain a permanent awareness in the eye (between the 
eyebrows) whatever you are doing (apart from sleeping). This does 
not refer to the light or the space, which are to be kept for 
meditation times. But by permanently keeping an awareness of 
some vibration between the eyebrows, you will achieve a double 
purpose. On the one hand you will gradually become more present 
in your actions, and centred; on the other hand your third eye 
will be nurtured by your awareness and develop into a powerful 
centre of energy. So all the techniques of this book are to be 
regarded as occasions to cultivate a new awareness. The first and 
main benefit of our techniques of vision is that to implement 
them you have to remain aware and present between the eyebrows. 
If you are short of time, you can very well follow the process 
indicated in this book by meditating (technique 3.7) only 5 to 10 
minutes every morning and incorporating the other practices into 
your daily routines. But these 5/10 minutes of morning 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

meditation are essential for the development of your third eye. If 
your schedule is such that your practice time is in the evening and 
not in the morning, still try to keep the 5/10 minutes of morning 
meditation at any cost, for they secure a reconnection of your 
eye, which completely modifies your energy for the whole of the 

Whatever format you decide to adopt for your practice, remember 
that this part of the path has to do with building — subtle body 
building. The more you practise, the quicker the building will be 

J. 10 The mysteries of the space 

r hile practising ISIS, the Clairvision t 

While practising ISIS, the Clairvision techniques of regression, it is 
not uncommon to re-experience the condition of the embryo 
during the very first days that follow conception. The foetus can 
be felt 'bathing' in the purple space. The purple space is all around 
it, like a sea. The embryo is very tiny and the space around is felt 
to be immense. This space is no different from the purple space 
that you perceive in your eye, in the fourth and fifth phases of 
the third eye meditation. 

To the embryo the space is outside, all around itself. But to us, the 
same space is inside. To enter the space we have to withdraw inside 
and go through the portal of the third eye. In the Upanishads, a 
human being is compared to a city with ten gates. Nine of these 
gates lead outside and only one leads inside. The nine external gates 
are the two eyes, the two ears, the two nostrils, the mouth, the 
anus and the generative organ. The tenth gate is the third eye, or 
ajna-cakra, which does not open into the external world but into 
the inner space. 

So what was outside for the embryo is now inside for us. During 
the embryological processes that build up the foetus, an 
internalization of the astral space has taken place. It is a 
fascinating reversal, through which the inside becomes the outside 
and the outside becomes the inside. And at death the opposite takes 
place: the individual reintegrates into the space. 

This leads us to a deeper understanding of the word 'existence', 
used to describe the period of life on Earth. In Latin, ex means 
out, and sistere means to take position. Existence therefore means 
to take position out, that is, to exit from the space. Existence is 
the temporary exit from the space that we experience between 
birth and death. 


Chapter 3 - Awakening the Third Eye 

Now you can understand the feeling of relief in your heart when 
you immerse yourself in the purple space during meditation. It is 
as if your heart was suddenly relieved of all the pressures of 
incarnated life, all the troubles of existence — enough to make you 
feel much lighter! One of the results of initiation is to establish a 
permanent connection with the space without losing any of one's 
anchorage on Earth. One can then enjoy the peace of the cosmic 
space and at the same time, remain fully involved in one's daily 
activities. Past a certain level, the joyful lightness forever stays in 
your heart, whatever may be happening outside. 

Yet let it be very clear that the purpose of the Clairvision style of 
work is not to take you out of incarnation into some happy-floaty 
paradise, but to prepare you for a work of alchemy, 
transformation of the very substance of your bodies. The purpose 
is enlightenment here and now, in the middle of the cosmic mess 
of modern life. Paradoxically, connecting with the space creates an 
inner freedom that allows you to be more fully in the world. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

4.1 Channel release 

Under the name channel release are grouped a number of 
techniques aiming at awakening and cleansing the body of energy, 
or etheric body. The etheric energy, or life force, is identical to 
the prana of the Indian tradition and the qi of traditional Chinese 
medicine. Our first purpose will be to reach a tangible perception 
of this energy. 

Whilst circulating all over the etheric body, the life force follows 
certain lines of energy, called 'meridians' in Chinese medicine and 
nadl in Sanskrit. We will work on some of these, endeavouring to 
feel the flow of energy along them. 

A more advanced, but essential stage will be to learn to move the 
energy consciously in these channels. 

As this capacity develops, the student will be able to correct 
several health problems. It will become obvious that the proper 
functioning of the physical body depends to a great extent on the 
right flow and balance of the circulations of the etheric body. 
As the etheric body gains in strength through these practices, it 
acquires a greater resistance to negative energies. And when an 
undesirable energy is perceived in one of the channels, it becomes 
possible to expel it consciously, the same way as a pebble can be 
moved out of a hose by acting on the flow of water. Such a skill 
secures a high level of energetic protection and will prove to be a 
great help to all those involved in self-transformation or healing. 
At a later stage, inner alchemy deals with the opening of the most 
essential of all energy channels, located in the centre of the body. 
This central channel ascends from the root of the trunk (the 
perineum, between the anus and the external genital organs) to the 
top of the head and above. It is the thunderwand, the path of the 
serpent-fire of the western esoteric tradition, identical to the 
susumna of Kundalini-yoga. One of the purposes of channel release 
is to prepare you for the work on this master channel. Channel 
release trains you to move the etheric energy consciously. 
Therefore, instead of having to 'imagine' a flow in the 
thunderwand, you will be able to implement a proper circulation 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

of energy. 

4.2 Connected shaking 

Stage 1: shaking 

Sit with your back straight, preferably on a mat on the floor, 

possibly in a chair. 

If on a chair, avoid leaning back against it. 

Keep your eyes closed throughout the exercise. 

Shake your hands quickly and vigorously for 10 to 20 seconds. 

Connected shaking 
Then remain motionless with your palms upwards. To achieve 
maximum effect, avoid resting your hands on your knees or the 
arms of a chair (see next figure). 
Become aware of the vibration in your hands. 

Stage 2: vibration in the eye, vibration in the hands 

Repeat stage 1: shake your hands, then 

become motionless with the palms 


Become aware of the vibration in the 


Become aware of the vibration in the eye 

(between the eyebrows.) 

Focus for a few seconds on the vibration 

in the eye. Then become aware again of 

the vibration in the hands for a few 

seconds. Then, vibration in the eye again... 

Go from one to the other several times. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

Then become aware of the vibration between the eyebrows and in 
the hands at the same time. 

Stage 3: friction 

Repeat stage 1: shake your hands for 10 to 20 seconds. Then remain 
motionless with your eyes closed, palms upwards. Become aware of 
the vibration in the eye and in the hands at the same time. Remain 
in this perception for 1 minute. 

Then start breathing with the throat friction, as described in 
Chapter 2. Connect the friction with the vibration in both the eye 
and the hands. Continue the practice for 1 or 2 minutes. Watch 
the quality of the vibration change. 


• A whole range of experiences can result from this practice. An 
essential point is to realise that a modification, in both the hands 
and the eye, occurs as soon as you start the friction. The vibration 
becomes more intense, more tangible, and at the same time its 
quality becomes more subtle. 

• The throat friction not only intensifies the vibration, it also 
helps connect the eye with the centres of energy in the palms of 
the hands. A triangle of energy can often be felt, linking the eye 
and the palms. 

Stage 4: connecting 

Shake the hands for a few seconds. Then remain motionless with 

your palms upwards. 

Feel the vibration in the eye and the vibration in the hands. 

Start breathing with the throat friction. Connect the friction 

with the vibration in the eye and the hands. Watch the changes in 

the vibration that automatically take place due to the friction. 

Then try to feel the connection between the hands and the eye. 

Use the throat friction to amplify this connection. 

What exactly can you feel between your hands and your eye? 

Apart from feeling, can you 'see' anything (with your eyes closed)? 

How does the energy in your hands change as you intensify the 

connection with your eye? 

Tips and traps 

• The perception of energy linkage between eye and hands is often 
accompanied by the perception of a triangle of light. At a more 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

advanced stage of the training, this triangle of light will play an 
important role in certain key practices of inner alchemy. 

• Please remember our basic rule: no imagination, no visualisation. 
Flow with what comes. Develop what you have, don't make 
anything up. If you can only feel a slight tingling in your hands, 
work at developing it with the friction and by regularly 
implementing the other techniques of the book. 

• As you go on practising this exercise and the following ones, it 
will appear that they create a gradual refinement of what flows" 
into your hands. The more the vibration in the hands is connected 
with the awareness in the eye, the more it will become subtle and 
endowed with healing qualities. This is a first step in the 
development of the hands of a healer. 

4.3 Connected rubbing 

Sit with your back straight. 

Vigorously rub your hands together for up to 20 seconds, or more. 

Remain motionless with your palms upwards. Spend a few seconds 

observing the quality of vibration in your hands and in your eye. 

Then start breathing with the throat friction. Connect it to the 

vibration in your hands and in your eye. Be aware of the subtle 

changes that take place in the vibration of the hands due to the 


Connect the vibration in the eye with the vibration in the palms. 

Use the throat friction to intensify this connection. Sense the 

vibration in the hands becoming more and more refined. 


• Apart from the work on perception, those who are involved in 
massage or any form of healing with hands will benefit from 
implementing this exercise at the beginning of their sessions. 

• While practising channel release, always pay attention to the 
fact that the quality of energy that flows through your hands 
depends on the quality of the vibration in your eye, and on the 
connection between the two. The more subtle the vibration in your 
eye, the more refined the energy flowing in your hands. A 
powerful modality of healing, both for yourself and for your 
clients, consists of tuning into the highest quality of vibration in 
your eye and transmitting it through your hands. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 
4.4 Vibration = etheric 

Fundamentally, the etheric is the layer of the vibration: whenever 
you feel the vibration, you feel the etheric. This statement is too 
simple to be completely true, and later on you may discern certain 
etheric frequencies of light or astral vibration. But in the 
beginning, the equation: 'vibration = etheric' constitutes an 
excellent reference to make sense of your experiences. For 
instance, feeling vibration in your hands indicates that the etheric 
life force is set in motion in the hands. Feeling vibration between 
the eyebrows indicates that the etheric layer of the third eye is 
activated... and so on, for any body part, or even outside the limits 
of your body. For the etheric not only permeates the physical 
body, it also extends beyond it, in proportions that may vary 
according to different inner factors. 

When the vibration in your hands or elsewhere seems to become 
more subtle, it indicates that you are getting in touch with deeper 
and more subtle layers of the etheric body. 

In the beginning, we use physical stimulation to awaken the 
perception of the etheric vibration. Later on you will be able to 
get the same vibration without rubbing or using any other 
physical stimulation. The vibration will come from inside. 
I would therefore suggest that in these first stages of practice you 
do not worry too much as to whether your vibration is physical or 
etheric, or imaginary. Trust your experience. A very direct proof 
of the non-physical nature of the vibration would be to cut off 
your physical hand and to realise that you are still feeling the 
same vibration, as in the phantom limb syndrome in amputees. 
Other indications of the non-physical nature of this vibration will 
be that you will feel it in all sorts of places in your body, without 
any rubbing or any form of physical stimulation. You will even 
feel it beyond the limits of your physical body, first around you 
and then in more and more distant objects. The perception of the 
etheric vibration will then have become completely separated from 
any physical sensation. 

In any case, please remember that in our approach there is nothing 
to believe (and therefore nothing to doubt either). What matters is 
not what you believe but what you perceive. Our constant focus is 
on direct experience. Learn to perceive this vibrating energy, and 
then decide how you want to understand it. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

• Have you noticed that when you awaken the vibration in the 
palms of the hands, an intensification of the vibration in the eye 
seems to occur simultaneously? The vibration in the eye seems to 
become more tangible or denser, as if on a faster frequency; 
anyway it is more clearly perceived. More on this important effect 
at the beginning of Chapter 6. 

4.5 General advice concerning the work on the 

• Practise as if you were inventing acupuncture. The method of 
channel release gives you all the elements to find the real location 
of the circulations of etheric energy in your body. Do not take for 
granted any of the traditional anatomical pathways of the 
meridians. Anyway, all ancient Chinese books do not agree about 
the precise location of various particular branches. The map of the 
etheric body, as will be used in the third millennium, is still to be 
plotted. Why not by you? 

• For rubbing, use the bridge of the palm, on the other side of 
the knuckles. A line of energy can actually be felt along the 
mounts beneath the knuckles, at the base of the fingers. Make 
your hand flat and firm. Apply this line onto the line of the 
meridian that you want to stimulate and move to and fro along 
the line, operating a gentle but firm rubbing. 

The bridge of the palm 
• Remember that whenever you deal with energy, and especially 
in the beginning, there are days when it seems much more 
difficult to reach the perception of the vibration. For instance 
there are days when you are projected into the purple space in 
meditation, but you don't feel much vibration (in particular 
around the New Moon). Other days, it is just the opposite — lots of 
vibration but no space. And sometimes you won't feel anything at 
all. That is the normal course of the process. In the beginning, 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

perceptions are not at all under your control. They come when you 
don't expect them, they disappear without reason. 
Continue the practices regularly and after a few months you will 
just have to go into your eye and tune in to generate an immediate 
flow of vibration. But even once a fair level of mastery has been 
reached, the vibration remains subject to variations from one day 
to the next and even during the same day. 

• In the case of cancer, many therapists advise against any form 
of massage because it might facilitate a spreading of the disease. 
For some, massage even remains contraindicated for as long as five 
years after the last surgical operation, or the last treatment that 
ended the cancer, even if the patient is completely healed. If you 
share this view, it is very possible to implement channel release 
without rubbing, just by moving the tips of your fingers very 
lightly along the meridians, as described in section 6.4. 

• In this chapter, the acupuncture meridians will be referred to 
by the name of a corresponding organ, as frequently found in 
acupuncture literature. Yet it can never be emphasized enough how 
misleading these names are and what great misunderstandings they 
can create. The meridian of the gallbladder, for instance, has a 
number of distinct functions and connects with several body 
parts, from the eye and the ear to the ankle, apart from passing 
through the gallbladder. So the term 'gallbladder' does not 
summarise the function of the meridian at all. If this name is 
used, it is because it is simpler to memorise than the proper 
Chinese name, zu shao yang (literally: 'middle yang of the foot'). 

4.6 Shou jue yin, 'Heart Constrictor Meridian' 

The part of the Heart Constrictor Meridian that we are going to 
stimulate is a line that starts at the root of the palm and goes 
straight up the middle of the forearm to the tendon of the biceps 
at the line of the elbow, and then straight up the middle of the 

Sit in a meditation position. If you are on a chair, don't prop 
against its back. Keep your eyes closed throughout the exercise. 
Rub your hands for a few seconds and repeat practice 4.3. Remain 
motionless with your palms upwards. Become aware of the 
vibration in your eye and in your hands. 

Rub along the line of the meridian with the bridge of the palm 
(the mounts beneath the knuckles) as described in section 4.5. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

Then stop and become motionless, with your 
palms upwards. 

Become aware of the vibration along the line. 
After a few seconds, resume the throat 
friction and connect it with the vibration in 
the meridian. Spend half a minute or more 
building up the vibration along the line. 
Then become aware in the eye at the same 
time, so you connect the throat friction, the 
vibration in the eye and the vibration in the 
line. Continue for about 1 minute. 
Next become aware of the hand on the same 
arm. Even though you have not applied any 
physical stimulation to this area, could you 
feel the extension of the line of energy in 

the hand? To which finger does the path of the meridian extend? 

Then become aware in the shoulder and the chest. Where does the 

line of energy go in these parts of the body? Could you also feel it 

in any of your organs? 

Stop everything and remain 'just aware' for a few seconds. 

Repeat the same sequence with the same meridian on the other 


Snap the fingers of the right hand and open the eyes. 

4.7 Shou shao yin, 'Heart Meridian' 

The part of the meridian that we are 
looking for starts at the root of the palm 
of the hand, on the inner side. If you 
explore with your fingers, you will find a 
little round bone, called the pisiform 
because it has the form of a pea. 
Then slightly contract your biceps, and 
you will find another point of this 
meridian about 1 centimetre inside the 
tendon of the biceps, just at the line of 
the elbow. (Acupuncture points often give 
the feeling of a hole under your fingers, 
like a depression.) You just have to draw a 
line from the pisiform to this point and 
you have the part of the Heart Meridian 
that circulates on the forearm. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

For the part on the upper arm, start from our point on the elbow 
and go up, following a depression on the inner side of the biceps 
like a little gutter. Note that this small depression is not always 
present and that it is easier to find in men than in women. 
If you are not too sure of the location, that does not matter very 
much. Just follow the indications shown by the figure and the 
line will reveal itself as your perception becomes clearer. 
Repeat the practice we described in section 4.6, this time with the 
Heart Meridian instead of the Heart Constrictor Meridian. 

4.8 Shou tai yin, 'Lung Meridian' 

We now repeat the same practice, but on the Lung Meridian. 
The fraction of the Lung Meridian that we are going to rub starts 
at the root of the palm of the hand in the depression where it is 
common to take the pulse, on the radial artery. 

Another point is located at the line of the 
elbow, outside the tendon of the biceps. You 
can gently contract your biceps to feel the 
tendon. The forearm part of the Lung 
Meridian follows a straight line from the 
pulse area to this point on the elbow. 
Then go on up the arm following a sort of 
depression on the external side of the biceps. 
If the muscles of your arm are clearly 
delineated, you will find a sort of furrow 
where the line is. (If you are a woman, first 
look on a male friend of yours. It's much 
easier to find.) But again, you just need to 
have a vague idea of where to rub, as shown 
on the figure. 

Anyway, the location of a meridian should never be taken for 
granted. The descriptions in books should be regarded as rough 
indications only. It is through your own perception of energy, and 
nothing else, that certitude can arise as to the real path of a 
meridian. The best attitude is therefore to rub slightly different 
lines in the area until you find the one that corresponds to the 
clearest feeling of circulation. If you practise, practise, practise... 
the initial vagueness will soon be dispelled, leaving little doubt as 
to the whereabouts of these simple circulations. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

4.9 More details on the paths of the meridians 

(Better not read this section until you have determined for 
yourself the path of the meridians in the hand and fingers.) 
Acupuncture describes the Heart Constrictor Meridian as ending at 
the tip of the middle finger (the one between the index and the 
ring finger). It may well happen that you feel a tingling in the 
ring finger too, as the Heart Constrictor Meridian is said to be 
coupled and to exchange energy with the Triple Warmer Meridian 
that circulates on the ring finger. 

The Heart Meridian is said to end up at the tip of the little finger. 
(The Small Intestine Meridian, coupled with the Heart Meridian, 
also circulates at the tip of the little finger.) 

The Lung Meridian is said to terminate at the tip of the thumb. 
While working on the Lung Meridian, it is not uncommon to feel 
vibration moving in the index finger too, related to the Large 
Intestine Meridian, for there are intense exchanges of energy 
between these two channels. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• If this is not what you've felt, don't worry, for after all you 
might be right! (Yet I suggest you go on practising for a while 
before you make up your mind.) It is the privilege of the seers to 
be able to bring everything into question. For ultimately, direct 
perception is always superior to what is written in a book or 
copied from another book. Maybe also, the traditional cliche of the 
meridians as inflexible pipes is not so accurate. You will rather 
perceive them as 'rivers of breath' or flows of vibration that can 
sometimes deviate slightly in one direction or another. Once more, 
my view is that the essential still has to be discovered, as far as 
the etheric body is concerned. 

4.10 The different levels of perception of energy 

The first level is to perceive the vibration along the line you have 
rubbed and to realise that this vibration is of the same nature as 
the one in your eye (between the eyebrows). 

The second level is to perceive a flow of energy, meaning a 
circulation of the vibration along the meridian. It can either move 
upwards towards the shoulder or downwards towards the hand. By 
using the throat friction and the connection with the eye, you 
will be able to gradually intensify this flow. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

The third level is to become able to move the energy consciously 
along the line. This function has to be developed out of nearly 
nothing, like when a muscle has become atrophied because it has 
not been working for a long period and it needs to be set into 
motion again. 

Once awakened, the experience is similar to that of little hands of 
energy along the meridian. The Tittle hands' contract swiftly and 
they squeeze the energy into movement, a bit like you squeeze 
toothpaste out of a tube. The whole thing is quite similar to the 
peristaltic contractions of the digestive tract (but much quicker) 
or the contraction of the muscles of the arteries that actively 
move the blood. But in the meridians, this takes place on the level 
of the etheric body, not the physical. 

As we are dealing with the etheric, you will mainly be feeling 
vibration. But it may happen that you get some visual experiences 
of light flowing in the meridian as well. Once you start the 
techniques on seeing, described in Chapters 5 and 7, you can add 
the triple process of vision to the work on the circulations of 
etheric energy. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• What if you feel the energy in a meridian more on one side 
than in its equivalent on the other side of the body? As always 
when you deal with energy, there are fluctuations. If this 
experience happens only once and does not come back, it does not 
mean anything at all. 

It is only if you can repeatedly feel the same imbalance over a 
period of time that it becomes significant. If this is the case, it 
means that something is blocked in the line and the flow has to be 
restored, so you should practise more on this meridian until an 
equal flow can be reached. It is rather encouraging, because it gives 
you the opportunity to correct a blockage before it turns into a 
physical problem. Energetic medicines often play a potent role in 
the prevention of health disorders. Interestingly enough, in 
ancient China one used to pay one's doctor as long as one was 
healthy and stop paying as soon as one fell sick. 
If you feel too many imbalances in your energy flows, it might be 
a good idea to discuss the situation with an acupuncturist. 

• Should the energy in the meridians move upwards or 
downwards? In courses given at the Clairvision School, I have had 
the opportunity to share the techniques of channel release with a 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

number of people who had no knowledge of the theory of the 
meridians as developed by traditional Chinese medicine. I was 
therefore able to observe the direction of the natural circulations 
of energy, innocently discovered by the students. I must say that 
what I have seen does not confirm the traditional theory of the 
circulations in the meridians. In acupuncture, it is said that out of 
the twelve principal meridians, six circulate the energy from the 
head to the extremities (feet and hands) and six from the 
extremities to the head. However, I have found that when you 
teach a group how to perceive energy, the great majority tend to 
feel it moving systematically upwards towards the head, whatever 
channel they may be dealing with. 

My advice is to trust your experience and to encourage the flow of 
vibration that feels natural to you. It does not matter if the 
energy does not always flow in the same direction — energy is a 
whimsical principle, which is part of its beauty. Superior health 
comes from harmony with the natural flows, not from 
establishing a dictatorship of energies. 

4.11 Practice 

Implement channel release on the Heart Constrictor Meridian, as in 

practice 4.6. Rub both arms, one straight after the other, but this 

time once you finish rubbing, hold your arms upwards (as if you 

were trying to reach the ceiling). 

Is the direction of the circulation the same as before? 

Repeat the same exercise with the Lung Meridian, then with the 

Heart Meridian. 


• If you can, repeat the same exercise while in a shoulder-stand, 
with your arms up. 

• For your information, I have indicated what acupuncture says 
about the direction of the flows of the meridians in the note at 
the end of this chapter. However, I would suggest you do not look 
at it until you have reached your own perception of the flows. 

4.12 Releasing negative energies 

The technique that we are now going to describe is essential, and 
designed to be frequently implemented. Its purpose is to release 
negative energies. 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

The physical body is made of foodstuff, water, and what we 
extract from the air, meaning physical elements taken from our 
physical environment. Similarly, the etheric body is built of 
materials extracted from our etheric environment. 
Tust as some foods or substances may be toxic to the physical 
body, some etheric energies are noxious to the etheric body. In the 
chapters on earth lines and on protection, we will look at how 
modern life tends to create an accumulation of those toxic energies 
in our environment, making it more and more vital to gain the 
skills to release them from your system. 


Turn on a tap of cold water. Direct your awareness to the flow of 

running water. Tune into it, feel its qualities. Let the water run 

down the inside of your arm from above the line of the elbow, if 

the sink is deep enough. Be really aware and focussed, as if 

performing an important action, and tune into the flow. Let all 

the negative energies be released out of your forearm into the 

running water. Continue for a good half minute. 

Then repeat the same practice on the posterior side of the 

forearm. The more you tune into the flow of running water, the 

more negative energies you can release. 

Repeat the practice on both sides of the other arm. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• Although the practice may seem very 
simple, it is vital. If you do it a few times a 
day, and in full awareness, a new function will 
quickly develop: etheric excretion. You will 
clearly perceive that some undesirable energies 
are expelled into the flow of water, and you 
will feel better in your etheric body, exactly 
as a constipated person feels better after 
passing stools. 

Excretion is a function as essential to life as 
ingestion. One of the discoveries you are going 
to make as you open your perception is that a 
significant proportion of the population is 
'etherically constipated': unable to release 

negative energies. Etheric excretion should happen automatically, 
without us having to think about it. But somehow we came to lose 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

this function, and now we have to work at regaining it 


The accumulation of negative energies in the etheric body of the 

majority of the population contributes greatly to the general 

'malaise' and the level of neurosis of the modern world. 

• If you are living in a cold country, there is no reason why you 
should not mix some warm water with the cold. If the water is too 
cold, it makes it more difficult to open your etheric. 

• If you have to get rid of something particularly noxious in your 
hands, you can potentize the process by alternating cold and hot 

• In the chapters dealing with protection, you will read how one 
can intensify the release effect by exhaling with open mouth and 
throat friction while excreting unwanted vibrations. 

• Think of implementing this exercise with the running water: 

— each time you come home 

— each time you have the feeling of having a 'dirty' energy in 
your hands 

— after giving a massage or a therapy session of any kind 

— after completing a session on your computer, or any other gear 
that has a lot of static electricity attached to it 

— after dowsing earth lines (see Chapter 12) 

— after practising channel release 

— before meditation, not after. (The same applies to showers, one 
of the reasons being that meditation generates a valuable 
internalization of your energies. Running water, on the other 
hand, rather tends to attract the energy towards the exterior, just 
under the skin, thereby counteracting the benefits of your 
meditation. So showers and baths are better taken before you 
meditate than after.) 

— before going to bed 

— whenever else it feels appropriate 

• As you become more capable of releasing negative energies into 
the water, you can implement the same process while washing up, 
taking a shower, bathing in a river or the ocean. Waterfalls in 
particular have a spectacular etheric vibration. 

A note on the circulations of the meridians 

The Heart Constrictor, Heart and Lung Meridians are described by 
the acupuncture tradition as flowing 'downwards', meaning from 
the trunk to the hand. But the Chinese archetypal man is 


Chapter 4 - Channel Release: Let It Flow! 

represented with his arms upwards, the hands above the head. So 
the energy of these three meridians moves towards the sky in the 
Chinese pattern. 

According to acupuncture, the direction of the flow remains the 
same whether you hold your hands up or not. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

5.1 The path of the seers 

Seeing is one of the highest functions of the human consciousness. 
It is an extraordinary experience, allowing you to fathom your 
own vastness. There are different levels of vision, of course. Our 
constant purpose will be to avoid the lower astral clairvoyance of 
the trance-medium psychics, and to step into the 'vision of Truth' 
or vision of the Self, which is like an explosion of all the 
limitations of the mind. 

A key difference between these two forms of vision is that in the 
former, there is attachment to the pictures that flow into the 
consciousness. To reach the vision of Truth, on the other hand, one 
of the secrets is to become less interested in what you see and to 
focus more on the process of seeing, letting your state of 
consciousness expand through seeing. You then reach a completely 
different perception and understanding of the universe. One can 
never completely transpose what is 'seen' into words, because the 
experience transcends the common logic of the mind. That is why 
true vision feeds the Spirit and dispels the false conceptions of the 
soul. 'Seeing' should not be regarded only as a tool for perception, 
but as an experience which has a transformative value in itself. 
Seeing is an expanded modality of consciousness. It is an 
'ontological amplifier', meaning a way to be more. If you think of 
clairvoyance in these terms, you have much less chance of being 
deluded by the illusions of the lower astral vision. 
One of the common mistakes of beginners is to expect to see 
spiritual realities with their ordinary vision and their physical 
eyes, as if suddenly, auras and spiritual beings were to be added to 
the pictures of the world that are received through the mind. This 
cannot work, because the usual mental consciousness is precisely 
that part of yourself which is blind. To start seeing, the first 
thing to do is step out of the mind. 

That is why one of the constant reminders given in this chapter 
will be: if you want to 'see', stop looking. In other words, stop 
processing and analysing images as you are used to doing with your 
mind. Do not 'try' to see. For when you try, you operate from 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

your mind. Let yourself shift into a different mode of 

consciousness, and allow 'something else' to happen. 

As usual, the main secret of success lies in three words: practise, 

practise, practise... 

Our first aim will be to achieve some breakthroughs out of the 

images of our usual mental consciousness, and to get glimpses of 

non-physical realities. In order to fulfil this purpose, a series of 

techniques involving eye contact will be introduced. These can be 

practised either with a friend, or alone, facing yourself in a 

mirror. Both have their advantages, and I would recommend you 

practise both ways. 

5.2 Concerning the practices of eye contact 

• The two people should not sit too far from each other. A 
distance of 90 centimetres (3 feet) can be considered ideal. If you 
cannot touch the other's face with the palm of your hand, you 
know you are too far. If you face a mirror, your image should 
appear to be approximately the same distance away, or slightly 

• It is always preferable to have a blank wall as a background and 
to use candles instead of electric light. 

• The eyes of the two people should be at the same height, so if 
one is taller than the other, cushions should be used for 

• You may be on a chair instead of sitting on the floor, but your 
back should be straight. To facilitate a free circulation of energies, 
do not lean against a wall or the back of a chair. 

Do you know how to recognize a god from a human being 
(according to Hindu scriptures)? The gods are immortal — 
something that may not be immediately obvious when you see 
them. So the Sanskrit texts describe a few other signs. Unlike 
human beings, the gods never cast a shadow. Another sign is that 
the gods are able to gaze at the Sun without harming their eyes. 
Interestingly enough, I have seen more than one schizophrenic 
patient who suddenly started to gaze at the Sun in the middle of a 
mystical delirium, and damaged their eyesight very badly. 
Schizophrenia is a fascinating disease in which it is not unusual for 
patients to relate genuine information about spiritual worlds. Some 
of their perceptions are quite real, even though they are neither 
integrated nor understood, and they take place in the context of a 
general disintegration of the personality. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

Now, the point is that, being human, if you look at the Sun your 
eyes will suffer irreversible damage extremely quickly. Sunglasses 
do not make any difference. No form of gazing should ever be 
practised on the Sun, under any circumstances. Similarly, eye 
contact should not be practised outside during the day, to avoid an 
excess of light harming your eyesight. Anyhow, you will get the 
best results indoors, in semi-darkness. If you practise during the 
day, it is best to dim the room by drawing the curtains. 
Similarly, it is recommended that you do not gaze at the Moon 
without blinking, for its luminosity may also be harmful to your 
eyesight. But there is no restriction at all when it comes to gazing 
at stars. It is actually an enlightening practice that fills the soul. 
• Mirrors... will amaze you! How can it be possible for a physical 
surface to reflect not only your physical image, but also your 
aura, faces of yourself in the past and future, and faces of your 
guides? Chogyam Trungpa, the well-known Tibetan master, once 
told a friend of his that in deep meditation, he could see the realm 
of Shambhala in his mirror. And the mirror is one of the basic 
elements of initiation in western schools of esotericism. 
The ancients must have had a sense of the mysterious nature of 
mirrors, since the word mirror came from the Latin mirarl. 
Mlrari means both to wonder and to admire, and is the source of 
other words such as marvel, admire, miracle... and mirage! 

5.3 Reconnect ion with the space 

Before starting any of the practices of eye contact, and in 
between them, reconnect with your eye in the following way: 
Sit up with your eyes closed. 

1) Start implementing the throat friction (section 2.1). 

2) Become aware of the vibration between the eyebrows, and 
connect it to the throat friction. Keep on building up the 
vibration between the eyebrows for about 1 minute. 

3) Become aware of light or colour patterns between the eyebrows. 
Connect the throat friction to the light. Continue for 1 or 2 

4) Become aware of the purple or dark space (the background of 
the lights and colours). Remain in the space for 1 or 2 minutes. 
This set of instructions (to be practised with your eyes closed) is a 
shortened version of the third eye meditation described in section 
3.7. As always, 'the eye' refers to the third eye, between the 
eyebrows, and not to the physical eyes. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 
5.4 Eye contact with focus in the eye and 'seeingness' 

Let us begin with the first two parts of our triple process of 

vision, which will be described in full in section 5.13. 

Sit with your back straight, in front of a friend or a mirror, 

according to the principles described in section 5.2. 

Before starting, spend 3 minutes with your eyes closed doing a 

reconnection as in section 5.3. 

Then open your eyes. Direct your gaze at your friend's eyes or at 

your own if practising in front of a mirror. 

Part 1: motionless focus in the eye 

Become aware in the eye, between the eyebrows, and remain 
extremely still. Work at reaching a motionlessness that is more 
than a sheer absence of movement. By being focussed in the eye, 
everything becomes still inside yourself, as if your energy was 
coagulating. You can feel yourself becoming denser. 
The stillness of eye contact is a 'connected stillness', in which you 
can feel the energy of your eye resonating with the vibration all 
over your body. Hence the feeling of higher density or higher 
frequency experienced in your body. 

Once you reach the climax of stillness, you get the feeling that 
even if you wanted to move, you could not. Indeed, if you really 
wanted to, you could. But to do this you would first have to get 
out of the experience. 

Throughout the book, whenever the expression 'the eye' is used, it 
refers to the area between the eyebrows. But be careful that by 
'focussing between the eyebrows', it is only meant that you should 
remain aware of that area. It is not meant that you should direct 
your eyeballs as if trying to look in between your two eyebrows. 
The eyes are not directed anywhere in particular, and actually the 
more you can forget about them the better. This applies to the 
third eye meditation (Chapter 3), in which the eyes are kept 
closed, as well as to the exercises of eye contact. 

Part 2: awareness of 'seeingness' 

(Part 1 and part 2 are to be implemented simultaneously.) 
Here comes a big secret of the seers, which can create major 
openings of perception. Usually when you direct your attention to 
an object with your eyes open, you look at the image and its 
different parts. And then the various elements are processed by 
your conscious mind. Some techniques aimed at developing mental 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

acuity even train you to pick up more and more details from an 
image. For instance, a drawing of several objects is presented to 
you. A limited time of a few seconds is allotted to scan it. And 
then you are supposed to list as many objects as your mind was 
able to retain consciously. All this is related to what could be called 
the 'mental mode of vision', vision from the ordinary mental 
consciousness. As discussed before, this layer is precisely the part 
of yourself which is blind to spiritual worlds. In order to become 
able to see auras and spiritual beings, it is necessary to switch off 
this mental mode of vision. 

For this purpose, there is one secret: instead of looking at any of 
the details of the image, become aware of the fact of seeing. 
Usually, with the mental mode of vision, you would be busy 
looking at the image and finding out whether its content is round 
or square, green or yellow, pretty or ugly, and so on. But now, 
with the non-mental mode of vision, you are doing something 
completely different. You drop any interest in the components of 
the image. Instead, you become aware of the fact of seeing. In 
order to see, you stop looking. You shift your attention from the 
object of perception to the process of perceiving. Instead of 
watching the object, you start watching the action of seeing, the 
fact of seeing or 'seeingness'. 

To summarise practice 5.4 

This first level of eye contact consists of two parts, implemented 
simultaneously while sitting in front of a friend or a mirror: 

1) absolute motionlessness with a tight focus in the eye, blinking 
as little as possible 

2) awareness of the fact of seeing, or 'seeingness', instead of 

Duration of the eye contact practice: start with 3 to 5 minutes. 
Increase gradually up to 15 minutes or more. To end the practice, 
follow the steps indicated in the next section (5.5). 

If seeingness is a problem... 

Throughout this book we will refer to a triple process of vision, 
of which part 1 is the motionlessness in the eye, and part 2 is 
seeingness. The third part has to do with the heart and will be 
introduced in section 5.13. If you find it difficult to relate to 
seeingness, please remember the following points: 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

• The perception of seeingness does not have to be precise. A vague 
sense of the fact of seeing is good enough for the process to 

• If even a vague awareness of the fact of seeing can't be reached, 
then forget about it temporarily and proceed in the following 
way. Become aware of the fact that there is an image in front of 
you. Forget about the friend or the mirror and any details of the 

Instead of looking at the image, try to feel it. 

Replace 'seeingness' by 'feeling the image instead of looking at it' 

and continue the process. (Note that it is not only your friend's 

image that you are supposed to feel but also the space around him 

or her.) 

Things will clarify by themselves as you progress. 

• More detailed explanations about seeingness will be given in 
section 7.12. 

5.5 To end any practice of eye contact 

Close your eyes. 

Rub your hands together for a few seconds. 

Place the palms (not the fingers) on your 

closed eyes, touching the face, so that they 

are in contact with the skin and not held 

away from it. Let the warmth of the palms 

penetrate into your eyes. Remain in this 

position for half a minute or more, enjoying 

the healing effect. 

During this phase, you will have momentous 

experiences of inner light. 

Then click the fingers and open your eyes. 

Exchange impressions with your partner. 

Then start again. Do a reconnection with your eyes closed for 2 or 

3 minutes (section 5.3). Then open your eyes and resume eye 

contact in the same manner. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• What exactly takes place when you achieve absolute 
motionlessness, and when you get the feeling that your energy 
coagulates? Among other things, the connection between the 
etheric body and the physical body is slightly loosened. The etheric 
body is the layer of the vibration. Whenever you feel the 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

vibration, you feel the etheric. When you reach a total stillness 
that is more than an absence of movement, it means that your 
etheric body is not so caught into the physical body any more. It 
is partly freed, and more available to perform certain functions 
independently of the physical body. Therefore you can feel a very 
intense vibration all over. 

• In traditional Chinese medicine, it is said that 'the eyes are the 
gates to the heart', and that 'the heart is the gate to the shen. In 
our context, this last phrase can be translated: 'the heart is the 
gate to the Higher Ego'. While applying your palms to your eyes, 
could you feel the heat reaching into your heart? Try to enhance 
this transfer of warm energy that feeds the heart. 

5.6 To blink or not to blink 

In Hatha-yoga there is a technique called trataka, in which one 
gazes at a very minute object such as a point on a wall, or the 
flame of a candle. It is said by the Sanskrit texts that the practice 
should be continued until tears are shed, and then all sorts of eye 
diseases will be cured. I have often heard Indian masters comment 
that during trataka the tears released many 'poisons' and negative 
energies that had accumulated in the eyes. As a physician, I have 
found this technique very helpful in correcting certain defects of 
eyesight, if applied early enough. Quite a few people were able to 
get rid of their glasses by doing this exercise. It worked for people 
who had not been wearing them for too long, no longer than a 
few months or maximum one or two years. In particular, trataka 
works wonders on teenagers. 

All this is to tell you that if you reach the stage where your eyes 
are burning and tears start rolling down your face, you should not 
worry but rejoice. According to the ancient science of Hatha-yoga, 
this will release tensions from your eyes and prevent several 
diseases. Anyway, use common sense: increase duration gradually 
and do not force the practice. There is no spiritual value in 
hurting yourself. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• As always, when you deal with energy, there are days when it is 
easy and effortless to remain without blinking for long periods. 
Other times, it is as if you had a cloud of toxic smoke just in 
front of your eyes, and it seems impossible not to blink every 2 
seconds. The best approach is to accept that energy is whimsical 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

and changing by nature, and to go on practising without placing 
too much importance on these fluctuations. 

5.7 A few common experiences while practising eye 

• The image gets distorted. Sharp outlines become blurry. 

Don't resist, let the image become more and more distorted. In the 
beginning, you have to let go of the physical image before non- 
physical images can be perceived. So let the physical image become 
distorted and blurry. Flow with what comes, even if it doesn't 
make any sense. You can analyse the experience later. If you try to 
think about it while it happens, it just won't happen. 
At a more advanced stage it will become possible to get both the 
non-physical and the physical image at the same time. But in the 
beginning you have to let go of the sharp outlines and let the 
image become blurry before you can see astral colours and halos. 

• The person in front of you seems much further away than he 
actually is. 

This is a pretty good sign. It indicates that you are shifting from 
the vision of the physical reality into the vision of subtle realms. 
As soon as you reach the perception of the astral world, distances 
take on a very different aspect. It is not uncommon for the 
person sitting just in front of you to appear to be far away. 
Whenever this happens, you know that what you are seeing is 
beyond the physical plane. 

• Seeing colours 

In the astral worlds, light does not come from a sun, or from any 
external source such as lamps. Objects and beings can be seen due to 
their own luminosity. They shed their own light. They appear as if 
they were 'made of colours' in an atmosphere of semi-darkness. 
However it should always be kept in mind that the astral colours 
are quite different from the physical ones. It is therefore 
virtually impossible to describe them precisely, due to the lack of 
references in our material environment. A major difference is that 
astral colours often seem to be a mixture of different hues. But 
the different components of an astral colour do not mix at all, 
unlike what can be observed in the physical world. In the physical 
world when two colours mix, each disappears and an intermediary 
shade occurs. For instance, you mix blue and yellow and you get 
green. The blue and the yellow have disappeared and there is only 
green left. In the astral, the situation is quite different: colours 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

seem to be made of thousands of tiny hyper-brilliant points. For 
example, there is a 'blue-yellow-green' in which shiny blue points, 
yellow points, and green points can be seen, intricately woven. 
Astral colours are rarely completely uniform. Their great variety 
and amazing beauty is beyond any comparison with what is 
observable in the physical world. 

Due to the dissimilarity of the nature of astral and physical 
colours, it is not necessarily relevant to try to label an aura 'green' 
or 'blue' or 'yellow'. That is why one should be careful when one 
reads in certain books that green in the aura indicates a particular 
emotion, blue another, and so on. By oversimplifying, one can 
sometimes end up making completely meaningless statements. 

• The room in which you are practising appears darker, the 
quality of the colours changes. 

The background of the astral colours is what occultists have called 
the 'astral light'. It is the basic colour that pervades the astral 
space, and it is no different from the purple light you see when 
you meditate in the eye. It could also be called 'astral darkness', for 
it appears as a semi-darkness, definitely dimmer than the daylight 
of the physical world, but of a different nature than the darkness 
of our nights. The physical darkness is an absence of light. The 
astral darkness glows, hence the expression 'darkness visible' used 
in the Masonic tradition. 

When you are practising eye contact and the room around you 
suddenly appears darker, even though it may be the middle of the 
day, it means you are seeing the astral light. You are shifting 
from the perception of the physical world into that of the astral 
space. Very often, this will be accompanied by a different 
perception of the colours: they will appear to you as indicated in 
the previous paragraphs. 

The astral space is neither unique nor uniform. As you advance in 
your meditation and your travelling, you learn to jump from one 
astral space to another. One of the references that allows you to 
find your way is the quality of the colours and the basic hue of 
the astral light, both of which vary depending on which space you 
are in. In certain regions of the space the background of astral 
light is milky, in others it is darker, nearly black, or even green- 
blue as under the ocean. Even before reaching the actual stage of 
travelling, you can observe these variations in the colour of the 
space when you meditate in your eye. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

The marvel is that it becomes possible, when your 'seeingness' has 
matured, to behold several of these layers at the same time. At a 
certain stage in the opening process, you even become able to 
simultaneously encompass the physical world in your vision. 
In this explosion of colours, the magnificence of the universe 
becomes such that it forces your heart open. Beauty is sometimes 
at the limit of what is bearable. Life becomes a constant wonder, 
and great fun. 

On the other side of the astral worlds is another world, called 
devachan by western occultists and svarga-loka or world of the 
gods by the Hindu tradition. In this world, again a completely 
different range of lights is perceived. These are to the astral 
colours what day is to night. 

• Another face appears in place of your friend's face. 
This is one of the most common experiences while practising the 
techniques of eye contact: The face of the friend sitting in front 
of you disappears and another face can be seen instead. If you are 
practising alone, facing a mirror, it is your own face that 
disappears and is replaced by another. These faces correspond 
mainly to four possibilities: 1) a spirit guide 2) a past life 3) a sub- 
personality 4) an entity. 

1) Spirit guides: it is quite common for your spirit guides to 
manifest in this way to the person with whom you are practising. 
As you progress, you will gain the capacity to consciously manifest 
your guides upon your own energy in a way that will be visible to 
others, even if their clairvoyance is minimal. Eye contact is 
actually one of the most simple and direct ways to get to see spirit 

A variation of this experience often happens while listening to a 
talk given by a spiritual teacher. If you become very motionless, 
stop blinking, and practise our method of vision while gazing at 
them, you will sometimes see their face disappear and be replaced 
by that of their teacher or some higher being behind them. 

2) Another possibility when the face changes is that you are seeing 
an image of yourself or of the friend you are practising with, in a 
past life. 

3) The face can also be a sub-personality of yours or of your 
friend. Altogether, this is not so different from what was 
described in 2), if one considers that sub-personalities have been 
built up by the circumstances of past lives. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

4) The face can also be that of an entity, meaning a presence 
attached to you. An entity can be regarded as a non-physical 
parasite. Just as some physical parasites can stick to different 
parts of your body, likewise some non-physical energies or 
presences can get attached to your energy. 

5.8 What to do with your experiences 

Here is a point that may save you a lot of trouble, if you 
understand it fully: I strongly recommend you do not try to 
analyse too much of what you see. As you practise these exercises, 
different visions will come to you. You have to accept that it is 
going to take a certain amount of time before you can really 
understand what they mean. It takes a great deal of inner 
experience and esoteric knowledge before one can safely interpret 
the significance of visions. 

For instance, when you see another face during eye contact, it is 
very difficult in the beginning to know whether it belongs to the 
other person or to yourself. Apart from the fact that you may 
well be confused and mistake an entity for a spirit guide (which is 
extremely common these days), never neglect the possibility that 
what you see on your friend's face could be a projection of yours. 
If you try to analyse things too quickly, making sense of 
everything, you run the risk of being completely deluded. 
Visions, and experiences in general, are to be digested deeply, on 
the level of the soul rather than mentally evaluated. It is much 
wiser to take some pencils and make drawings of your visions, for 
instance, than to worry about them. Let the experiences work on 
you rather than trying to work out what they mean. 
Remember that our emphasis is on the fact of seeing, or 
'seeingness', not on the content of the visions. When practised 
according to the principles expounded in this book, seeing is a 
breakthrough into higher regions of consciousness. It creates 
breaches in our facade of mental rigidity, and it nurtures the 
growth of the Higher Self through sophisticated mechanisms of 
inner alchemy. In this respect, the content of the visions is 

If you practise along these lines, putting more emphasis on the 
fact of seeing than on the content of the visions, then you won't 
build castles in the astral, and your spiritual journey will be safe. 
Ultimately it is the pure light of the Spirit that will allow you to 
discriminate and move towards Truth, even in the most confusing 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 


5.9 Watching the graspings of the mind 

Get ready for eye contact (section 5.2). Remember that you are too 

far from each other if the palm of your hand cannot reach your 

partner's nose. 

Do a reconnection (section 5.3) for 2 or 3 minutes. 

Practise eye contact as described in section 5.4: 

1) Become aware between the eyebrows. Use your focus in the eye 
to become completely motionless, and to blink as little as possible. 

2) Instead of looking at any of the details of the image in front of 
you, become aware of the fact of seeing, or 'seeingness'. (If 
seeingness is not yet clear, just 'feel the image' instead of looking 
at it.) 

The natural tendency is that the physical image gets altered. The 
outlines become blurry, new colours appear, and all kinds of 
modifications of the image take place, as described in section 5.7. 
As you go on practising, a mechanism of prime interest can be 
observed. From time to time, something seems to retract inside 
yourself. Suddenly, the (non-physical) colours or faces are lost, the 
outlines become sharp again and you are back in the physical 
image. It is as if something pulls you back, like a part of yourself 
that cannot cope with the expansion of the vision. In a split 
second, you are back into your usual mode of perception of 
physical reality. The halos have disappeared and the contours have 
become clearly delineated again. 

Now you don't have to close your eyes but you need to relax, go 
back into the eye, and start the process again. Build up the 
motionless focus in the eye, become aware of the fact of seeing... 
and slowly you shift back into the 'non-mental' mode of vision: 
the image becomes blurry again, halos and/or colours reappear. 
Another interesting finding is that when you are in the expanded 
mode of perception (the 'non-mental' blurry image), your vision 
becomes peripheral and embraces the whole field in front of you. 
You see much more of what lies on each side of the image. But as 
soon as you are brought back into the sharp clear-cut image, your 
vision becomes selective again. Your perception becomes limited to 
some details in the middle of the image, and you lose sight of 
what is on the sides. You are only in touch with a fraction of the 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

To summarise: this practice consists of going into the eye and 
being very motionless, without blinking, and letting the image 
become blurry. Then observe how 'something inside' retracts every 
so often, and projects you back into the image with sharp outlines. 
Relax, let yourself shift into the blurry image again, in which 
altered colours may appear... until 'something inside' contracts 
again, and then it is like falling: you abruptly lose your 
perception. Try to become more and more aware of the nature of 
that 'something' which makes you fall out of your state of 

Continue the practice for 5 to 10 minutes or more. 
Then close your eyes. Rub your hands. Place your palms on your 
closed eyes, as indicated in section 5.5. 

5.10 Grasping is the nature of the mind 

What is the part of yourself that retracts when you do the 
exercise indicated above (section 5.9)? It is the layer of ordinary 
mental consciousness, which corresponds to the astral body of 
Clairvision language (and of Steiner's language), and to the manas 
of the Indian tradition. It is a layer that functions through 
reaction. The Tibetan masters use an excellent word to describe 
this: grasping. Watch how your mind usually operates. A thought 
comes to your mind, about your fridge, for instance. Immediately 
the mind grasps the thought and chains another to it. It is like a 
reaction to the previous thought. You think, "I have to go to the 
supermarket, to fill up the fridge." And then another grasping 
takes place, another thought is linked to the former one: "I also 
have to go to the bank"... and so on. A chain of thoughts is woven, 
taking you far from the original thought. 

During eye contact, your own experience will confirm how 
relevant the word 'grasping' is, to describe this quick little 
reaction that makes you lose your perception of the blurry image, 
and projects you back into the sharp physical image. When this 
happens, you definitely feel a kind of little contraction — not a 
physical one, but a grasping of the mind. 

Subtle perception requires letting go, and that is exactly what the 
ordinary mental consciousness, the manas-mind, cannot cope with. 
The mind has to grasp, that is its very nature. The ma/ias-mind 
grasps you back into the physical image, just as a muscle of the 
physical body becomes tense in a situation of emotional stress. 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

It is essential that you keep watching this process carefully. Go 
back into the focus in the third eye and into the seeingness, let 
the image become altered again... and suddenly, another grasping 
of the mind takes place, and all the perceptions disappear. When a 
master like Sri Aurobindo says that a silent mind is a prerequisite 
for higher yogic experience, nothing else is meant than an 
eradication of those graspings. The more you watch the graspings, 
the more they will appear to you as something superimposed on 
your natural perception. 

5.11 Which state of perception is the altered one? 

Let us develop this last point, because it has immense repercussions 
on the way we see the world. 

When people start working on themselves, they usually have an 
implicit preconception: They consider that the world, the way 
they see it every day through their mind, is the 'real one'. And 
they infer that auras and spiritual beings can be superimposed on 
this vision of the physical reality, through some sort of additional 

Now this exercise (5.9) demonstrates exactly the opposite. It is the 
sharply outlined mental image that appears as an artificially 
constructed reality. As soon as you let go of the graspings of the 
mind, the image explodes into a fluid multitude of astral colours. 
It is not when you see auras, spiritual beings, etc. that something 
is added — it is when you see through the mind! The mind 
contracts and adds a facade of rigid contours on top of the fluid 
reality. The more you get to see the functioning of your mind, 
the more you realize that it is a kind of cramp. Release the cramp 
and the sharp physical reality disappears: the non-physical worlds 
open to you. 

All this is a gradual process of course, it is not going to happen 
overnight. The mind is tenacious, it is not going to let go of you 
too quickly. Nevertheless, when you do the work, a new perception 
slowly develops. From time to time, you find yourself just 'being'. 
It is a very simple and innocent state of consciousness. And in this 
simplicity, auras and other worlds are perceived. 

Most of the time you are caught in the usual functioning of the 
mind. But as you advance, the mind appears more and more like a 
crust on top of your being. It becomes obvious that the mind is 
something added, superimposed. It is only by clinging and grasping 
that it can operate. So you automatically start to regard the sharp 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

images as something artificially constructed by the mind, and the 
fluid level of lights and colours as the reality behind it. You begin 
to be more and more interested in seeing the world the way it is, 
and not the way your mind makes it up. 

One of the reasons I insist on this point is that it is not a 
philosophical theory but something you can observe easily in 
yourself, through the practice. As you keep on working with 
exercise 5.9, the graspings of the mind will become more and more 
obvious to you. 

Here we arrive at one of the essential characteristics of the 
Clairvision approach. Our purpose is not to add a few tricks to our 
ordinary mental layer in order to reach clairvoyance. Our purpose 
is to use perception to reach a pure condition of consciousness, 
beyond false appearances and out of the graspings of the manas- 
mind. The whole process aims at letting go of mental constructions 
and returning, as in the 24th hexagram of the I Ching, to the 
uncorrupted stage. 

5.12 Atlantean climax 

Close your eyes and start with a reconnection (section 5.3): throat 
friction, awareness of the vibration in the eye. Then remain aware 
of the purple or dark space for about 2 minutes. 

Open your eyes and implement the double process of vision 
described in section 5.4: 

1) awareness between the eyebrows, with total stillness 

2) simultaneously, instead of looking at any of the details of the 
image in front of you, become aware of the fact of seeing, or 
'seeingness' (or, more simply, feel the image instead of looking at 

For this particular practice, it is essential that you blink as little 
as possible, or preferably not at all. You have to build up a strong 
pressure between the eyebrows, and reach a climax of stillness. The 
two go together well: the more you are focussed in the eye, the 
more you can become motionless. And the more you let your 
energy densif y (or 'crystallise') through your positive immobility, 
the more you can build up the vibration in the eye. 
Become more and more motionless. Build up the pressure between 
the eyebrows until your body feels as solid as a statue — a statue 
of vibration. The state slowly develops into a connected 
motionlessness that gives the feeling of a great accumulation of 
power, as if your eye was receiving the force of a column of 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

energy falling straight onto it. 

The more you can cease the movement of every single cell of your 

body, the more your eye can receive the force, and the denser and 

more intense the vibration becomes. 

Go on building up the vibration for a few minutes. Explore the 

climax, the maximum power you can receive in your eye through 

utter stillness. Let the power shine through your body. 

Then close your eyes. Rub your hands. Place your palms on your 

closed eyes as indicated in section 5.5. 


• During the last periods of the Atlantean age, through practices 
which bore some similarity to this one it was possible to achieve a 
great mastery over the powers of nature. Now the wheel has 
turned — yesterday's methods no longer yield the same results. 
Several laws of nature operate in a completely different way and 
you could not reach the same mastery using these techniques. Some 
new paths of initiation have to be followed. 

• When practised with the intensity it requires, this exercise 
builds up a state of consciousness with two main characteristics. 
One is an extraordinary feeling of power. The second is an obvious 
lack of compassion. This state is devoid of any feeling or empathy 
for the person sitting in front of you. These two aspects 
summarise the condition of late Atlantis quite well, and are part of 
the reasons for its fall. 

• This practice is not to be implemented on a regular basis. It is 
just indicated here to give you a glimpse of past states of 
consciousness. It will be especially interesting to practise the next 
technique (5.13) just after this one, to realize the difference in 
vibration and atmosphere brought about by the heart feeling. 

5.13 Eye contact, full technique: the triple process of 
vision, including the vision of the heart 

Sit with your back straight, facing either a friend or a mirror. 
Close your eyes and do a short reconnection, as described in section 
5.3: build up the vibration in the eye, breathing with the throat 
friction. Then become aware of the purple or dark space. Remain 
in the space for 1 or 2 minutes. 

Then open your eyes and resume the process of vision we described 
in section 5.4: 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

1) Remain focussed between the eyebrows and very motionless. 
Blink as little as possible. Let your energy 'crystallise' through 

2) Instead of looking at any details of the image, become aware of 
the fact of seeing, the seeingness. If no seeingness can be perceived 
yet, just feel the image instead of looking at it — the whole image 
of the scene in front of you, not only your friend's image. Sense 
it in a 'tactile' way, feeling the pressure of the (non-physical) light 
on your eye. 

To this we now add a third component to be implemented 
simultaneously with the first two: 

3) Become aware of your heart centre, in the middle of the chest. 
Try to feel the other person (or yourself in a mirror) from your 
heart. Don't pay any attention to the image even though your eyes 
are open. Tust be focussed in your eye and feel your friend from 
your heart. 

Your focus is now double, in the eye and in the heart. But it is not 
a split. Rather, it is like anchoring your eye in your heart. You are 
not looking from both the eye and the heart, you are seeing from 
the heart, through the eye. 


• This is our triple process of vision: the eye, the seeingness, the 
heart. You can play with these three elements and emphasize more 
of one or another, depending on the energy flow of the moment. 

• Where is the heart centre located, exactly? Whenever you wish 
to localise a chakra, it is preferable not to be too precise. A chakra 
is not a point but rather a zone, an area of vibration. So one could 
say that the middle of the heart chakra area is roughly in the 
middle of the sternum (around the acupuncture point Conception 
17), and also behind it, inside the chest. But do not look for it too 
much. Rather become aware in this area, and let the feeling arise 
by itself. As long as you remain in the middle of the chest and do 
not go astray in the solar plexus, everything will be fine. 

• This approach introduces a mode of perception that is quite 
different from the usual way the mind operates. Usually the mind 
tries to cognize the world by grasping details from the images in 
front of us, and drawing conclusions from them. In this case, the 
perception is based on the feeling of the heart, independently of 
any of the features of the image. You tune into the person in 
front of you and establish a connection from the heart on a 


Chapter 5 - Seeing 

totally different level than that of the mind. You see him beyond 
his image. 

• This technique shows a clear contrast with the previous one 
('Atlantean Climax'). A softness is now introduced that was 
previously absent. In terms of the occult history of our planet, 
the appearance of this empathy of the heart which was so 
painfully lacking in our Atlantean ancestors has a lot to do with 
the manifestation of Christ Consciousness. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

6.1 The work on the ether ic body 

Before resuming our exercises on the channels of the etheric body, 
let us dwell on some of the aims of this part of the work. You 
must have noticed, and there is nothing surprising about this, that 
a strong awareness of the third eye tends to reinforce the 
vibration along the channels. The more you are in the eye, the 
more you feel the vibration in the meridians. This is very logical 
since the eye is the main switch of the body of energy. By 
operating the switch, you activate circulations of vibration all over 
the body. 

But the opposite is also true! When you awaken a strong vibration 
in the meridians, you can feel the vibration in your eye better. 
Often, just by rubbing your hands and stimulating the tingling 
energy in them, an immediate boost can be felt in your eye. The 
eye appears more tangible, denser, more 'crystallised' and more 

There is a profound mechanism behind this simple finding. The 
etheric layer is not a bunch of disassociated patches, it is a 
coherent layer. It has a unity. All its parts are much more directly 
interconnected than the different parts of the physical body. 
Because of the fluid nature of the etheric body, any wave of 
vibration in one of its parts will resonate with the whole layer. So 
when you shake or rub your hands and awaken a strong vibration 
in them, the whole of the etheric layer is stimulated and, 
therefore, so is the etheric part of your third eye. One of the 
results will be a boost to your clairvoyance. 

The third eye is made of different parts. One of its parts belongs 
to the astral layer, another to the etheric layer. It is only when all 
the parts are fully built and communicating with each other that 
your clairvoyance becomes reliable. Imagine a one metre long pipe. 
If even one millimetre of this pipe is blocked, then neither water 
nor air can flow through. You can't even see through the pipe. 
This is why, in order to develop your vision of non-physical 
realms, it is so valuable to proceed in this work of developing the 
etheric body. While implementing the practices on 'seeing' 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

(Chapters 5 and 7), it is a good idea to do a few channel releases at 
the beginning and in the middle of the sessions. 

Later on, in the process of building the body of immortality, 
channel release will be resumed on a higher mode. The purpose will 
then be to infuse the consciousness of the Higher Self into the 
etheric layer, in quest of the Life-Spirit or trans-substantiated 
etheric body, one of the cornerstones of the glorious body. The 
present phase of channel release, even though humble, has a value 
in preparing for these summits to come, by initiating a connection 
between the etheric and your conscious self. 

6.2 Zu shao yang, 'Gallbladder' Meridian 

For channel release on this meridian, rub a 
line from the outside of the foot to the 
side of the head, via the side of the leg, 
thigh, hip, ribcage, chest (in front of the 
shoulder), and the side of the neck. Search 
in the area indicated on the figure. As 
with all the meridians mentioned so far, 
this one is bilateral, meaning it has its 
exact equivalent on the other side of the 

Once you have explored this yourself, have 
a look at the notes in Appendix 1 for more 
details on the path and the connections 
made by this meridian. 

6.3 The full technique of channel release on a meridian 

Sit in a meditation position with your back straight. If you are on 

a chair, don't prop against its back. 

Keep your eyes closed throughout the practice. 

Rub your hands together for a few seconds. Then remain 

motionless with your palms upwards. Become aware of the 

vibration in your hands and in your eye. Implement the throat 

friction to amplify the vibration and to connect the palms with 

the eye. 

Make your hand straight and firm. Start rubbing along the line of 

the meridian with the bridge of the palm (see figure in section 


Remain very motionless and become aware of the vibration in the 

line you have just rubbed. Connect the vibration in the line with 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

the vibration in your eye. Use the throat friction to intensify the 

vibration and the connection. 

Then try to become aware of the natural flow of the vibration 

along the line. Once again, connect this flow with your third eye 

and amplify it with the friction. 

Try to locate the path of this meridian beyond the area you have 

rubbed. Sense the energy flow in the hand (or in the foot). Then 

sense it in the trunk; then the neck; then the head. 

Then try to enhance the flow by contracting the 'little hands' of 

energy all along the line (section 4.10). The more you progress in 

channel release, the more this phase becomes the essential one. 

Repeat the whole sequence on the same meridian on the other side 

of the body. 

As you become more familiar with the process, you can also choose 

to rub both meridians quickly, one straight after the other. Then 

become aware of the vibration and implement the whole sequence 

on both sides at the same time. 


• Being able to move the vibration consciously by contracting the 
'little hands of energy' requires patient work. You have to persist, 
persist, persist... until the feeling becomes clearer and more 
tangible. Practise daily, contracting the 'etheric muscles' around 
the line, squeezing the energy into movement, and these 'muscles' 
will grow stronger. 

• In channel release you first perform an action, such as rubbing a 
meridian. An after-effect follows: a phase of 'connected stillness'. 
It is during this phase that the most important part takes place — 
the movement of energy, the wave. The rubbing or any other 
movement is like throwing the net. Allowing the movement of 
energy during the motionless stage is like catching the fish. 

In the motionless phase, the art is to allow the energy to be set 
into motion. You are not doing anything. But still, it is not enough 
to do nothing for the wave of energy to arise! A yin skill has to 
be developed, like a passive magnetism, that allows the energy 
movement to take place. You can't do it, you have to let it happen. 
But if you don't do anything, nothing will happen either. 
In Taoism, the example is given of a woman who seduces a man. 
She does not do anything, she just 'is'. And the man is drawn to 
her. But on the other hand, if the woman does nothing, meaning 
if she does not unfold her yin power, well, nothing happens! The 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

man won't be attracted. The very same applies to the capacity to 
create waves inside your body of energy. You can't do it but still 
you have to let it happen. I would suggest that you dwell on this 
principle and explore it during your practices, for it leads to vast 

In Sanskrit one of the names for energy is saktl. It is described as 
a highly female principle. If you practise your exercises as you 
would dissect a rat in a lab, if you are too serious and cold, the 
Force or sakti will find you boring and won't show herself to you. 
Approach the energy as you would approach a lover. Be warm and 
playful and the Force will dance with you. Put all of yourself into 
the exercises, for she gets bored with lukewarm lovers. She only 
gives herself to those who give themselves to Her. 

6.4 Variation without rubbing 

Instead of rubbing the meridians with the 

palms, it is also possible to use the tips of 

your five fingers, with hardly any physical 


Join the tips of your five fingers and rub 

them very gently against the palm of the 

other hand, to stimulate the vibration 

inside them. 

Then instead of rubbing the meridian, 

move the joined tips of the fingers along it. Use a very gentle 

touch, hardly in contact with the skin, or even 1 millimetre away 

from the skin. But put all of yourself into this connected touch. 

As your sensitivity develops, you can also use only one of your 

fingers to stimulate the line energetically. An interesting finding 

will be that each finger awakens different qualities of energy 

inside the meridians. 

6.5 The sound of the vibration 

Implement channel release as described in section 6.3 on a meridian 

of your choice. 

Then in the motionless phase that follows the rubbing, while 

connecting with the vibration along the line try to perceive the 

(non-physical) sound of the vibration. 

Don't listen with your ears, listen with your eye, between the 

eyebrows! There is something like a buzzing or the sound of a 

high-voltage power line, that goes with the vibration. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

Remember our major key to reach clairvoyance: feel the light 
instead of trying to see it. It is often when you stop trying to see 
that vision arises. In the same way don't try to hear the buzzing 
sound, try to feel it. 

Be very motionless in your eye. As usual, do not concentrate. If 
you try too hard, nothing will happen. Cultivate an open attitude. 


Wherever there is a vibration there is a sound. The sound is like 
the higher aspect of the vibration. Actually it would be more exact 
to say that the vibration is the lower manifestation of the sound. 
Truly the sounds come first and then they densify into vibrations. 
As this perception develops, the whole universe can be felt as a 
vast melody, materialising itself by the densif ication of sounds 
into denser and denser vibrations. This will lead you to a different 
reading of the first verses of the gospel of John: "In the 
beginning was the Word; and the Word was with God, and the 
Word was God... Through Him all things were created." 

6.6 Zu tai yang, 'Urinary Bladder' Meridian 

Rub from the back of the heel to the back of 

the head via the back of the calf, thigh, 

buttock, and all along the side of the spine 

and neck (see figure in Practice 6.6). After 

fully exploring this path of energy you can 

have a look at the notes in Appendix 1 for 

more details. 

More than ever the name 'Urinary Bladder', 

given to this meridian, is a hoax. The 

functions of zu tai yang are multiple and 

vast, and certainly not limited to the bladder. 

In particular, along the sides of the lumbar 

and thoracic areas of the spine, one finds on 

this meridian several extraordinary 

acupuncture points that govern some highly 

spiritual functions. If you become more 

expert at channel release it will become possible to enter those 

points and explore their functions from inside, and not merely 

from books. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 


Repeat the whole sequence of section 6.3, this time on the Urinary 
Bladder Meridian. 

• This meridian is located on the side of the spine, not on the 
spine itself. Do not rub the spine itself. Rubbing is a gross and 
preliminary way of moving vibration. The energy of the spine is 
extremely subtle and can easily be disturbed through manipulation. 
It is always preferable to activate the vibration in the spine from 
inside, rather than through massage or physical contact. 
The more open you become, the more I would recommend that you 
avoid having your spine touched too readily by practitioners of 
various kinds. If some therapeutic touch has to be implemented, 
such as osteopathy for instance, I recommend you choose somebody 
who really knows what they are doing, not only in their own 
discipline but also in the field of energy. 

6.7 The cosmos in your hands 

From here, we'll go through a few practices showing how the 
hands can be used to attune yourself to spiritual connections. 

Practice: Positioning the hands to modify the palm energy 

Sit with your back straight. Keep your eyes closed throughout the 


Phase 1: hanging/resting 

Rub your hands together for 10 to 20 seconds. Then become 

motionless with your palms upwards. 

Don't rest your hands on your knees, keep them suspended in the 

air, palms upwards. 

Become aware of the vibration in your hands and in your eye. 

Implement the throat friction to connect the palms and the eye 

and to intensify the vibration. 

Then keep the same awareness and friction but rest your hands on 

your knees with the palms still facing upwards. 

Sense the vibration in your hands and compare with the former 

position, when the hands were in the air. Stay half a minute with 

your hands on your knees. 

Then lift up your hands again, back to the original position (palms 

upwards). Compare the difference in the vibration in the palms. 

Keep going from one position to the other, each time comparing 

the quality of energy. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

Phase 2: palms up, palms down 

Sit up with your back straight, palms upwards. Do not rest the 
hands on your knees. Take half a minute to strengthen the 
vibration in the hands and its connection with the eye, by 
implementing the throat friction. 

Then turn the palms downwards. The hands are still suspended in 
the air and you are still breathing with the friction, but now the 
palms are facing downwards. 

Sense the quality of the vibration in your hands and all over your 

Then go back to the first position, with the palms upwards. Sense 
the quality of energy in your hands and compare with the former 

Sense the general feeling inside yourself and see if you can 
perceive any difference with how you felt in the former position. 
Keep swapping from one position to the other, sensing, and 
exploring your feelings. 
• The more you become attuned to the perception of energy, the 
clearer it will become that it's not only the quality of vibration in 
your palms but the energy in your whole body, that varies from 
one position to the other. The 'flavour inside', the atmosphere of 
consciousness, changes completely. In the beginning these 
variations may seem subtle but as you progress they will become 
more and more tangible and distinct. 

This leads to a science that aims at inducing particular states of 
consciousness by tuning into different positions of the hands and, 
more generally, of the body. Elements of this lore have been 
incorporated in the rituals of all the traditions you encounter on 
the planet. For instance, these 'gestures of energy' are called 
mudra in Sanskrit. 

As you may judge for yourself while going through these 
exercises, it is only if your perception is open that the gestures of 
energy will yield their real effects. 
Let us explore two of these very traditional gestures. 

6.8 Gestures of energy 

Sit with your back straight. Rub your hands for a few seconds and 
then become motionless with your palms upwards. 
Become aware in the eye, aware in the hands. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

Breathe with the throat friction. 

Become aware of the vibration in the hands and the vibration in 

the eye. 

Sense the general quality, the 'flavour' of your energy. 

Phase 1 

Join your hands as in a prayer 

position. Become aware of the 

vibration in your hands and in the 

whole body. Stay half a minute in that 


Then go back to the original position, 

palms upwards. 

Keep on alternating from one position 

to the other, comparing your energy. Observe what disposition of 

consciousness arises when your hands are joined. 

Phase 2: jnana-mudra 

Go back to the 
position with your 
palms upwards (not 
resting on your 
knees). Engage the 
throat friction to 
amplify the 
vibration and 
connect the hands 
and the eye. Spend 
one minute 


Then bend the index fingers and join them to the thumbs, in the 

position called jnana-mudra. Use the throat friction to amplify the 

action of the gesture. Continue sensing the variations of energy 

inside yourself for 1 or 2 minutes. 

Then resume the position with the palms upwards. Spend half a 

minute amplifying the vibration with the throat friction. Feel the 

quality of your energy. 

Then take jnana-mudra again. Go on alternating the positions, 

exploring the changes inside yourself. 

How does your energy vary? 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

How does your consciousness vary? 

Phase 3: the action of jnana-mudra on the lungs 

Keep the same gesture of energy, jnana-mudra, as described in 

phase 2. Always keep your eyes closed. This time become aware of 

the vibration in your lungs at the same time. Go from one 

position to the other, and try to feel how the vibration varies 

inside your chest. 

Then try with jnana-mudra (index and thumb joined) in the right 

hand only and the other hand flat. Awareness in the eye, 

awareness in the chest. Continue for half a minute. Compare the 

energy in each of the lungs. 

Then swap. Take jnana-mudra with the left hand and keep the 

right hand flat. Become aware of the vibration in the eye and in 

each side of the chest. Compare with the former position. 

Keep on going from one position to the other for a few minutes, 

exploring the variations of energy in your body in general and in 

your lungs in particular. 

Tips, tricks and traps 

• The 'prayer' gesture of phase 1 often gives the feeling that your 
energy is more concentrated, more vertical, like a column. 

• I have noticed with many people that this jnana-mudra (literally, 
'gesture of knowledge') seems to have a direct action on the energy 
of their lungs, which fits rather well with the fact that in 
acupuncture, the Lung Meridian is said to terminate on the thumb. 
Students often describe the vibration in their lungs as more 
intense or denser, reinforced, more closed... when the gesture is 

Now, a riddle: some people seem to find it easier to breathe when 
they do jnana-mudra. Others, on the contrary, find it a little 
more difficult to breathe. How can this be so? The answer is in 
section 6.13, at the end of this chapter. 

6.9 The energy between your hands 

Sit up with your back straight, your hands facing each other in 
front of you. At no point in this exercise do the hands touch, 
there is always space between them. 

Become aware of the vibration in your eye and in your hands. 
Breathe with the throat friction to amplify the vibration and 
connect the hands to the eye. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

Then become aware of the vibration in 
the space between your hands. 
Start moving the right hand slowly 
towards the left, as if the right hand 
was pushing the left one through 
vibration. The left hand moves to the 
left, gently repelled by the pressure 
of the vibration coming from the 
right hand. Go on moving the two 
hands to the left very slowly. 
Then change direction. The left hand 
starts moving to the right, repelling 
the right hand through the vibration. 
Keep on using the throat friction to 
intensify the vibration between the hands. 

After moving the two hands to the right extremely slowly for 1 
minute or so, change direction again. Start pushing to the left, 
repelling the left hand with the vibration coming from the right 

Repeat the practice in a vertical 
direction, with your right hand above 
and your left hand below. Move the 
hands up and down very slowly, 
repelling one with the other, 
following the same method. Maintain 
the throat friction. Watch the field of 
vibration between the two hands. 
Then extend this exercise to various 
directions of space. 

6.10 Cosmic antenna 

Sit up with your back straight, your 
hands facing each other as in the last 

exercise. Then turn the palms upwards. Sense the difference in 

vibration in your hands and in your eye as you go from one 

position to the other. 

Then place your hands and arms in different positions in space, 

any position that comes to you. But move slowly and consciously. 

It is like a 'motionless movement' that takes you from one position 

to another. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

In each position, a different 'frequency' of vibration is generated 
inside yourself. Your field of consciousness changes flavour, 
depending on the orientation of your hands. Go on playing with 
your arms for a few minutes, exploring how different positions 
create different inner states. 

Then stand up and start moving your whole body, slowly, going 
from one motionless position to another. 

• This practice introduces a completely different approach to 
movement. Each position is now perceived in its relation to the 
cosmos. You do not move your body only to perform particular 
actions but to tune into different frequencies of energy and 
consciousness. The body becomes like a cosmic antenna. Once you 
step into this state of perception, you realize how rich and vast 
you are. Can you imagine how magical it is to dance according to 
these principles? 

• This practice is excellent to work on inner sound. If you are nd 
as you change positions. Tune into the sound of the vibration in 
the middle of the head, behind the point between the eyebrows. A 
real melody will be revealed to you as you go on dancing — the 
harmony of the spheres. 

6.11 Ribcage practice 

Let us resume channel release with an invigorating exercise. 

Sit with your back straight. 

Be aware of the vibration in the eye. Breathe with the throat 

friction. Then implement a vigorous rubbing of the ribcage with 

the palm. Rub vertically all around the ribcage for half a minute. 

Then use your fists to stimulate the back of the ribcage on the 

sides of the spine. But do not rub the spine itself. 

Then remain motionless and allow the movement of energy. 

This exercise gives good results in dissipating the anxiety that 

always tends to accumulate around the solar plexus. It also helps 

you gain more conscious control of your diaphragm. As well, it is 

quite efficient in waking you up in the morning or at any other 


6.12 Zu yang ming, 'Stomach' Meridian 

To work on this meridian, rub the dorsal side of the foot, then 
the front part of the ankle, leg, knee, thigh, to the inner part of 
the groin. Then on a line from inside the groin to the nipple. 


Chapter 6 - Channel Release 2 

Repeat the complete practice of channel 

release (section 6.3) on this meridian. 

So now we have experienced six meridians: 

the three yin of the hand and the three yang 

of the foot. In order to develop your 

perception of the vibration and to reinforce 

your etheric layer, I suggest that you keep on 

practising channel release on these six 

meridians every day for a few months. As 

explained at the beginning of this chapter, it 

is not so much a local effect that is sought 

from these particular exercises but rather a 

general awakening of your etheric layer, 

which will foster the opening of your vision. 

(Keep in mind the drawing presented here 

does not show the actual path of the Stomach Meridian, but the 

area where you rub in order to find the meridian. For the precise 

path, see Appendix 1.) 

Readers with a special interest in etheric energy and healing are 

referred to acupuncture manuals for more on the meridians. 

Applying your perception of energy to acupuncture points will 

give spectacular results. It will be like activating little chakras all 

over your body, creating all sorts of movements of energy. Start 

with points that are big and easy to find, such as Colon 4, Colon 

10, Colon 11, Stomach 36... 

6.13 Tnana-mudra and the energy in the lungs 

Suppose there is too much energy in the lungs. By doing jnana- 
mudra you add even more. Therefore, it may suddenly become a 
bit more difficult to breathe. Adding energy where there is a 
fullness makes symptoms worse. This is a very basic principle of 
Chinese medicine. 

On the other hand, if there is a deficiency of energy in the lungs, 
by adding more vibration you make the person feel better and able 
to breathe more easily. This very sensitive test may help you 
detect whether there is a little too much qi or not enough in your 

Try this exercise a few times, leaving a few days between each, 
before you make up your mind. 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

7.1 The use of darkness 

In A Separate Reality, Don Tuan teaches Carlos Castaneda how to 
make use of darkness. When the latter asks what one can use it 
for, Don Tuan answers that 'the darkness of the day' is the best 
time to 'see'. 

We have been conditioned to rush to the light switch or a torch 
every time we have to find our way in the dark. In many cases, 
you can manage very well without a light. Pretend you are a cat. 
Switch on to 'cat-mode'. Rely on your instinct. And, of course, be 
very aware in the eye. All sorts of objects have a glow of energy 
around them at night and some are actually quite easy to see. It is 
typically one of those perceptions that most people miss, simply 
because they never think of trying, and not because it is difficult 
or advanced. For instance, if you walk on a dirt path in the 
countryside at night, you will often discover that the path glows 
when you look at it from your third eye. It is a valuable exercise 
to try finding your way without artificial light. You can also 
rediscover your flat at night, or in 'the darkness of the day'. 

7.2 Use more candles and oil lamps, less electricity 

Whenever possible, use candles (or oil lamps) instead of electric 
lights. In the natural light of candles, you will have much easier 
access to the vision of auras. 

There are some simple reasons why electric lights are not 
conducive to the opening of perception. The light coming from a 
light bulb appears to us as continuous. But in reality that is not 
the case. Electric lights work with a 50 hertz alternating current. 
This means the light turns on and off many times per second. The 
process is quick enough to cheat your conscious mind, but 
subconsciously this frequency is registered. It has an action on 
your brain. 

Imagine the electric light was turned on and off every half second 
so that you could see the light pulsate. What would the result be? 
Quite painful! You would have to close your eyes, or at least you 
would have to make a mental formation, like a screen, to protect 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

yourself. This means you would have to close off to a certain 

When you start using your eye, you realise that a similar process 
takes place, unconsciously, with the electric light going on and off 
many times per second. It is 'hard' on the brain. Deep inside, 
something has to close off in order to protect yourself. 
Of course the general direction of perception is one of opening. 
We have already discussed how when trying to 'see', one of the 
main obstacles is this tendency of the mind to retract (section 
5.10). You are starting to see an aura for instance, and suddenly 
your mind gets surprised, or startled, or very interested... 
Instantaneously, this reaction of the mind creates a closing off. In 
a fraction of a second your perception is lost and you have to start 
reopening again. Electric light creates a similar process of closing, 
at a deep unconscious level. 

But let it be very clear that I am not advocating getting rid of all 
the electric lights in your house! For instance, when reading or 
writing, use electric light of course. Insufficient light would tire 
your eyes, which will not help you become any more clairvoyant. 
The Clairvision techniques have been designed for those who are in 
the world, and presently you can't be in the world without using 
electricity, computers and so on. 

The point I want to make is that when you practise eye contact or 
other techniques of seeing, it is far better to use candles. Apart 
from that, there are many circumstances such as eating, or 
talking with a friend, when we use electric lights out of habit and 
not because we really need them. So we could take advantage of 
those occasions to give our brain a break, and to practise the 
techniques of vision. This is one of the secrets of success in 
spiritual practice: use more and more of your daily activities to 
put the processes into practice. Integrate your work of opening 
with the simplest actions. 

Yet in the long run it should become a concern that electric light 
is stressful. It would be a blessing for humankind if somebody 
could invent a form of artificial light that was softer on our 
unconscious perception. 

7.3 In quest of the ultimate wall rendering 

When trying to see an aura you will get much better results if the 
wall behind the object or the person is blank, and white, or 
painted in a very light hue. If seeing is really one of your essential 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

preoccupations in life, you should consider redecorating the walls 
of the rooms in which you spend most of your time. Certain 
varieties of white paint and wall renderings have a magic effect: 
whenever someone stands in front of them you automatically start 
seeing halos of light. 

7.4 The white shawl 

When practising the techniques of eye contact regularly with the 
same friend(s), it can be a good idea to wear a white shawl that 
covers your clothes. (No need to cover your head, just wear it on 
your shoulders.) It makes it significantly easier to see auras and it 
attracts all sorts of good vibrations. On the contrary, black or 
dark clothes make the task of seeing more arduous. Wear the 
white shawl when practising alone too, in front of the mirror. 
For the shawl you can use cotton, silk or linen... but no synthetic 
fibres. Wear it whenever you meditate, and it will concentrate the 
energy of your meditation. The shawl will slowly be charged with 
a protective power that will become more and more tangible: each 
time you put it on your energy will be activated and you will feel 
a certain wellbeing. Do not let anybody else use your shawl, or else 
all your work may be lost in a few minutes. 

I suggest a shawl because it is extremely simple to make: there is 
nothing to sew, you just need a pair of scissors! (A size of 1 metre 
by 2 or 2.5 is usually suitable.) But a dress could also be designed. 
Monks' robes were originally designed to play a role in energy 
concentration and protection, even though this knowledge came to 
be lost. Maybe it's time for a new generation of 'garments for 
energy' to be designed. 

Before resuming the techniques of vision, I would suggest that you 
re-read the advice given in Chapter 1. 

7.5 The basic technique for seeing an aura 

The following procedure is one of the most direct ways to see an 

aura, or to get in touch with somebody's guides. 

You can sit in front of each other at the regular eye contact 

distance of about 90 centimetres, or allow a bit more space between 

the two of you, as in a normal conversation situation. Even better: 

start in an eye contact position, and then repeat the practice in a 

more relaxed and casual position, comparing your results. 

Close your eyes for 1 or 2 minutes, breathing with the throat 

friction. Operate a reconnection with the space in the eye by doing 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

a short third eye meditation as described in section 5.3. 
Then drop the friction and open your eyes. The technique consists 
of gazing 1 or 2 inches above the head of the person whose aura 
you want to read, and implementing the triple vision process as 
described in section 5.13: 

1) Become aware in the eye, and motionless. Blink as little as 

2) Do not look at any details of the image. Become aware of the 
fact of seeing, or 'seeingness'. If seeingness remains a mystery, 
just feel the image instead of looking at it. 

3) Feel the other person from your heart in the middle of the 

Remain totally still, absorbed in this triple process. 

After a few minutes, start the throat friction. Connect the 

friction with the image. 

When you finish, rub your hands. Put the palms against your eyes. 

Let the warmth reach inside and heal your eyes. 


• You will be amazed how the perception of halos is suddenly 
enhanced as soon as you connect it with the throat friction. It is a 
beautiful demonstration of the amplifying effect generated by 
this friction. 

• To do an aura reading, the trick is to tune into the spiritual 
beings above the person's head and let them do the reading for 
you. Tune into their presence and let them monitor your vision. 

7.6 Where exactly should you look while doing eye 

Nowhere, since to see, the secret lies in not looking. But still the 
question arises: where to place your gaze, especially at the 
beginning of the practice before your perception shifts into the 
space. You can either: 

— gaze between the eyebrows of your partner 

— gaze at one of his/her eyes 

— try to gaze in front of you without 'touching' any physical part 
of your partner with your eyes. 

Experiment with these different options, going from one to 
another. After some time, the physical image disappears, so it 
doesn't really matter which one you choose. When focussing on the 
eyes of the person in front of you, it sometimes happens that 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

everything becomes blurry but the eyes remain clear, or the face 
changes but the eyes remain the same. Whatever possibility you 
explore, it is preferable for both people to practise the same way 
at the same time. 

Don't forget that 'focussing between the eyebrows' never means 
making your eyeballs converge as if trying to look in that area. It 
only means that you should remain aware of your third eye. 

7.7 Channel release from time to time 

While working on these techniques of clairvoyance it is valuable to 
implement a few channel releases from time to time. As explained 
in section 6.1, this will stimulate your whole etheric body, thereby 
giving a boost to the etheric layer of your third eye. In particular 
(but not only) if your progress seems blocked, don't hesitate to 
have recourse to a few channel releases. 

7.8 Working on auras 

Here are a few suggestions to work at developing your perception 

of auras. 

Start with a reconnection: close your eyes, breathe with the throat 

friction and build up the vibration between the eyebrows. Then 

tune into the light and become aware of the dark purple space for 

1 or 2 minutes. 

Then open your eyes and start the triple vision process: 

1) motionless focus in the eye 

2) seeingness 

3) the feeling from the heart 

The idea is to remain very quiet inside, absorbed in this triple 
process, and to ask the friend in front of you to say or think of 
different things, to see if any modification of his/her aura can be 
perceived as a consequence. You can place your gaze one inch above 
his/her head, or between his/her eyebrows, as you prefer. Of 
course, be careful not to look too much, otherwise you won't see 
• Ask your friend to repeat "No, no, no..." for one minute or so. 
It should be a no with intention, a no that really means no. During 
this time, feel the quality of the light around him/her. 
Then ask the friend to repeat "Yes, yes, yes..." with intention, for 
one minute. Feel the light and compare the quality of energy. 
Repeat once or twice with "no" and then with "yes". 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

• Repeat the same procedure, but this time the friend should be 
aware both in the eye and around the navel while saying no. Ask 
your friend while saying yes: 

— to be fully aware in the heart, for a minute or so 

— to think of death for one minute 

— to think of a happy thing that could happen in his/her life 

— to become aware of a sad emotion 

— to think of something that usually creates irritation or anger 
Ask your friend to become serene again. 

Don't forget to do a bit of 'palming' (applying your palms to your 
closed eyes, figure in section 5.5) at the end of each session, or 
each time you take a short break with your eyes closed. 


You can repeat the same exercise while asking your friend to think 

— a loved one 

— someone he/she dislikes 

— someone who is dead 

Various other possibilities will come to your mind as you explore 
the practices. Once you have digested the chapter on ley lines you 
can also watch the aura of your friend while he/she is sitting: 

— on a noxious crossing of earth lines knowingly 

— on a noxious crossing of earth lines unknowingly 

— on an energy well. (If you find a real well, as soon as the person 
stands on it the action on the aura is immediate and quite 

7.9 Aura testing 

It is also interesting to ask your friend to hold different objects 
and substances and to watch the modification of the aura 
accordingly. Ask the friend to tune into the object. You can hold 
the object in front of the heart, and then in front of other parts 
of the body, and see if you notice any difference in the aura. 
Here are a few suggestions: 

— a copper vessel 

— a big iron tool (but not one that you hold by a wooden handle!) 

— the tip of a thermometer (which contains the metal mercury) 

— an aluminium saucepan 

— different cans of food 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

— packets of frozen foods 

— plates with different foods 

— a variety of herbs, drugs, medicines, homoeopathic remedies 
Basically, try anything — ordinary and extraordinary. 


• The technique known as 'muscle testing' is based on the idea that 
the force of a muscle is stronger when you think of something 
true or when you hold a substance that is 'good' for you. On the 
contrary, the muscular force is supposed to drop if you are 
holding the wrong remedy, or if you think of something that is 
untrue or not beneficial to your health. 

For instance, patients are asked to hold different bottles with 
their left hand, in front of their heart, and to stretch their right 
arm horizontally. The practitioner pushes the hand down to test 
the strength of the deltoid (shoulder muscle). 

The technique has its limits, and I don't think it is reasonable to 
try to make it a universal method of knowledge, as some seem to 
be doing. Yet it is a surprising fact that the resistance of the 
muscle is sometimes significantly stronger or weaker, depending 
on what the person holds or thinks of. 

As soon as you begin perceiving auras you will discover that clear- 
cut differences can be sensed in a person's energy when they 
think about different things or while they hold different 
substances. To perceive this you don't even need to 'see' auras, just 
feeling them is enough. 

7.10 Vata, pitta, kapha 

Ayurveda, or traditional Indian medicine, is based on recognising 
the interplay of three principles in the body: 

— vata, or wind (all that moves in the body) 

— pitta, or fire/heat principle 

— kapha, or water and earth principle, force of inertia. 

In Ayurveda, diagnosis rests on discerning which of these three 
principles (called the three doshas) predominate in a patient. 
Patients are classified accordingly as 'vata', or 'pitta', or 'kapha', or 
'vata-pitta' (if the two doshas are over-active, vata more than 
pitta), or 'pitta-vata', or 'kapha-vata', and so on. The Ayurvedic 
method of reaching this diagnosis is to take the pulse. 
I was once working with an Ayurvedic physician in Calcutta, and 
we had designed a procedure (it was a game, really) in which he 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

would take the patients' pulse, and I would look at their aura. 
Before he gave his diagnosis, I would write mine on a piece of 
paper. Then we would compare. This physician was quite famous, 
seeing up to one hundred patients a day, which is not so 
uncommon in India. This proved to be a respectable 'sample' to 
make up our minds on how often we agreed. And we used to come 
up with the same diagnosis in more than ninety percent of cases. 
Now don't think you need to reach an advanced stage to do that 
yourself. You hardly need to be able to see auras, just to get a 
sense of them. Sit in a cafe in a busy street, go into the triple 
process of vision and look at people passing by. Try to determine 
if they are 'vata' or 'pitta', etc. Preferably get a friend to do the 
same with you, so you can compare your findings. You will be 
surprised how often you agree. 

7.11 Trans- verbal communication 

Sit in front of a friend and prepare for eye contact. 

Plug your ears and implement the triple process of vision. 

Then your friend says 5 sentences about himself. Each sentence is 

repeated 3 times. Each time the friend starts with a new sentence, 

he indicates the corresponding number with his fingers (sentence 

1, sentence 2...) One of the sentences is false. Your task is to find 

which of the sentences is the false one, with only the aura as a 


Repeat the exercise, this time without plugging your ears. To 

discern which statement is false, try to rely only on the aura and 

not on what you hear. 


• An enlightening conclusion is that you will sometimes get more 
success by not listening at all and just looking at the aura, rather 
than by analysing the content of the messages. 

• Don't hesitate to cheat and give more than one false statement, 
to add to the sport! 

7.12 More about seeingness 

Let us take a few examples to understand more about 'seeingness'. 
Western esotericists, such as Rudolf Steiner and Max Heindel, have 
described how in the distant past human beings had a very 
different way of perceiving warmth. A kind of baggy organ was 
on top of their heads. Nowadays this area corresponds to the 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

fontanelle, a soft membrane between the two parietal bones, on 
top of infants' heads. If we go back a long, long time through the 
archives of the memory of nature, we find that the Earth was full 
of volcanoes and areas with hot gases and plasma. Human beings 
had to have some sense of direction to avoid being roasted alive. 
The baggy object on top of their heads fulfilled this function: it 
was the very primitive organ of warmth. 

In terms of evolution, what has happened? The baggy part was 
reintegrated inside the head and slowly became our present pineal 
gland. And now our sense of warmth is no longer localised in a 
particular organ but distributed all over the body. Thus we can 
observe how a sensorial function develops over a long, long period 
of time. It first depends on one organ and is restricted to it, and 
then it slowly spreads to the whole body. We now do not feel 
warmth through any localised organ but through our whole body. 
Steiner foresaw that our present senses will all follow a similar 
evolution process, so there will be a time when human beings can 
smell, see, hear, taste... with their whole body and not only 
through a particular organ. It is as if the localized organ is there 
to teach us about one particular sense, and when the lesson is 
complete, we no longer need the organ. 

As the sense of warmth is much more ancient, and therefore more 
integrated into our being, it is easier for us to recognize what 
warmth is, independently of any object. We can grasp the pure 
quality of warmth. Let us develop this as an analogy to understand 
more about seeingness. 

In the beginning it may be difficult to get a sense of seeingness, 
meaning the fact of seeing, independently of any image in 
particular. We understand what it is to see a tree, to see a light or 
even to see an aura... but the naked seeingness may not be so 

Roughly speaking, the feeling of warmth is to heat what 
seeingness is to the perception of images. We don't have to refer 
to concepts such as 'hot as a fire' or 'hot as the Sun' or 'hot as the 
stove' and try to understand what is common to them. We can just 
go to the essence and recognize warmth, independently of any 
source of heat. It is a similar quality that has to be developed with 
vision in order to discern the seeingness. 

In other words, for perception to take place, 3 elements are 
needed: 1) a person who perceives 2) an object to be perceived 3) the 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

process of perception. 

This applies not only to seeing auras, but to any physical 
perception such as hearing, smell. 

At this point in time, in the daily life of most human beings the 
first and third elements have been lost, meaning the consciousness 
of the perceiver and of the process of perception. When seeing a 
tree, for instance, there is a mental recognition of the tree, but 
there is no awareness of who sees the tree, nor of the process 
through which the tree is perceived. An assimilation takes place 
with the object of perception. To become aware of seeingness 
means to become aware of 3) the process of perception. 
Our real purpose in this work is to find the Self, we are not using 
techniques just to reach perception. We are using perception to 
reach the Self. 

If you have two oranges and a cherry in a basket, the cherry can 
easily be hidden by the oranges. But if you take the two oranges 
out of the basket, the cherry becomes conspicuous. One orange is 
the object of perception, the other is the process of perception — 
and the cherry is the Self-awareness of the perceiver. When you 
separate the seeingness from the object of perception you achieve a 
stage of discernment which is similar to removing the two oranges 
from the basket. That is why you may have such big flashes of 
inner awakening when you become aware of the seeingness — 
sudden inner explosions in which the Self is revealed. 
As you keep on practising our triple process of vision, your 
seeingness will gradually develop. In the beginning it seems faint. 
But as you exercise it, it turns into a more and more tangible 
quality, becoming as clear and obvious as the perception of 
warmth. One could also compare the seeingness to a muscle that 
has not been used for a long time. Reactivating the muscle is likely 
to be slow in the beginning: you hardly feel it, you don't even 
know when it is contracting or not and its contraction is quite 
weak. Once you have done the work, activating your seeingness 
becomes as clear and tangible as contracting your biceps. Actually 
this part of the process of inner alchemy is akin to body building 
— not physical, but subtle body building. 

Now, there is a paradox. When you want to become aware of 
seeingness, what do you do? You make sure that you are not 
looking at anything in particular, that the content of the image 
does not matter to you. In other words, you take one of the two 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

oranges out of the basket. You get rid of the object of perception. 
And then the second orange (seeingness, the process of perception) 
becomes conspicuous. 

But once your seeingness has evolved, you operate in a different 
way. You tune into an object or a person, you 'switch on' your 
seeingness, and automatically you 'see'. It does not matter at all 
whether the object of perception is just in front of you or on the 
other side of the planet or even on the other side of the galaxy. 
You see. And often something uncanny happens: you may well 
decide to close your eyes, in order to see something just in front 
of you better. 

Then the following question arises: how can you be completely 
disinterested in the object, if you use the seeingness as a means of 
seeing the object? The key to this paradox is: once you have 
reached that stage, you are not looking at the object with your 
mind anymore. The mind has become silent and you are seeing 
from a much deeper and truer layer of yourself. A basic 
prerequisite for higher perception lies in the silence of the layer 
of ordinary mental consciousness. 

That is why in the beginning the advice is: do not look at the 
object, do not get too interested in it. Otherwise your mind will be 
activated, since you have been conditioned for so long to operate 
from only the mind. As soon as you are interested in something 
your mind automatically tries to grasp it. Therefore it is better 
not to think of the object at all, in order to allow the process of 
vision to unfold. 

Often in the beginning, you will have an interesting experience. 
You will start seeing an aura or a different face, or a spiritual 
being. Then suddenly you realize that you are seeing something... 
and you instantaneously lose the perception. Why? Because your 
mind has reacted. You have suddenly become interested, 
frightened, or whatever; in other words, a grasping of the mind 
has taken place. You are suddenly looking from the mind again. 
And it's quite logical that you should lose the perception, since 
ordinary mental consciousness is completely blind by nature. When 
the perception process is engaged, it will go on as long as you do 
not react and will stop with the first grasping of the mind. 
Your perception always has the limits of your capacity not to 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 
7.13 Intermezzo: which eye are you? 

Some people argue that one of your (two) eyes corresponds to your 
deeper and true Self, while the other is the mirror of your 
surface personality. As our philosophy is never to believe anything 
but to try to perceive for ourselves, let us not say which eye is 
supposed to be which. The following exercise is designed to let you 
find out if there are any differences in what you can perceive 
from each eye. 

Sit in front of each other and get ready for eye contact. 
Remember that your back should be straight and that if you 
cannot touch the other's nose with your palm, you know you are 
too far away. (This exercise can also be conducted by yourself, 
using a mirror.) 

Practise a short reconnection in the eye, with your eyes closed (as 
explained in section 5.3). 

Open your eyes and start gazing at each other's right eye. Your 
focus is on your friend's right eye and your friend is focussing on 
your right eye. To avoid any confusion I recommend that you both 
raise your right hand at the beginning of the practice, to be sure 
that you are both gazing at the right eye. 

Then start practising the triple vision process (section 5.13) with 
the motionless focus between the eyebrows, the awareness of 
seeingness, and the feeling from the heart. 

Continue the practice for about 5 minutes. Then close the eyes and 
take a short break, warming your eyes with the palms of your 
hands as described earlier. 

Then open your eyes and show each other your left hand to avoid 
any confusion. Start gazing at each other's left eye, and repeat the 
practice for a few minutes. 

Close your eyes and cover them with your palms, warming up 
your heart (section 5.5). 
Exchange impressions with your friend. 
• After having tested this exercise with hundreds of people, I do 
not believe a word of the assumption that one of your eyes 
mirrors your Higher Self and the other one the lower self. (By the 
way, it is the right one that is presumed to be the Higher Ego.) 
Still, it is fascinating to see how different somebody can look, 
depending on which eye you are focussing on. You obviously 
connect with quite different sub-personalities through each of the 
eyes, and there is definitely more than one sub-personality related 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

to each eye. It is interesting to remember that the word 'person' 
came to us, via the Latin, from an Etruscan word, persu, meaning 

7.14 The yes/yes technique 

Here is a beautiful and devastating technique. Truly, what is it 

that prevents you from being a seer? Of course, you have to do 

the subtle body building, to apply the techniques... However, your 

organ of subtle vision must be operating already, since from time 

to time you may have a one-second-flash, a blessed little moment 

in which 'y ou see '' And then it is lost and it sometimes takes 

months before another such flash takes place. 

So... what? Barriers, mental screens, lazy habits of self -protection 

of the mental consciousness, thick conditioning like a wall around 

us — in reality these are the blocks. 

The following technique is designed to help you drop the 

barricades of the mind. It requires that someone sits and practises 

with you; you can't implement it alone in front of a mirror. 

Sit in front of each other with your back straight. If you can't 

touch each other's nose with the palm of your hand, you know you 

are too far away. 

Close your eyes and do a reconnection. Implement the throat 

friction. Build up the vibration in the eye. Then spend 1 or 2 

minutes in the purple space. 

Open your eyes. Implement the triple process of vision (focus in 

the eye, seeingness, and feeling from the heart, as explained in 

section 5.13). Try to receive the other one, to take him into your 


Then one says, "Yes..." and the other, when ready, answers, "Yes." 

Both go on saying yes, one after the other. 

This practice is a heart practice. You can't cheat. If you leave any 

barrier or restriction, the other will feel it immediately, and the 

miracle won't happen. You have to say a yes that is really a yes, 

and put more and more meaning and opening into it. The yes must 

come from the heart. You have to work at deepening each yes a bit 

more, until you reach a total acceptance of the other person. And 

then, go further. Give a yes that is an acceptance of the whole 

world through the person in front of you. 

Continue the practice for as long as you want. Then take a good 2 

or 3 minutes, covering your closed eyes with the palms of your 

hands, and letting the warmth of the hands reach the heart 


Chapter 7 - Seeing (2) 

through the eyes. 


• You will be surprised to see how many people utter a yes that 
truly means 'no'. Or they mechanically say yes after yes in a way 
that simply does not mean anything at all. 

Put all of yourself into this practice, and after a few minutes, you 
will hardly be able to utter anything. The word seems to come 
from far, far away. This can lead to an intense experience of your 
own truth. 

• There is no limit to how long you should continue this practice 
— hours if you want. 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

Let us now proceed with the continuation of the channel release 
techniques. Having gained, in Chapters 4 and 6, more familiarity 
with the vibration and its circulations, we are now moving to the 
next stage: the awareness of the whole body of energy, or etheric 

It is preferable not to implement the exercises of this chapter 
right at the beginning of a session. Start with a few channel 
release practices to warm up your etheric body. 

8.1 The etheric layer as a whole 

Sit in a meditation position with your back straight. Keep your 

eyes closed throughout the practice. 

Rub your hands and become motionless for a few seconds, with the 

palms upwards. Become aware of the vibration in the hands and in 

the eye. Use the throat friction to intensify the vibration, and to 

connect the eye and the hands. 

Implement channel release on a few meridians, as indicated in 

section 6.3. 

Then become aware of the vibration in all the lines on which you 

have worked before simultaneously: awareness of all the meridians 

at the same time. Connect everything to your eye through the 


Then become aware of the layer of the vibration as a whole. 

Awareness of all that is vibrating, inside and around your body. 

Let your perception be completely absorbed in the vibration. 

When you feel the vibration all over your body, and nothing other 

than the vibration, it means you have completely shifted your 

awareness from the physical into the etheric body. 

8.2 The life ether 

Repeat practice 8.1: get into the perception of the etheric layer as 

a whole. Remain completely motionless, feeling the vibration all 

over your body. 

Then try to discern: where is the life force in this vibration? 

What is it that keeps your physical body alive? Tune into the life 



Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 


• Even though the whole of the etheric body has to do with life 
force, one of its layers is more specifically related to life: the life 
ether. Occultists have traditionally discerned four layers in the 
etheric body. These are: the life ether, the chemical ether, the 
light ether and the warmth ether. The word 'layer' can be 
confusing because the four ethers are not stacked on top of each 
other like the layers of a cake. Rather, they permeate each other, 
like water permeates a sponge. 

The four ethers can be divided into two groups: two lower and two 
higher. The life and chemical ethers are referred to as the lower 
ethers and the light and warmth ethers as the higher ethers. 
Presently, in most human beings the two higher ethers are not 
very developed and still need to be cultivated. 

• The life force is indeed a most precious energy. No laboratory of 
our scientific civilisation has ever been able to synthesise one 
single living organism! Connecting specifically with the life ether 
is a very special experience. Words alone cannot really describe the 
flavour of consciousness associated with it. The life ether appears 
like a universal principle, certainly not confined to the limits of 
the physical body. If you try to trace its origin, your 
consciousness will be taken to mysterious places. Following the 
ethers to their source is a powerful technique of clairvoyance and 
of travelling. 

• Try to repeat this practice at different times of the day, such 
as in the morning and in the evening, to feel if any difference 
can be detected in your life energy. Also have a look at it when 
you feel very tired. 

Even though it would be a bit premature to spend a lot of time 
trying to discern these four layers just now, it is good to keep in 
mind this fourfold division of the etheric. It will make it easier to 
discern them as your perception develops. 

It is an interesting fact that we always find it easier to perceive 
what our mind can understand. Perceptions for which we have no 
pattern of explanation at all are more likely to be missed, 
especially when they are faint, as in the beginning. 
On this topic, a curious anthropological observation: various videos 
are shown to certain South American natives who have always lived 
in a jungle, isolated from industrial products and civilisation. One 
of the videos shows a square, like the empty frame of a window, 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

rotating on itself. These jungle people, living in an environment 
that is totally devoid of squares, simply cannot see the square 
turning. They only see lines moving. Having no squares in their 
mental background, they completely miss the rotation of the 
empty window frame. 

It appears to me that something similar often occurs when people 
start to be clairvoyant. They miss many perceptions due to the 
lack of background which would allow them to integrate them. If 
something comes into their field of perception which they cannot 
relate to any pattern of understanding, they simply do not notice 
it. Therefore a certain knowledge of the 'geography' of the non- 
physical spheres and of a few basic astral phenomena may prove to 
be of great help in the opening of perception. 

8.3 Exploring different qualities of the etheric 

Become aware of your etheric layer as a whole as described in 

practice 8.1. 

Remain completely motionless and try to discern different 

qualities in the ether. 

Then explore various parts of the body and compare the difference 

in quality of vibration from one part to another. If you have been 

able to get a sense of the life ether, for instance, see if it can be 

found equally in every body part. 

First compare the limbs and the trunk. What difference can you 

feel between the vibration in the limbs and in the trunk? 

Then compare the trunk and the head. How does the vibration in 

the head differ from that in the trunk? 

Then explore body part after body part. Is the vibration more 

intense in some of them? 

How does the quality of the vibration differ from one organ to 


Do some organs or body parts give you the impression of teeming 

with life force? Do others feel empty of it? 


• Traditionally, the liver is the organ of the etheric and of the 
life force — hence the connection between the words 'live' and 
'liver' which can be found in several languages. Do you agree? 

• If you are suffering from any physical disorder, do include the 
corresponding area in the exercise. 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

• It can be interesting to repeat this practice in different 
circumstances, for instance one or two hours after a heavy meal. 

8.4 Exploring the limits 

Become aware of the layer of the vibration as a whole, as in 

practice 8.1. How far does the vibration extend beyond the limits 

of your physical body? 

Is the vibration inside your physical body similar to the vibration 

outside it? What difference in quality can you feel between the 

vibration inside and outside? 

Continue exploring the vibration outside the limits of your 

physical body. Does it have sharp limits? Does your vibration 

mingle with that of any object around you? 

8.5 Exploring the circulations of the etheric 

Become aware of the layer of the vibration as a whole, as in 

practice 8.1. Suppose you had the task of re-inventing acupuncture. 

Explore the layer of the vibration, searching for circulations. Look 

for anything feeling like a flow inside the body of vibration. 

Start with the whole body. Become aware of the body of energy as 

a whole and look for circulations. 

Are some of these circulations more intense than others? Are 

there big and small ones? 

Qualitatively, can you perceive differences between various flows? 

Do some of them feel warmer, and others cooler? Do some 

communicate a feeling similar to one of the four elements (fire, 

water, air or earth)? 

Explore part after part: the head, the neck, the shoulders and the 

top of the chest, the arms, the chest, the abdomen above the 

navel, the abdomen below the navel, the legs. 

Then go back to the perception of the etheric body as a whole, of 

the vibration all over the body. 

Repeat the sequence a few times. 

8.6 The etheric vibration outside your body 

This exercise is best practised in nature, in a forest for example. 
However, a backyard with a bit of grass and one or two trees is 
enough. A few pot-plants and a cat will also do! 
Do a short third eye meditation (section 3.7) and then implement 
practice 8.1 to reconnect with the whole layer of vibration inside 
yourself. Feel the life force vibration permeating your body. At 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

the same time remain fully aware of the vibration between the 


Then tune into a tree or a plant and try to become aware of the 

vibration inside it. Do not touch the plant, just tune into it from a 

distance. Keep on exploring the quality of the plant's vibration for 

a few minutes. 

How far does the plant's vibration extend beyond its physical 


When tuning into the plant's vibration, can you perceive any 


Then place your flat hands a few centimetres from the plant, 

without touching it. Repeat the same sequence: feel the vibration 

of the plant, explore its qualities. 

Then tune into another plant from a distance. Repeat the same 

sequence, but at the same time compare the quality of the plant's 

vibration with that of the one before. Then put your hands close 

to the plant and explore its vibration again. 

Repeat the same with different plants. 

Then try to tune into animals and explore the quality of their 



• This practice makes nature a fascinating field for exploration. 
Tust go one step further and communion with nature becomes a 
tangible reality. 

• It is a confronting yet basic fact about perception that once you 
can feel something inside yourself, you can also feel the same 
outside yourself. For instance, the more familiar you become with 
the vibration inside your body, the easier it becomes to feel it all 
around you. It should be emphasized that this remark does not 
only apply to the etheric layer but to the complete spectrum of 
subtle perception. 

It is often while feeling certain things outside yourself that you 
become able to perceive them inside. By applying your perception 
to the external world, some 'clicks' take place that suddenly make 
you discern the presence of a layer inside yourself that you had 
completely overlooked before. The world becomes a mirror in 
which you can discover new modalities of yourself — hence the 
concept of 'clair-vision', or vision of the Ego. 

• While implementing these exercises don't forget your focus in 
the eye: remain fully aware of the vibration between the 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

eyebrows. Whatever you wish to contact, sense from between the 


It is not uncommon for people to forget and try to do everything 

from their ordinary mind, 'from their head'. And of course, they 

can't feel anything. But as soon as you remind them to go back 

into the eye and try to perceive from there, they immediately get 

in touch with the vibration of the object. 

• Certain streams and lakes have a particularly rich quality of 
vibration and communicate beautiful soul forces when you tune 
into them. So does the ocean. Spending time in nature will help 
develop your perception. Apart from enhancing your experience of 
the vibration, tuning into the forces of nature will bring about 
vast realisations. 

8.7 Vibration meals 

As the perception of the vibration becomes more familiar, it is 
essential to integrate it into your daily activities. This will add 
another dimension to your palette of conscious experiences. 
At meal times, for instance, play with the vibration. Feel it in the 
food before and while eating. Food swallowed without perception is 
like poison to your soul. Feeling the vibration will give you 
completely different views on the value of certain foodstuffs. 
Some very nice-looking dishes suddenly appear horrible. Some 
uninteresting plain ones become fascinating. 

Compare the vibration of frozen foods, canned foods, microwave- 
cooked dishes... Can you feel any difference between organic and 
non-organic fruits and vegetables? 

Apply your perception when doing your shopping. You will find 
that some vegetables almost jump into your hands. 
During digestion it is also quite informative to tune into your 
stomach (just below the heart, behind the left ribs) and try to 
sense the vibration in this organ while it performs the first part 
of digestion. You will immediately realize that different foods 
create quite different types of vibration. 

8.8 The vibration in your bath 

Get into a bath. 

It is not only your shoulders but also the back of your head and 
your ears that should be immersed in the water. A good position is 
to lie in the water with your legs crossed, roughly the same way 
as when you sit cross-legged. Then your trunk and your head will 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

float harmoniously and effortlessly. Keep your arms by your sides 
rather than on the belly, to expand the chest. 

However, if your legs are bent in a position such as the one in the 
figure below, which is incorrect, your trunk tends to sink into 
the water and your abdominal muscles become tense. 

If you are familiar with Hatha-yoga, you can also try to have your 
bath in matsyasana, posture of the fish. 

But the position shown at the beginning of this section is quite 

sufficient. You need to be able to remain comfortable and somehow 

motionless for as long as possible, so it is preferable to adopt an 

effortless position. 

Take the position and relax in your bath for a while. 

Build up the vibration in the eye and become aware of your 

etheric vibration as a whole. Breathe with the throat friction. The 

friction will take on a new dimension with your ears in the water. 

Then become aware of the vibration of the water. Completely 

forget about your body, just tune into the water. 'Become' the 

water and feel its vibration. You will discover that not all water 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

has the same qualities. Even from one day to the next, the 

vibration of the water of the same bathtub may vary 


Then, after a sufficient time, start feeling the interaction 

between the vibration of the water and your own vibration. How 

is the latter affected by the former? 


• The physical body is said to be related to the earth element, the 
astral body to the air element, the Ego to the fire element and the 
etheric body to the water element. It is therefore quite 
appropriate to explore your etheric deeply while in the water. 
Don't hesitate to repeat all the practices of this chapter, 
discovering the qualities, circulations and limits of your etheric 
while in your bath. 

• Never miss an occasion to tune into the vibration whenever you 
are in water. You will be surprised how refreshed you feel after 
taking a bath according to these principles. You can also 
incorporate some essential oils and various (natural) substances to 
the bath water, finding out if you can feel any modification in 
the quality of vibration (in the water and in yourself). Essential 
oils are subtle: it is when you tune into their energy that you can 
benefit most from their effect. 

• An excellent juice to put in a bath can be prepared by grating a 
bit of ginger and simmering it for ten minutes. Strain and add 
the liquid to the bath water. The cleansing effect on the skin is 

• This new perception of water will make it fascinating to bathe 
in lakes, rivers, waterfalls or the ocean. But it won't necessarily 
make you more attracted to public swimming pools, in which all 
sorts of undesirable vibrations sometimes accumulate. 

8.9 Etheric excretion at the end of a bath 

At the end of your bath, while fully aware of the vibration all 
over your body, look for energies inside you that feel unclear or 
negative. Spend one minute exploring and sensing for undesirable 

Then release the negative vibrations into the vibration of the 
water. Use long, conscious exhalations accompanied by a vigorous 
throat friction, while pushing undesirable vibrations out of your 
etheric layer. This is one of the keys of etheric excretion: it works 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

better while exhaling. And therefore it works even better if you 
exhale 'with intention', putting all of yourself into the action of 
pushing the breath out instead of exhaling mechanically. For this 
particular purpose of excretion, do the friction while exhaling, not 
while inhaling. And the friction should be significantly more 
intense than usual. 

Do not stay too long in your bath after you finish the excretion 


• Try to use this technique when you suffer from a headache. 
When implemented early enough, at the onset of the crisis, it 
often gives excellent results. 

• The practices of this chapter certainly open new perspectives in 
relation to the emerging discipline of hydrotherapy. 

• After this practice of excretion don't allow anyone else to dip 
into your bath. Discard the water. Under normal circumstances, 
there is no need to worry too much about having to cleanse the 
bathtub itself. Yet you should be careful if a lot of people are 
using the same bathtub. (Hindu gurus put great emphasis on 
having their own private bathroom.) 

• Some people tend to feel uncomfortable if they pull out the plug 
and let the water out while they are still in the bath, as if some of 
their own energy was washed away. Experiment and see if it does 
anything to you. 

8.10 Loo practice 

I can never insist enough on the importance of 'etheric excretion'. 
It is a vital function that human beings have lost, to a great 
extent. This fact appears strikingly evident to the clairvoyant but 
is presently overlooked by both conventional and alternative 
therapies, apart from a few techniques of drainage in 
homoeopathy, acupuncture and herbalism. However, none of these 
is very efficient compared to the excretion capacity that develops 
through a conscious awakening of the etheric layer. 
The more you exercise your capacity for etheric excretion, the 
more it will develop into a tangible function. You will feel certain 
etheric vibrations leaving your etheric body as clearly as you feel 
stools leaving your physical body. 

Certain etheric excretions can take place without any physical ones. 
However, it should be clearly understood that all physical 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

excretions are supposed to be accompanied by etheric ones. But due 
to what homoeopaths call the psoric miasm inherent in the 
population, etheric excretions are nothing like they should be. 
Become aware of your layer of vibration while passing urine or 
stools. Apply yourself to passing out negative etheric vibrations at 
the same time as the physical matter. You will be really surprised 
at the intensity of the results and of the general wellbeing that is 

• Even though they usually remain unnoticed, unexpectedly 
strong energy movements take place while passing urine and, to a 
lesser extent, stools. This could account for the fact that a 
significant number of heart patients expire while on the toilet. 

8.11 Releasing into the earth 

As your capacity for etheric excretion develops, it becomes 

possible to operate releases not only into water but also into the 


Take off your shoes and socks, and place your soles and palms on 

the earth. 

Keep your eyes closed. Engage the throat friction, feel the 

vibration in your eye and all over your body. Then forget about 

your body and feel the vibration of the earth. 

After 1 or 2 minutes start excreting etheric vibrations into the 

earth. Use deep exhalations, reinforced by a strong friction. Put 

unwanted vibrations into the earth while the air is coming out of 

your mouth. To the earth, these are not noxious vibrations. They 

will be composted and processed into renewed nature forces. 


• This practice can also be efficient in releasing anger or stress. 

• As with anything powerful, this technique should be used with 
moderation. Otherwise a certain depletion of your energies could 

8.12 Tree hugging 

Here is another exercise related to etheric excretion. Next time 
you are in a forest, tune in and select a big tree, one with which 
you feel an affinity. 

Then go and hug the tree. Get as much surface contact as possible: 
as well as holding the trunk with your arms, press your chest, 
your belly and your legs against it. 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

Release any excess vibrations into the tree. Excrete them the same 
way as you do into the bath water. Present it as a gift to the tree. 
Thank the tree when you finish. 


• For negative energies, first try to operate releases into the 
water or into the earth. Keep trees for more subtle vibrations or 
for the type of energies that you are really unable to get rid of 
by any other means. Anyway you do not necessarily hurt the tree 
by doing this, rather you present it with something valuable. Even 
though to you, the vibration related to a depressed mood or the 
beginning of the flu may seem negative, to the tree it is a highly 
evolved and sophisticated energy. If you use your sensitivity you 
will be able to pick out trees that yearn for what you are trying 
to eliminate from yourself. 

• This technique can work miracles. But you have to stay against 
the tree for long enough, a good 10 to 15 minutes, or more if you 
can. You need to give the tree enough time to receive what you are 
trying to give. 

8.13 Crying 

Shedding tears can be an occasion to release a lot of emotional 
tension and undesirable energies, especially if you apply your new 
capacity for etheric excretion. Put everything you want to get rid 
of into the tears. 

Being able to cry (at will, if possible!) is a valuable skill on the path 
of self-transformation. It allows you to cleanse the heart in depth. 
If you are the type of person who can never cry, I would suggest 
that you apply yourself to regaining this ability. Use any trick 
you can find, from peeling onions to more sophisticated methods 
of dramatic art. 

On the other hand, if you are the type of person who cries rather 
too much, it may be that by releasing more through your tears 
you won't need to cry as much, the idea being to increase the 
quality in order to reduce the quantity. 

8.14 Sucking the citrus 

Mother, apart from being in charge of the Sri Aurobindo Ashram 
of Pondicherry for many years, was also one of the great 
occultists of the 20th century. She recalled that she once worked 
with an extraordinarily psychic woman, Mrs. Theon. Mrs. Theon 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

was able to put a grapefruit on her chest while she was lying 

down, and suck in its energy with her etheric body. After some 

time, all the vital force had been extracted from the grapefruit. 

Even physically, the fruit looked shrivelled. 

Could you take an orange or a grapefruit and do the same? 

Lie down. Put a good, healthy (and preferably organic) orange on 

your sternum, right against the skin. 

Close your eyes. Become aware of the vibration in the eye. Become 

aware of the vibration all over your body and in your chest in 

particular. Then become aware of the vibration inside the fruit. 

Start drawing the vibration of the fruit into your own layer of 


8.15 Yawning 

Yawning is one of those little inner movements that can release 
unexpectedly big waves of energy. Yawning can be regarded as a 
proper channel release: it is an action, a physical movement, that 
can be followed by a movement of energy, or etheric wave. As 
with all channel releases, the energy movement is far more 
important than the physical movement. But as we described before 
(section 6.3), this energy movement has to be allowed, otherwise it 
won't happen, or it will happen only faintly. It is one of those 
natural functions that our etheric body does not perform 
automatically any more. 

Suppressing yawning is a perverse conditioning coming from 
repressive education. When fully performed, yawning releases the 
heart, the same as crying. It also frees many tensions that would 
otherwise accumulate in the eyes, hence the tiny little tear that 
appears in the corner of the eyes after a full, generous yawn. 
Let us see how you can get the most out of yawning. If you 
observe it from your eye, you will see that when yawning, most 
people tend to release energies through their mouth. If you can 
become aware of this energy release and amplify it 'with 
intention' when you yawn, that will already be a significant 

But there is a more enlightened way of yawning. The general 
principle is to yawn upwards. You have to manipulate all the 
muscles of the back of the throat for the energy movement to be 
directed upwards, towards the top of the head, rather than 
horizontally through the mouth. While yawning try to elongate 
the pharynx. The mouth does not have to be very open, it can 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

actually be kept nearly closed. Focus all your attention at the top 
of the back of the throat, behind the nasal cavity. This area, at 
the roof of the pharynx, is closely associated with the metabolism 
of the nectar of immortality. 


• If you are fast enough, you can also use sneezing as an energy 

• You must have noticed how contagious yawning is. In a series of 
lectures given in Kassel in June and July 1909, Rudolf Steiner 
explained that in Atlantis subconscious influences used to pass 
much more freely between human beings. A powerful man was 
able to raise his arm, and just by the play of these subconscious 
influences all the people around him would automatically feel 
compelled to lift their arm. Yawning is the last remnant of this 
type of inclination. 

8.16 The right side of the ring 

If you wear a ring, take it off. (If you wear several, take them all 

off, so you can test them one by one.) 

Close your eyes, become aware of the vibration in the eye, and of 

the vibration in the corresponding finger. Use the throat friction 

to amplify the feeling. 

Then put the ring on, and become aware of the vibration in the 

eye and the finger again. Remain motionless for half a minute or 


Then take off the ring, turn it around and put it back on the 

other way round. (A ring has two sides. So after you have put the 

ring on the other way round, the side that was closer to the 

knuckle is now further from it.) 

Become motionless again, tune into the vibration in the eye and in 

the finger. Implement the throat friction. Compare the vibration 

with what you were feeling in the other position. The current of 

vibration generated by the ring often feels quite different. 

Which way is the right way? Try each position a few times, until 

you can decide which feels right, 'direct' and supportive of your 

energies, and which feels wrong, 'retrograde' and working against 




Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

• A lot of force can be stored in a ring, with or without a 
mounted stone. The more potent the ring, the more important it 
is to wear it on the 'right side'. 

• A pendulum can also be used to confirm the 'right' side of the 

8.17 A note about wrist watches 

Beware! Seen from the eye, watches appear much more toxic than 
is usually believed. This applies especially to quartz watches: it is 
like a whiplash sent into your etheric body with each vibration of 
the watch. But even without quartz, all watches tend to create a 
perverse etheric field and are a major interference in the natural 
flow of your energies. 

Here is a simple experiment to convince you of the pernicious 
effect of watches. For this, you will need a friend and a pendulum. 
A key or a ring at the end of a 15-centimetre (3-inch) cotton 
thread will do perfectly as a pendulum. It is better to avoid 
synthetic thread. 

Ask your friend to take off his/her watch. Hold the pendulum in 
one of your hands, and with your other hand take your friend's 
right hand pulse. That's assuming your friend usually wears 
his/her watch on the left side. If he/she wears the watch on the 
right side, then start by taking the pulse of the left hand. 
How do you take the pulse? Use your index, middle and ring 
fingers, and place them on the radial artery just above the line of 
the wrist, on the side of the thumb. Note that this part of the 
radial artery is located on the Lung Meridian (section 4.8). 
While holding the pendulum in one hand and taking the pulse with 
your other hand, go into your eye, become aware of the vibration, 
and breathe with a slight friction. Then tune into the energy of 
the pulse. Try to feel the vibration in the artery. The pendulum 
will start rotating in one direction. 

Now repeat the operation with your friend's other hand. Tune into 
the vibration of the pulse. You will see that in most cases the 
pendulum starts turning in the other direction. This fact is quite 
normal: it just shows that the energy of each arm has a different 

Then repeat the operation after asking your friend to put on the 
watch. Take the pulse of the hand with the watch, tune in, and... 
surprise! The pendulum either stops rotating, or rotates in the 
opposite direction to when it was minus the watch. This means 


Chapter 8 - Practices on the Etheric Body 

that the wrist watch cancels or inverts the energy polarity of the 
arm on which it is worn — a confronting observation indeed! 
There is no right place to wear a watch on your body. Nurses' 
habit of attaching the watch close to the heart is certainly not 
advisable either. As long as the watch is in contact with the body, 
or very close to it (less than 1 or 2 inches away), it creates a major 
interference in your etheric. That is why the effect will be 
roughly the same if you decide to keep the watch in your pocket 
instead of wearing it on your wrist. 

A watch should be carried in a bag, and not on you. For instance, 
it is very possible to attach the watch to the strap of your bag in 
a way that's easy to read from a distance. Why not start a new 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

Note: Throughout this book, whenever the term 'the eye' is 
mentioned, it refers to the third eye, and not to the physical 


9.1 Centredness through vigilance in the eye 

Let us start with a simple experience. Close your eyes and do a 
reconnection: become aware between the eyebrows and breathe 
with the throat friction. Build up the vibration in the eye. Then 
open your eyes and look at any object in front of you. Even 
though your eyes are open, keep a strong awareness of the 
vibration between the eyebrows. What is in your field of 
consciousness? The object, you, and the vibration between the 

Something interesting can be noticed: it is as if you were looking 
at the object from between the eyebrows. You are not trying to do 
so, it just happens automatically. You just look at an object, 
keeping a strong awareness of the vibration in the eye. And very 
naturally you find yourself looking at the object from between 
the eyebrows. In other words, you are centred. Note that you are 
not actively doing anything to achieve centredness, it just happens 
by itself. This is because the very nature of the third eye is 
centredness. Therefore whenever your eye is operating, you find 
yourself centred. 

Take another object and start looking at it. At the same time, 
remain aware of the vibration between the eyebrows. Another 
finding is that your mind tends to quieten. Once more, you are 
not trying to make your mind silent. Anyway it is hopeless to try 
to achieve inner silence by fighting against the mind. So don't try 
anything, don't do anything, just keep some awareness of the 
vibration in the eye. And as a by-product you will find that your 
mind is quieter than usual. 

How does this happen? As soon as you are in the eye, you are 
already a bit out of the mind. Remember the eye contact exercise 
we did in section 5.9. We were observing the layer of ordinary 
mental consciousness, called manas in Sanskrit. This manas-mind, 
made of grasping and conditioning, is the facade, the one that goes 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

on talking in your head all the time. And the third eye is the gate 
that leads out of it. So that each time you go into your eye you 
make a first step out of the mind, and therefore everything calms 

Repeat this practice (9.1) over and over again. Choose a few objects 
around you and spend some time looking at each of them. Each 
time, there is the object, there is you, and there is the awareness 
of the vibration/tingling/pressure between the eyebrows. Keep 
your eyes open, blink as little as possible. Keep on breathing with 
the throat friction. Observe your own awareness and see how it 
differs from when there is no focus in the eye. 

9.2 Inner alchemy 

The centredness and quietness that arise from being in the eye 
illustrate the nature of inner alchemy. The eye is the structure, 
centredness is one of its functions. Activate the structure and the 
function will be implemented. Instead of trying to fight mentally 
against your mind to achieve inner calmness, you build up a new 
structure: the third eye. And then you just have to switch on the 
structure for the function, stillness, to be activated. 
This is one of the great secrets of inner alchemy: do not try to 
solve a problem on the level of the problem. For instance don't 
waste your time fighting the mind with the mind. Fashion a new 
organ. Once built up, the eye radiates calmness — that is its very 
nature. So the task is to build the third eye, just as the ancients 
built the cathedrals. It is a work that requires perseverance or, 
according to one of the mottos of the Clairvision School: 
'supernatural persistence'. And then one day you realize that you 
just have to be in your eye to make your mind silent. Nothing to 
fight, nothing to try: mastery is complete. You can see the 
thoughts coming towards your mind as little forms and you can 
choose whether you wish to let them in or not. 

Let us take another example: meditation. You may have reached a 
very high state of meditation once or a few times in your life, 
for instance when withdrawing from your daily activities and 
undergoing a meditation retreat for a few days or weeks. But then 
going back to work and resuming your usual life, the high state of 
consciousness gradually fades and you get caught back into your 
daily routine of thoughts. 

The answer given by inner alchemy is: don't fight to retain the 
experience. You can't maintain it because you are lacking the 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

proper organ, the structure of energy that would allow you to 
stabilise yourself in a higher state of consciousness. You need to 
generate such a structure. Start weaving the body of immortality. 
Open the central channel of energy, in the middle of the body. 
Build up the crown centre, at the top of the head. 
Create the proper subtle organs and it won't only be during 
meditation retreats that you will be able to experience an 
expansion of consciousness, it will be all the time. Even in the 
middle of a crowd, in a busy railway station or while driving in 
traffic jams, the new state of consciousness will remain with you. 
The experience won't depend on your mind being made quiet 
through seclusion, far away from the world. Spiritual awareness 
will radiate from the Self through the vehicles that have been 
built, no matter what happens around you. 

We are now at the stage of building the third eye, as a first step 
in the realisation of the body of immortality. 

9.3 Permanence in the eye 

Spiritual paths are many and varied, and so are their techniques. 
They invite you to look at the world and at yourself from 
different angles. But there are a few common points to most of 
them. The central theme that can be found in nearly all methods 
of self -transformation is the necessity to maintain a permanent 
inner awareness. 

Indian masters often like to make their disciples ponder on what it 
is that distinguishes an enlightened sage from any other human 
being. The latter may be more intelligent, more educated, more 
handsome than the sage. He may have all sorts of skills that the 
sage does not have. But there is one fundamental characteristic 
that makes all the difference between the two: the sage is 
permanently aware and the other is not. The sage has exploded into 
a space of consciousness in which inner awareness is spontaneous. 
The other one's mind is caught in unceasing thoughts, perceptions 
and emotions that overshadow the perception of his Self. 
To sustain this awareness, all sorts of methods have been designed 
by generations of spiritual inventors. Some use a mantra, a 
sequence of sounds endowed with power, and repeat it inside all 
the time! Like the great yogi Ramdass, for instance, who reached 
his enlightenment by repeating the mantra om ram non-stop for 
twenty years. Equivalent practices can be found in Christian 
mysticism in the constant repetition of certain prayers. The 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

method can be very powerful, even though it does not necessarily 
suit everybody: the constant repetition of a sequence of sounds is 
but one way among many. 

The problem is to find one method that fits your energy, and to 
stick to it. I suggest that you ask yourself the question: what is 
my magic wand, meaning what device am I using to remain aware 
all the time? And does it work? If you care for your spiritual 
development, then this question is vital. As long as the answer to 
the second question remains no, you are not even a candidate for 
higher states of consciousness and for initiation. 
Note that the technique that is right for you is not always the one 
you like in the beginning. Success in spiritual practice comes from 
persisting. If you study the lives of enlightened masters, you will 
find that quite often when they started their path, they did not 
understand anything of what they were doing. The technique they 
had been given, the one through which they were going to reach 
enlightenment later on, seemed to them arid, unproductive and 
foreign. So why did they become masters while many others got 
nowhere? They persisted, persisted, persisted... to the point where 
this persistence became more important than the technique itself, 
and ended up leading to a phenomenal breakthrough. 
In the Clairvision path of inner alchemy, the first of the magic 
wands is to establish permanent awareness in the eye. If you can 
look at an object and at the same time remain aware of the 
vibration between the eyebrows, then you can also walk, for 
instance, with the same awareness. Why don't you give it a try, 
right now (another of our mottos). Leave your book for one 
minute and walk around, with a total awareness of the vibration 
between the eyebrows. 

So, this is a first extension of your spiritual quest into your daily 
activities. Now, each time you walk, you can be a seeker. You can 
either wander without any awareness, swallowed by your 
thoughts, or you can be totally in the vibration between the 

Driving is another activity that you will find easy to marry with 
your awareness in the eye. Driving from the eye is harmonious 
and immensely satisfying for the soul. The focus keeps you aware 
and centred, and you can drive for longer periods of time with 
less tension and less fatigue. Moreover, you remain vigilant and 
your angle of vision is wider, which improves the safety of your 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 


Then the purpose is to extend your awareness to more and more of 
your activities, until you reach a constant focus in the eye. At one 
stage this eye-centred awareness will become automatic and 
effortless. It will be integrated into all your actions. Then you 
become a candidate for initiation. 

Think of all the monks who spend their lives in a monastery with 
nothing else to do than pray or meditate from morning to night. 
Only a small percentage of them will reach the enlightenment 
they are after. How then could you hope to have a chance, just by 
meditating 20 minutes twice a day and being caught in the turmoil 
of modern life the rest of the time? 

The answer lies in extending your awareness to every situation of 
your daily life. Start using the world to become more aware. Then 
the world becomes your teacher instead of your adversary. The 
most insignificant circumstances turn into beautiful opportunities 
to test and enhance your centredness and your vigilance. For it is 
very possible to slumber in a monastery, to withdraw into a 
disconnected inner life that avoids key issues and leads nowhere. 
Whereas if you accept facing the world, then the world will make 
sure that you face yourself. 

Now please do not make being in the eye a painstaking process — 
have fun! The Clairvision techniques have been designed for you to 
play with. There can be a foolish way of remaining in your head 
all day, only remembering your purpose of vigilance from time to 
time and getting angry at yourself for letting your mind wander. 
Instead of being swallowed by your daily routines and 
remembering the focus in the eye only now and then, I would 
suggest that in the beginning, you apply yourself to performing 
certain actions with a total awareness between the eyebrows. 
For instance, do the dishes being 100% in the eye. If you put all of 
yourself into it, after a few times it will become automatic: each 
time you start washing up the presence in the eye will come by 
itself. Incidentally, note that washing up can become a very 
refreshing activity if you use a flow of running water and release 
your tensions and wrong energies into it as you process the dishes 
(technique 4.12). 

Several activities that would usually be regarded as plain and 
boring will become unexpectedly fascinating if you perform them 
from the eye. As more and more seeingness and vision are added to 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

the focus in your eye, the world turns into a constant source of 
wonder. You can very well implement this path where you are, 
here and now. Leaving your job and fleeing into a cave would not 
necessarily be an advantage. The problem is not so much to change 
your activities but to achieve them with the new awareness. 

Life in the eye: tips, tricks and traps 

• It is always good to use a few reminders: each time you see 
them, you go back to your focus. For instance tie a ribbon around 
your wrist, or stick little pieces of paper at key locations on your 
walls. Or write a note on your mirror, paint one of your nails a 
different colour... 

• Doors and gates have a strong symbolic resonance. A powerful 
practice is to remind yourself of your spiritual aspiration each 
time you cross a doorway. 

• Another powerful method is to get a watch with a countdown 
and to make it ring, say every seven minutes. Each time you hear 
the signal, re-focus your awareness in the vibration between the 
eyebrows and breathe with the throat friction for ten or fifteen 
seconds. Seven is a good number for self-transformation. Actually, 
what is important is not the length of the interval but the fact 
that the signal and the practice are repeated with extreme 
regularity. This gives a sense of rhythm to the astral body and 
deeply imprints in you the habit of being in the eye. 

• Now let us try something. Close your eyes, start breathing with 
the friction, build up a strong vibration between the eyebrows for 
1 or 2 minutes. Then open your eyes, keeping the tightest focus 
between the eyebrows, and look at yourself in a mirror. 
Obviously your friends and relatives will find it a bit confronting 
if you address them with a face like that! So what to do? Firstly, 
whenever you are talking to somebody, practise being in both the 
eye and the heart (technique 5.13), so that the intensity of your 
eye will be tempered by the opening and the softness of your 

Secondly when, through practice, you have become more 
established in your eye, the intense semi-frowning of the 
beginning will disappear and you will look quite normal. 
Meanwhile, try to play it diplomatically. 

9.4 The harvest of permanence 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

Let us review and try to understand the benefits that result from 
maintaining permanent awareness in the eye. 

• Awareness 

First and most important of all is the awareness itself, as discussed 
above. Whoever is aware is sailing towards the Self. Whoever is 
not, is wasting beautiful opportunities for growth. 

• Centredness 

As shown by the simple experiences at the beginning of this 
chapter, one of the direct results that comes from being in the 
eye is a more centred state of consciousness. In the philosophy of 
yoga (yoga-darsana) there is an important word - vlksepa. Vlksepa 
refers to a scattered and spread-out condition of the mind. The 
great seer Patanjali in his classical Yoga-Sutras (aphorisms on yoga) 
described viksepa as one of the major obstacles on the path towards 
spiritual reintegration (Yoga-Sutras 1:30-31). The more your eye 
develops, the more you will find that you have the capacity to 
maintain a still and silent state of mind at will. 

• An awareness beyond the discursive mind 

The advantage of using the eye for the purpose of awareness is 
that it leads to a vigilance that is beyond the common layer of the 
discursive mind. One of the main pitfalls when you apply yourself 
to a path of awareness is watching your mind with your mind. 
Some people manage to reach a certain awareness of their 
thoughts, but a purely mental one. In other words, each time they 
have a thought, say about their friend Briinnhilde for instance, 
another thought comes up: "I'm thinking of Briinnhilde". And so 
on. These people often get dissatisfied after some time. They have 
the feeling they are doing all the right things, starting with 
awareness, and yet nothing ever happens. They remain floored in 
their usual mental consciousness. They never experience any real 
breakthrough towards an expanded state of consciousness. 
The reason is obvious. The true aim is the awareness of the Self, 
and not only self-awareness! Manas, the layer of ordinary mental 
consciousness, the one that goes on talking in your head all the 
time, is the main veil between you and the Self. Therefore the 
purpose is to emerge out of the manas-mind into the Self, and not 
to get the majias-mind to mimic a higher awareness by adding 
thoughts after thoughts. 

So it is when you start to watch the mind from outside the mind 
that your awareness becomes spiritually rewarding. And that is 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

why it can be so valuable to work at an opening of perception: 
when achieved according to our principles, the opening allows you 
to step out of the manas-mind. The main point is not so much to 
see auras and non-physical worlds but to see from 'out of the 
mind'. Then you start existing out of the cage. 
Now you can understand better why it has been constantly 
repeated in this book that the essence lies not in what you see, but 
in the fact of seeing. In terms of spiritual development, the 
content of the visions is secondary compared to the breakthrough 
out of the layer of usual mental consciousness. The people who 
spend too much energy trying to analyse the symbolic meaning of 
their visions often miss this point completely. 
• Building the eye 

By remaining permanently focussed between the eyebrows, you 
quicken the evolution of the eye to a considerable degree. The eye 
is nurtured by your awareness. Moreover, you establish a 
connection that allows spiritual guides and helpers to give energy 
and support. It is their function in the first stages of your 
spiritual development to come and chisel your subtle organs of 
clairvoyance. Their task is greatly facilitated if you maintain a 
constant vigilance. Truly, the awareness that you are aiming at is a 
connected one. Instead of saying 'be aware in the eye' one could say 
'remain connected through your focus in the eye'. If you devote 
yourself to establishing a certain permanence in the eye, the 
feeling of connection with your own energy will become more and 
more obvious. 

Persistence in this work also fosters several physiological changes 
in the nerves and glands that are related to the third eye. The 
third eye itself is not physical, it is an organ of energy. It belongs 
mainly to the etheric and astral bodies. Yet some physical 
structures in the vicinity are connected to it, and undergo a deep 
transformation as your awakening proceeds: the pituitary gland 
for instance, and at a later stage, the pineal gland. These two are 
invariably mentioned by occultists of all kinds when discussing the 
third eye. However, in-depth clairvoyant investigation reveals that 
significant changes also take place in other structures, such as the 
cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone (through which the nerves 
from the nasal mucosa reach the brain), the optic chiasma, the 
frontal air sinus, the sphenoid air sinus, and the ventricles of the 
brain (cavities filled with liquid inside the brain). 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

• Filtering the external world 

One of the reasons you cannot see the non-physical worlds is that 
your mind is saturated with impressions received from the 
physical senses. In other words, your head is full of the images 
and sounds of the physical world and there is no space left for 
anything else. The cup has to be emptied before any other material 
can be poured in. That is why you often find in Steiner, for 
instance, that the apprentice esotericist should daily put aside some 
time in which he cuts off from any sensory perception. Then the 
astral body, the layer of mental consciousness, can withdraw into a 
life of its own, and behold non-physical images. A very similar 
concept is constantly repeated in the different yogas of the Indian 
tradition. The Sanskrit word pratyahara corresponds to a 
withdrawal from the senses, through which a naked condition of 
consciousness can be experienced. In Sanskrit literature, pratyahara 
is often described as a prerequisite for higher inner experiences. 
As you open your vision you will make an interesting discovery: 
the pollution is not only a question of quantity but also of quality. 
It is not only the fact that you constantly receive a multitude of 
physical sensorial perceptions that makes you unable to see other 
worlds. It is also that these physical perceptions have a harsh 
effect on your system. What comes from the physical senses is 
like coarse matter: it is excessively gross. Therefore, if not 
filtered it makes your consciousness rough and unrefined. 
In other words you are permanently inundated with unprocessed 
impressions: images, sounds, smells and so on. These rush into your 
consciousness and create much more damage than you think. To 
draw an analogy, it is as if the nutrients you eat were sent 
directly to the organs and tissues of your body without having 
been processed through the digestive tract. If that were the case 
your physical body would lose its identity, it would become too 
'outside-like'. And that is exactly what happens to your 
consciousness. It loses its Self-identity. The Self can no longer be 
discerned among this tidal wave of external impressions. 
I want to insist on this fact, because it appears essential when one 
observes the economy of consciousness clairvoyantly. The same 
way as your physical body is made of what you have eaten, all the 
sensory impressions contribute to weaving your layer of mental 
consciousness. And in the present situation a thick cloud of coarse 
astral matter is being generated in you day after day, veiling the 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 


What happens when you remain aware in your third eye? The 
impressions coming from the external world are received in the 
third eye first instead of rushing straight into your mind. 
Remember the exercises on centredness at the beginning of this 
chapter, where you look at an object and you remain aware 
between the eyebrows. Automatically it is as if you were looking 
from the third eye, meaning that the visual impressions reach 
your third eye first. Then what happens? The third eye 'digests' 
these impressions. It filters and processes them. 
This mechanism will strike you, as soon as you observe it 
clairvoyantly. The quality of vibration of what enters your head 
differs markedly, depending on whether or not it has first been 
processed by your third eye. The perceptions that have first 
transited through the third eye are smooth and refined. Those 
that have not are harsh and cacophonous. They hurt like a 
headache. They weave your consciousness in a way that is unfit for 
spiritual awareness. 

Understanding and applying this principle is enough in itself to 
change a destiny. For what does one see when observing the mind 
clairvoyantly? The thoughts of the mind are not abstract entities, 
they are made of a certain substance. Of course, this substance is 
not physical, but still it exists as matter, on a certain level. And 
the quality of your mental substance determines the quality of 
your thoughts. Spiritual thoughts, or even just clever thoughts, 
simply cannot grow or be received if the mental substance is gross 
and poor. If you care for your spiritual development, I suggest you 
ponder upon this point. 

9.5 Practice 

You may sit or stand, but make sure that your back is straight. 
Become aware between the eyebrows. (Logically, after reading this 
chapter you should already be between the eyebrows!) Become 
motionless. Limit your blinking and the movements of your 
• Images 

Look at an object around you. Look from the eye. Receive the 
object in the eye, between the eyebrows. Try to put into practice 
the filtering effect that we have just discussed. Try to feel the 
'weight' of the images on your third eye, as if the images were 
pressing between your eyebrows. Make sure that no visual 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

impression bypasses the eye. Become aware of the processing of all 
physical images by the third eye. 

Then drop any awareness of the eye. Release your focus. Start 
looking at the objects in a usual mental way... and see the 
difference. Can you perceive that the vibrations reaching your 
head are less subtle? 

• Sounds 

Apply the same method to sounds. Put some music on and first 
spend one minute listening to it without any particular awareness, 
and without focus in the eye. Try to appreciate the quality of 
vibration of what is taken in. 

Then become aware between the eyebrows. Listen from the eye. 
Maintain your focus in a way that the sounds are received in your 
eye. Try to sense the difference in the nature of the vibrations 
that penetrate inside you. 

• Smells 

Now practise with something that stimulates the sense of smell. 
First smell the substance without any particular awareness. Then 
receive the smell from between the eyebrows: smell from the eye. 
How does the input differ when filtered through the eye? 

• Taste 

Start eating a meal without any particular awareness. Then, after a 

few minutes start tasting the food from the eye. In this instance 

the difference in the quality of vibration will be especially 


Then practise more selectively with different tastes and foods. 

Watch and compare the action of sweet, salty, acidic and other 

tastes on your eye, one after another. 

A major discovery will be that when in the eye, you do not 

necessarily appreciate the same foods as when you eat without 


9.6 Practice 

Practise walking along the street with a complete focus in the eye. 
Make sure that any image, sound, or smell is received from your 
eye. After a few minutes release your awareness. Receive 
everything mentally, without any focus in your eye. Compare the 
quality of vibrations inside yourself. 

9.7 Practice 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

What is it exactly that penetrates you when you perceive an 

image, a sound, a smell...? What sort of vibration is received? What 

sort of subtle substance is added to your being? 

Repeat practice 9.5, but this time put all the emphasis on the 

perceiver — you. Look at an object without keeping any particular 

focus in the eye. The object has certain qualities and there is also a 

certain quality of vibration inside your head. 

What is it that is added to your own vibration when you receive 

the image of the object? What changes in your head or elsewhere, 

on the level of energy? 

Now be more and more in the eye. There are degrees, as far as 

being in the eye is concerned. You can be 10% in the eye, or 40% in 

the eye... and if you persist in your practice, one day you will be 

able to be 100% in the eye. 

Start with being just a little bit in the eye, say 5%. Watch the 

difference in the vibration that is received from the object, 

compared to when no particular awareness is kept in the eye. 

Increase progressively, becoming 10% aware in the eye, then 20%, 

and so on. Each time, observe the vibration that is taken in while 

looking at the object. Then do the same with as much awareness as 

possible. Try to sense how the visual impression affects you. What 

is added to your energy while perceiving? Can you feel the sensory 

input as astral matter? 

Go from one object to another and repeat the observation process 

with gradually increasing levels of eye-centred awareness. 

Then put some music on and repeat the process, this time with 


The same exercise can be applied to taste. 

9.8 Test 

Choose the most hectic place of a large city. Try to stay there for 

half an hour with full awareness in the eye. Make sure that no 

perception comes in without having been processed by your eye. 

Filter even those perceptions that usually remain unnoticed, but 

still are recorded unconsciously. 

How far can you maintain your integrity? 

Repeat the test from time to time, to measure your progress. 

9.9 Intermezzo: changes in vision 

One of the first results you will notice when applying the 
techniques described in this book, is a gentle transformation of 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

the way you perceive space in your daily activities. For the 

practices dealt with in this section it would be best if you could be 

outside, in a garden or forest. 

Practise looking at trees and flowers while being in the eye. Sit 

comfortably somewhere, not necessarily in a meditation posture. 

Just be relaxed. Reconnect with the eye, between the eyebrows. 

Keep your eyes open. It is better not to move too much, but you 

do not have to adopt a statue-like attitude as in the eye contact 


Resume the triple process of vision, with: 

1) awareness in the eye 

2) awareness of the fact of seeing, or seeingness. If seeingness is 
too much of a problem, just feel the image instead of looking at it. 

3) the feeling from the heart 

You will notice that while f ocussed in the eye, your perception of 
the countryside changes slightly. A first simple difference is that 
your perception is more global: it encompasses more of what is 
located at the periphery of the image. Instead of selecting a part 
and unconsciously focussing on it, you remain aware of the whole 

But there is more than this increase of peripheral perception. 
Compared to what you would usually see, the image seems to be 
'less flat'. The air seems to 'take dimension'. There seems to be 
more perspective, more relief. As you go on developing your eye, 
this contrast will appear more and more clearly. The difference 
between the vision of the third eye and the usual one is similar to 
that between reality and a postcard, or between a holographic 
picture and a flat one. The eye seems to add a stereoscopic 
dimension to the image even without going into extra-sensory 
perception or vision of auras. 

Another noticeable difference is that the image seems to be more 
'alive'. The colours are more vivid, as if endowed with an intensity 
and a vitality of their own. The colours talk to your soul, they 
communicate their qualities. There is definitely a feeling of 
aliveness permeating the whole picture. Your physical vision is 
suddenly greatly embellished: it is as if you were rediscovering the 
world! And all you have to do in order to reach this other vision is 
to step a little out of the layer of the mind in which you have 
been conditioned to operate. Remember that as soon as you enter 
the eye you are already half-way out of the mind. 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

When re-experiencing past life episodes through techniques of 
regression and clairvoyance, one comes to realize that until not so 
long ago, most human beings saw the world through this more 
beautiful and living vision. The 'flattening' of the field of 
consciousness seems to have taken place from the 19th century 
onwards, contemporaneous with the industrial revolution and the 
explosion of scientific discoveries. It can be related to what Rudolf 
Steiner has called the coming of Ahrimanic influences into human 

I would suggest that you think of going for walks in nature and 
reconnecting with this living vision when you are troubled or 
agitated. It is a gentle way of pacifying many conflicts of the 
mind, not by struggling but by the attraction of the beauty of 
the world as seen from the non-mind. 

9.10 The eye-heart awareness 

Once you have established a solid awareness in the eye, the 
following step is to anchor it in the heart. By the heart I do not 
mean the physical organ made of muscle on the left of your body, 
but the heart centre, the chakra in the middle of the chest. (The 
same applies throughout the book.) 

In several of the eye contact exercises it was suggested that you 
place your awareness in both the eye and the heart, as if you were 
receiving images and feelings in the heart, through the eye. The 
next step is to extend this double focus to all your activities. 
The eye-heart awareness is a further development of the focus in 
the third eye. Once you have become familiar with living in the 
eye it is not so difficult to add the feeling of your heart at the 
same time. The force penetrates deeper. Your awareness gets 
anchored, grounded in the heart, and a new palette of perceptions 
and feelings arise because a higher stage of integration is achieved. 
What can be seen clairvoyantly in the aura of somebody who has 
settled a permanent awareness in both the eye and the heart? 
Streams of vibration and light start to flow between the heart and 
some centres of energy located around the pituitary and pineal 
glands. A new communication is established between the heart and 
the head. Some new channels of the body of energy are activated. 
The state of consciousness that comes out of this double focus is 
quite different too. The main difference is that the awareness in 
the heart allows you to get more in touch with your Ego, or 
Higher Self. Your Self receives more and more of your perceptions 


Chapter 9 - Awareness 

instead of being disconnected from your conscious existence. A 
new form of thinking arises from your permanent focus in the 
eye. And you can connect this new thinking with the presence of 
the Self in the heart. 

This double focus definitely leads you towards becoming more 
present in your environment. You can't do things mechanically and 
soullessly if you are fully aware of your own presence in the 
heart. You are working at building a holy connection that will 
allow the Self to receive the world and to express Itself into the 
world. In other words, you are preparing the great alchemical 
wedding: that of the Self and the world. 

9.11 When to start? 

When should you drop the single focus in the eye and start the 
double eye-heart one? Not too soon. Of course it depends how 
much of yourself you throw into the practice. But still, it takes at 
least one or two years of permanent awareness for the alchemical 
transformation of your third eye to be fully engaged. It would be 
a great mistake to stop digging too soon and divert your attention. 
Even if you consider yourself advanced, I recommend that you 
carry on with the single-f ocussed work on the eye for a sufficient 
number of months. 

Once you have shifted to the eye-heart awareness, it is still 
strongly recommended that one or two days a week are spent 
aware only in the eye in order to reinforce it. 
However, there are exceptions to these rules. Due to their own 
organisation, meaning due to self-transformation work achieved in 
former lives, certain people should focus more on the heart than 
on the eye right from the beginning of the work. For instance, a 
few people tend to be projected into fireworks of subtle 
perception as soon as they get in touch with their third eye. It is 
as if they were spread out into the astral space. They see non- 
physical beings everywhere. They merge into spiritual worlds and 
tend to lose their self-reference. In this case it is in the heart 
centre that the awareness should be stabilised. Each time such an 
experience arises, emphasis should be put on keeping a sense of 
one's Ego, and on developing self-reference by feeling one's own 
presence in the heart. The grounding exercises described in the 
chapters on protection will also be useful. 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

10.1 Tingling in various body parts 

In this chapter we will review some of the most common 
experiences, sensations and feelings you may encounter while 
working on your eye and implementing the techniques of the 

Vibration and tingling indicate that something is activated in your 
etheric body, meaning the layer of life force, or prana. When 
meditating if tingling takes place in your hands, arms, legs, or 
any part of your body, it simply indicates that some 
rearrangements are taking place in your energy. For instance some 
channels that were blocked are starting to flow again, or a 
particular circulation is temporarily stimulated, or some other 
similar movement is taking place within the etheric body. 
These little symptoms do not have any significance in themselves. 
They come and go and it is best not to pay too much attention to 

10.2 Let things come and go 

When you work with energy, a general principle is that various 
kinds of little feelings and sensations will be experienced now and 
then. These can include twitches, little pains, seeing colours, 
hearing inner sounds, and so on. They come and they go. As long 
as they do not remain on a permanent basis, they do not mean 
anything at all. Take them as little releases or rearrangements of 
energies. Do not dwell on them, just follow your process. 
It is only if some of these were to come back regularly that you 
should take them into consideration and try to understand what 
they mean. 

10.3 If a meditation experience becomes too intense... 

Can meditation ever be too intense? That is very disputable! In 
cases of high intensity it is always best to remain very quiet and 
watch what is happening without reacting. 

If for some reason you start feeling really uncomfortable and you 
wish to discontinue the experience, all you have to do is open your 
eyes and stop the practice. Tust by opening the eyes, the pressure 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

of the experience will diminish instantaneously and you will be 
brought back to your normal state of consciousness. 

10.4 Feeling vibration higher up than between the 

A possible experience is to feel pressure and light on top of the 
forehead, about one inch above the area between the eyebrows, 
around the borderline between the forehead and the scalp. The 
pressure and the light may be constant, even outside meditation, 
and even if you are not trying to maintain vigilance in the eye. 
Such pressure indicates that energy is being poured into your eye. 
It is like a chiselling of your subtle organs of clairvoyance, 
operated by non-physical helpers. 

Another possible experience is that of a 'saw' of light in the 
middle of the head (in the upper part). A pressure of vibration and 
light is felt that seems to be working at separating the two 
hemispheres of the brain. 

All these manifestations are good signs, indicating that you are 
progressing. However, they are certainly not compulsory. You can 
very well complete the whole process of opening without feeling 
any of them. 

If they take place, just watch them. They will last a certain time 
and then vanish when this episode of the building process is 

If you want to help the process you can try to tune into the 
energy that is behind the force in action. For instance, where does 
the pressure come from? Can you feel the presence of any being 
behind the 'saw of light' or whatever it is that you are feeling? 
There's no need to 'do' anything. Tust acknowledge the connection 
consciously, which will facilitate the task of the helper. 

10.5 Feeling heat 

It may happen that heat is released during your practices. 

There is nothing negative about this. It is a common manifestation 

during certain phases of awakening and does not usually last very 


If you don't drink any alcohol there is nothing particular to 

change. However, it is advisable to refrain from eating meat 

during the times of heat release, to have as pure a diet as possible 

and avoid spices. You can also take long showers and release the 

heat into the flow of running water as in the exercise of washing 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

hands (section 4.12). Bathing in rivers and in the ocean is also very 
appropriate. In Kundalini-yoga, a form of spiritual practice in 
which strong waves of heat may be released, eating yogurt is 
sometimes advised to counterbalance the warming of the body. 
The combination of work on energy and alcohol consumption is a 
dangerous one — this applies to any form of alcoholic beverage. It 
opens the door to a whole range of nasty energies and can lead to 
disaster. Virtually no form of protection can work efficiently for 
someone who drinks alcohol (see section 17.6). 

10.6 The breath stops 

It is quite common at some stage in your meditation to get the 
feeling that the breath stops. Some people tend to get a bit 
worried about this. They think: what if my body just didn't start 
inhaling again? Actually you don't have to worry, for nobody has 
ever died from a natural suspension of the breath. The body knows 
exactly what it is doing! You just have to wait a few more seconds, 
and normal respiration will resume. 

Truly, the time when the breath stops is precious. Everything 
stops inside, as in a cosmic standstill. It is an occasion to plunge 
deeper into the space and to get in touch with expanded 
dimensions of your Self. 

10.7 The pressure in the eye becomes uncomfortable 

In some cases the pressure in the eye can become uncomfortable, 

bordering on a headache. 

What happens? A mixture of different factors can be envisaged. 

• You are grasping. 

It has never been suggested that you concentrate on the third eye, 
but just that you keep an awareness of it. Yet it is very easy when 
fighting to remain in the eye to start grasping the eye instead of 
being just aware of it. An unnecessary tension is generated, that 
can turn into a kind of headache. 

So if this happens to you, the first thing to do is make sure that 
you keep a gentle awareness, and do not force anything. 

• The energy is trying to pull you upwards and you are 
unconsciously resisting. 

From time to time as you practise being in the eye, your 
consciousness will be lifted up, from between the eyebrows to 
above the head. This is very natural, and is due to the close 
connection that exists between the third eye and the crown 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

centre, at the top of the head. When this happens, just let 
yourself be pulled upwards, and enjoy being above the head for a 
while. Then come back into the eye once the experience is over. 
In the beginning it often happens that you do not recognize the 
'pull' and that you unconsciously resist, forcibly maintaining 
yourself between the eyebrows. Your very determination to 
remain firm in the eye, an aspiration which is right, 
unconsciously makes you resist the natural flow of energy. The 
result is very simple: a headache. 

What is to be done? The answer is obvious: change your focus for a 
while. Move your awareness from between the eyebrows to above 
the head. The excess of energy accumulated in your head will be 
released upwards. 
Here is a technique to help you achieve this result. 

10.8 Controlling headaches 

Close your eyes and become aware about 10 to 15 centimetres above 

the top of the head. There is a centre of energy, a chakra, in this 

area. It is not the crown chakra, it is the one above it. One of my 

teachers called it 'the centre of the hissing snake', because a 

hissing sound can be heard when one gets in touch with this 


So tune into the area 3 to 5 inches above the head and spend 1 

minute being aware and listening. Remember, no imagination! It is 

far better to remain just aware than to make up a sound. 

Then maintain your awareness at the same height, about 15 

centimetres above the top of the head, and at the same time utter 

a continuous hissing sound: 'sssssssss...' for a minute or two (a 

physical sound, not just a mental one). Do not only repeat 'sss', but 

make a proper hissing, as if you were a big snake. Put all of 

yourself into the sound, while remaining aware above the head. 

Then remain above the head and repeat the sound silently inside 

yourself for 2 or 3 minutes. 

At this stage, in many cases you will be pleasantly surprised to 

realize that your headache has disappeared. 

The more you master this technique, the more you will be able to 

release undesirable energies upwards, above the head. 


• A bit of Tiger Balm on the forehead often works very well for 
headaches related to energy, especially if applied at the onset. 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

• If you find it difficult to move the energy upwards through 
the top of the head, try to go through the back of the top of the 
skull instead of the middle. This area, around the acupuncture 
point bai hul, or Governor 20 (section 16.7), is an easier way out of 
the head. 

• Another way to facilitate the upward movement of the energies 
is to uplift the eyebrows as high and tight as possible from the 
beginning to the end of this practice. 

• This technique is a way of releasing extra pressure in the head 
due to 'over-practice'. But actually, once you have mastered the 
trick you can use it to get rid of nearly any headache, even if it 
was caused by something completely different. The technique can 
definitely be used to control migraines of various origins, 
provided the patient is ready to learn to handle energies. 

10.9 Other possible causes of headaches 

Let us look at a few other possible causes of headaches in the 
context of our work of inner alchemy (and therefore without 
mentioning the whole range of headaches related to medical 

• If you meditate, sleep, or work on a noxious earth line (see 
Chapter 12) all kinds of negative symptoms may be created, 
including headaches. It is very possible that opening your 
perception reveals these symptoms, making them appear worse. It 
is not that you are getting worse yourself, but rather that you are 
becoming more aware of the energy disorder. By correcting the 
situation (moving your bed or whatever), you will save yourself 
many troubles in the long run. 

• Headaches may also result from meditating or sleeping close to a 
fridge, television, electric heater, cables, electric blanket, 
electronic devices, synthetic carpet, or any metallic structure that 
stores static electricity. Getting rid of the cause will remove the 

In conclusion, apart from the causes mentioned above, it is not 
usual to get headaches from working on the eye. If you are 
suffering from headaches and if you have checked that none of 
the above-mentioned reasons can be responsible, then it is likely 
that the problem comes from a completely different source than 
your spiritual practice. In this case it is best to discuss the matter 
with a health practitioner. 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

10.10 Dizziness 

There is nothing wrong with feeling a bit light-headed after some 
practices that take you far into the space. In certain states of 
expanded consciousness you feel extremely light and a bit 
euphoric, as if you had drunk one or two glasses of champagne. 
However, it is not always you who are light-headed, it is the 
others who are 'heavy-headed'! Life in the common discursive mind 
creates a suffocating gravity of thoughts and emotions. But people 
don't even notice it, because they have been conditioned to it for 
so long. 

As you advance, a moderate feeling of lightness resulting from 
your practice will become 'normal' and integrated into your usual 
way of functioning. You won't even notice it. Even if in the 
beginning you feel a bit 'different', you will soon find it easier 
and more efficient to operate from this state of lightness. (When 
you start working with angels, it is an absolute delight, as if you 
were flying in your shoes.) 

If for some reason the light-headed feeling was to become 
uncomfortable, the following suggestions would very probably 
restore the situation quickly: 

— Practise the grounding exercises indicated in the chapters on 
protection (Chapters 18 and 20), keeping a strong awareness in the 
eye and in the belly. 

— Eat! Eating is one of the best ways to create a short term 
grounding. If a friend of yours is completely spaced out after a 
meditation and if there is any urgent reason to bring him back, 
then feed him. In an emergency resort to heavy foods: cakes, and 
even meat. This is dramatically efficient, but don't abuse it: proper 
grounding is supposed to come from your mastery of energy 
(Chapters 18 and 20), not from a dubious diet! 

In the chapters related to protection, it will become very clear 
that the Clairvision style of work aims at grounding as much as 
connecting with the space. 

10.11 Getting fed-up or emotional 

What is happening when you feel fed-up or emotional as a result 
of your meditation? Your emotional blockages are being revealed 
by your work of opening. This is quite logical and necessary. As 
you try to refine and purify your system, you meet all that is 
unclear inside, so that you may release and heal it. These emotional 
blockages are like smears in your astral body. It is often by 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

clearing them that you will have major shifts in your opening of 

What do you do? Regression! ISIS, the Clairvision technique of 
regression, has been designed specifically to solve these problems. 
Otherwise some other techniques dealing with emotions can be 
helpful, such as rebirthing, for instance. 

If it is impossible to have access to any techniques of emotional 
release, then a lot of physical exercise could help. Gardening and 
working on the land are also very pacifying. Yet you should not 
forget that even though physical exercise may make you feel 
better, it does not solve any of the problems. You must go deeper 
and deal with the conflicts of the mind through appropriate 
techniques. Neglecting the work of emotional clearing is probably 
the major reason some people practise a meditation technique or a 
process of spiritual development for sometimes as long as thirty 
years without any real breakthrough. 

10.12 Hearing sounds 

Hearing non-physical sounds is a very normal experience on the 
way. It often starts with a buzzing type of sound inside your head 
and slowly, slowly, gets refined into the harmony of the spheres. 
If there are sounds in your head, just listen to them. They are a 
good focus for maintaining your awareness. The best area to 
position your awareness in order to tune into non-physical sounds 
is behind the area between the eyebrows, in the centre of the 

10.13 When there is no energy, the energy is 
somewhere else! 

Some days the connection with the energy feels intense, and 
experiences flow naturally and easily. Other days there does not 
seem to be any energy at all and it is much more difficult to get 
into the experience. 

It is the nature of energy to vary. For instance around the Full 
Moon the vibration is very intense, whereas just around the New 
Moon it is sometimes hardly perceptible. On the other hand the 
space, the purple space of the third eye, is often easier to reach 
around the New Moon. Many other variations of the energy can be 
observed, some predictable, some not. Maybe one day a reliable 
'meteorology of energy' will be discovered. This should be the 
purpose of a true astrology. 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

For your practice to be successful you need to learn to sense these 
variations and work in harmony with them. For instance if you 
are having one of those days when you are immediately projected 
into the purple space as soon as you close your eyes, there is no 
need to waste your time fighting for clear channel releases, since 
anyway the vibration can hardly be felt. Rather focus on the 
meditation, trying to go into the space as deeply as possible. 
Very often, when nothing seems to be happening in your practice 
it does not mean that there is no energy but that you are looking 
for the energy in the wrong place. Tune in and try to get in touch 
with a higher layer, and you might be astonished by what you 

10.14 After sattva: tamas. To fight tamas- rajas. 

In the Indian tradition, all the developments of the creation are 

analysed in terms of three gunas, or modalities of nature, called 

tamas, rajas and sattva. 

Tamas is related to inertia, opacity and cloudiness, dullness, lack of 

initiative, a feeling of laziness... 

Rajas is activity, movement, desire. When rajas is activated inside 

you, you start running around, chasing the things you want, very 

involved in the pursuits of the world. Too much rajas results in 

agitation and restlessness. 

Sattva generates pure and transparent states of consciousness, 

openness of mind and of perception, receptivity to the light, 

higher awareness. 

Spiritual development can be understood as a gradual unfoldment 

of sattva inside yourself in order to allow it to reflect your 

Higher Self. 

One of the basic laws of interaction of the three gunas is that 

after a big dose of sattva (clarity), tamas (inertia) gets activated. In 

practical terms this means that after an unusually clear experience 

of consciousness it is quite normal to feel inert and unclear for a 

while. Under these tamasic conditions, it will be quite difficult to 

re-enter directly into an inner space of sattva. It will be much 

easier to have a rajas transition first and then to look for your 

sattva again. Practically speaking this means that if you feel inert 

and unreceptive the day after a brilliant awakening, it is better 

not to try to meditate for long periods. It is better to keep 

moving for a while: go out, walk in the countryside, do some 

physical work — and try to remain as aware as possible. Then you 


Chapter 10 - A Few Experiences on the Way 

can start looking for your clarity again. (Another reason for this 
reactional tamas condition is that when you reach a new intensity 
of light, the mud in the depths of yourself may be stirred up and 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

11.1 Tuning in 

Let us begin with a simple exercise. Take a crystal, for instance, 
and another piece of rock found anywhere in the countryside. If 
you do not have a crystal, just take two stones of different 
colours and textures. You also need a flower or a bunch of leaves. 
Sit in a comfortable position and place the objects in front of you. 
Make sure your back is straight. Start gazing at the crystal, or one 
of the stones. 
Implement the triple process of vision: 

1) Become aware between the eyebrows. Remain very motionless. 
Blink as little as possible. 

2) Instead of looking at any of the details of the image in front of 
you, become aware of the fact of seeing — what we have called 
'seeingness'. If this is not possible, simply try to feel the image in 
front of you instead of looking at it. 

3) Feel the object from your heart. Receive the object in your 
heart, through the eye. 

Remain with the first object for 2 or 3 minutes. Then apply the 

same process to the second stone, for two minutes or more. 

Proceed in the same way with the third object. 

It will become clear that you get quite different feelings from 

each of the stones, and from the leaves and flowers. Of course 

these objects have different qualities of vibration. But you also 

become different when you open to one or the other. Each object 

makes you vibrate at a distinct frequency. The more sensitive you 

become, the clearer the inner contrast when tuning into objects or 


'Tuning in' is the capacity to resonate in harmony with an object, 

an animal, a person. 'Tuning in' bypasses the ordinary mental 

consciousness. It is a direct mode of knowledge and experience 

which differs from the ordinary mind in many ways. 

A key point is that whenever you look at an object from the 

mind, the mind 'kills' it. The object is teeming with energy and 

vibrations, it has a life of its own. Several laws of nature are active 

inside it. And what do you get in your head? A dead replica, which 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

could be called a mental postcard. The essence of the information 
has been lost. 

When you 'tune into' an object, the very opposite takes place. You 
let the qualities of the object become alive inside you. It is no 
longer a postcard that you receive, it is a living feeling. 
Repeat the exercise on various colours. Implement the triple 
process of vision on walls, clothes, objects, of different hues. Each 
time, try to 'tune into' the colour. Open to it. Let the qualities of 
the colour become alive inside you. 

The result is magic. Different colours move you in different 
directions, generating a whole range of effects inside yourself. 
Colours and lights start to feed you: the blue of the sky, for 
instance, or the light from the stars, or even the yellow of a T- 
shirt... You can literally 'drink' the colours and their energies. You 
derive forces from them that strengthen your soul. This allows 
you to understand why little children, who are not yet living 
inside the frame of the mind, can be so fascinated by colours and 

Another key distinction between the mental way of perceiving, 
and 'tuning in', is that the former is based on separation, while 
the latter is a process of unity. When you receive a mental image 
from an object or a person, there is no true connection between 
the object and the image. But when you 'tune into' an object, you 
become the object. 

For instance, if the cat is trying to confuse you as to whether you 
have already given it dinner or not, you tune into the cat, and you 
become the cat. And then you can feel all that the cat feels. You 
can perceive the world as seen by the cat, with completely 
different sensory inputs. You sense the cat instinct flowing 
through you, you know exactly how it is to be a cat. And you can 
also feel whether your cat's stomach is full or empty! 
It is a knowledge through identity, a most fascinating process. It 
gives you a deep intuitive understanding of the nature of objects 
and beings. You penetrate their logic from inside, because you 
become what they are. 

'Tuning in' gives you access to a new and rich range of feelings and 
sensations. You discover a palette of inner experiences that your 
mind did not even suspect could exist. You become vast. Through 
the art of 'tuning in' many simple things of life, such as looking 
at the stars, swimming in the ocean, feeding the cat, become 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

absolutely fascinating. You participate in the life of the universe, 
instead of perceiving it like a series of postcards. 
For example, in one of the retreat centres of our school in the 
tablelands of New South Wales, an eagle used to come and watch us 
when we were working outside. When you tuned into the eagle, 
the eagle would stop 20 metres above your head and gaze at you. It 
was a complete standstill, a moment of truth. If you raised your 
arms towards the eagle and started turning slowly, the eagle would 
turn with you. Slowly, as if it was suspended in the air, the eagle 
followed you in a motionless dance. Then, if you 'became' the eagle, 
it was an inner explosion. There are simply no words to describe 
that. People who have never experienced anything of the kind may 
be clever and successful, nevertheless they live in nothing other 
than a cage. 

11.2 Drinking colours 

Implement the triple process of vision (motionless focus in the 
eye, seeingness, feeling from the heart) and tune into various 
colours. Any object or plant can be used, or even walls... If tuning 
into clothes, it is better if they are new enough so their colours 
are still fresh. 

Tune into the colour. Do not pay any attention to the nature of 
the object itself. Tune into the colour and nothing else, as if you 
were drinking it. Let its energy flow into your being. Resonate 
with it. Do not only look at it or even see it: become the colour. 
Repeat the exercise on different colours and see how you become 
different, from one to the other. Let yourself become fluid under 
the influence of the colour. Let it take over. Let it invade your 


• Why not apply this perception of the spirit of colours to 
reconsider the way you choose your clothes and how you dress? 

• No physical colour on Earth is as pure as those coming from the 
stars. Stargazing with an open eye is a unique experience, and leads 
to the most surprising and enlightening visions. 

Learn to recognize the stars with a manual for stargazers, and tune 
into them. You will soon discover that the energies they carry 
vary greatly from one to another. A golden star like Arcturus 
(Alpha Bootes), for instance, awakens a fullness in the heart and 
warms your Spirit. Some others, such as Algol or Rasalhague, are 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

to stars what orchids are to flowers: their beauty is sometimes 


Stars, especially when seen with our triple process of vision, will 

prove an inexhaustible source of inspiration and centring. 

Interestingly, seers of various traditions have perceived 

constellations as the dwelling place of the highest spiritual beings. 

11.3 Flowers, plants and elemental beings 

Let us take the example of a flower to describe some of the basic 
mechanisms of subtle perception. 

Looking at a flower the mind perceives a shape, some colours, a 
perfume. But what will you perceive if you tune into the flower? 
You will get a feeling related to the nature of the flower, to its 
quality of vibration. For instance, it is obvious that a rose, a 
sunflower and an orchid communicate quite different feelings 
when you open to them. Many people have a natural, intuitive 
understanding of the nature of plants. 

However, tuning in is more than a vague sensitivity; it is a 
metaphysical opening. When you tune in, your whole body of 
energy starts to resonate with the plant. You can feel streams of 
light rushing all around you. It's like entering another dimension. 
The plant becomes alive in you. With this inner explosion comes a 
knowingness, like a package of information in which all the 
properties of the plant are included. The plant inspires you with a 
sense of how to use it. 

Let us describe this in other words. The physical image and the 
physical smell are like a husk. By implementing the triple process 
of vision (motionless focus in the eye, seeingness, feeling from the 
heart), you perceive a variety of non-physical colours, smells and 
tastes — what we could call the aura of the plant, its non-physical 

If you go beyond this, you come to see something quite surprising: 
a being. You can actually see a little being which is like the essence 
of the plant, and which some western occultists have called the 
deva of the plant, from a Sanskrit word meaning deity. You 
realize that the aura of the plant, its colours and other subtle 
qualities, are like the garment of the little nature being. All the 
subtle and physical properties of the plant are nothing but the 
consequences of the nature of this being. One could say that the 
being unfolds its personality through the appearance of the plant: 
its colours, its smells, its medicinal properties. And this being has 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

a life of its own, you can talk and exchange with it... 
If you want to have a chance to understand any of your non- 
physical perceptions, I suggest you spend some time meditating on 
the following principle: 

Whenever there is a vibration, there is a being behind it. 
The vibration is like the garment of the being. It is its external 
appearance. And anything that can be perceived in the vibration is 
simply the external manifestation of the being. Therefore as long 
as you have not contacted the being, you are missing the essence 
of the object: you are only perceiving consequences. 
This principle is universal and does not only apply to plants and 
other living organisms. For instance, when tuning into the colour 
of a wall you first receive its living energy, meaning the 
vibration. But if you go beyond this, what can you see? Behind the 
vibration of the colour, a multitude of little elemental beings can 
be perceived. This is not easy because elementals are tricky, they 
hide all the time. You need a very silent and steady state of 
consciousness to be able to behold them with your eye. (All this 
makes you wonder exactly what is contained inside a can of paint.) 
The same applies to fire, air, wind and water: behind the vibration 
and the aura of substances, elemental beings can be perceived. But 
they are not the ones I would advise you to start with when 
exerting your talents of clairvoyance, for they are extremely shy, 
and clever at not being seen. 

11.4 Fighting mental rigidity 

To be able to open and tune into an object you need to come from a 
space of love. Empathy is a key to allow the qualities of the object 
or the person to 'become alive' inside you. 

You also need a certain degree of opening and flexibility. If you 
are too rigid you will never be able to vibrate with things that are 
not like yourself. The part of yourself that is made of 
conditioning and operates only through reactions, the manas-mind, 
is like a cage. You live in your mind as you would live in a cage, 
always confined to the same range of thoughts, emotions, 
reactions. It is as if you were seeing the world through tinted 
glasses, and therefore made only of blue-green, green, and yellow- 
green, for instance. 'Tuning in' is given as a way to break the 
mental cage and to start 'being' on an expanded spectrum of 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

Of course, it is only when you get out of a cage that you realize it 
was a cage. If you have always been living in a cage, then to you it 
is not a cage, it is the whole universe. Tuning in allows you to 
break limits, by introducing unsuspected patterns of being into 
your consciousness. The light that comes from certain stars, for 
instance, allows you to vibrate on very strange frequencies, unlike 
anything you may experience on Earth. But you certainly do not 
have to go that far to explode the limits of your cage. If you could 
simply become your cat or your pot plant, even only for a few 
seconds, that would already represent an extraordinary 

Another quality that is needed for the art of tuning in and is 
developed by its practice, is the capacity to forget about your 
little self for a while. If you remain too much like your cage, then 
there is no space left for anything else. You have to wipe away 
your surface personality for a moment. You have to cultivate an 
extreme inner stillness, a complete absence of reaction. You have to 
become empty, to make an abstraction of anything personal. This 
gives a refreshing break, and a sense of relativity as far as your 
own little problems are concerned. 

In relation to your Ego, or Higher Self, something paradoxical is 
experienced. 'Tuning in' does not veil your Ego, it reveals it. It is 
by being more your Self that you can 'become' an object. The part 
of yourself that is able to vibrate in harmony with anything in 
the universe is the Self, precisely because It is universal. So by 
'becoming' something other than yourself, you lose the little self, 
and therefore you reveal the true Self. By perceiving the world 
you uncover the Self, and that is exactly what clairvision is all 

This is nothing like a vague feeling or an intellectual view. It is a 
hyper-dense frequency of being. It is a more objective experience 
than having your hand in a fire. By tuning into an object, and 
becoming the object, you become your Self. You are your Self, ten 
thousand times more than when you think of the object with your 
mind. Whenever you think of the object, you are not your Self, 
you have become assimilated with the cage. 

The time has come to reverse the classic adage of French 
philosopher Descartes: cogito ergo sum, "I think, therefore I am." 
What higher vision reveals is exactly the opposite: "I think, 
therefore I am not." It is by stopping the mind that you can step 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

out of the cage, and say, "I think not, therefore I am." The 
Clairvision style of work invites you to use perception to reach 
that stage. 

11.5 Trees 

Let us resume our practical exercises, this time focussing on trees. 
There is a lot of wisdom stored in trees, hence the veneration in 
which they were held by Celtic schools of initiation, for instance. 
It is significant that the Buddhist tradition insists so much on the 
fact that Shakyamuni Buddha reached his enlightenment under a 
tree, a ficus religiosa in Bodhgaya. In Australia we have a 
surprising tree of the same family called the Moreton Bay Fig 
(ficus macrophylla), which looks a bit like a banyan. It is a huge, 
magnificent tree, always ready to advise you. If you can find a 
tree of equivalent energy, it is a blessing. Whenever you have to 
undergo a big inner shift you can sit under the tree and meditate. 
And the tree will help. 

11.6 Practice 

Tuning in is an ability that develops gradually. In the beginning 
you are 10% tuned into the object, meaning that you just get a 
certain feeling. It is then a question of intensifying the connection 
and of wiping out your surface personality through a total inner 
silence and stillness. You let the qualities of the object become alive 
in you until you reach the stage where you actually become the 

In order to develop your capacity to tune in, I recommend that 
you practise on various species of trees. Tune in, and learn to 
vibrate with them. You will discover that different trees have 
completely different energies. Here are a few suggestions on how 
to discover the properties and qualities of trees. Our method will 
be to explore your own feeling as you tune into trees. 
When you tune into the tree: 

— Does your energy tend to expand, or does it feel contained? 

— Does the tree give you a feeling of softness, or of tough 

— Are you getting a yang feeling (active, etc.) or more of a yin 
one (receptive, etc.)? 

— Is the energy of the tree more akin to the earth, water, air, or 
fire element? 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

— Does the energy of the tree resonate more with your belly, 
your chest, your throat, or your head? (When trying to cognize 
the properties of any plant or substance, it is always a good idea to 
sense which chakra it resonates with.) 

— Do you get the feeling of being protected, when tuning into the 
tree? Some trees can envelop you inside their branches as an angel 
would take you in his wings. 

— Try to sense what is the specialty of this tree. What could it be 
good for from a medicinal point of view? 

Go on practising from one tree to another. 


• Trees are really good when you are learning to tune in, for they 
have a generous nature. They enjoy communicating their energy. I 
have seen several people who had a great opening of perception 
when tuning into a tree. Some trees literally talk to you. When 
you become more perceptive it is not rare that you walk past a 
tree and you simply have to stop, because the tree is calling you. 
Don't hesitate to hug trees! 

• Remember practice 8.12: if you have a sorrow or a perverse 
energy you can't get rid of, hug a tree for long enough, and ask 
the tree to take it. The results might astonish you. (The energy is 
nowhere as noxious to the tree as it is to you.) As your capacity to 
tune in develops, you will be able to implement this exercise with 
greater intensity. 

• There is a beautiful custom, which is to plant a tree when a 
child is born. (Bury the placenta in the earth next to the tree.) 
Thus the child and the tree will have similar astrological charts. Of 
course, it is not very easy to plant the tree just at the moment of 
delivery (even though that would be a rather amusing enterprise). 
So you can proceed like this: note down the minute the child's head 
comes out and get somebody to plant the tree the day after, at 
exactly the same time. Apart from the Moon, the celestial bodies 
do not move much in a day, and 24 hours later they have almost 
exactly the same position in the houses as they had the day before. 
Another very good time to plant a tree is on the New Moon that 
precedes the birth. If the child has not arrived at the Full Moon, 
then plant another. These two trees, the New and Full Moon ones, 
will have a particular significance to the child. 

Choose a good tree, on which the child and later on the adult will 
be able to mirror him/herself. 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 
11.7 Sexually-related feelings 

People often say that they can never fully know what their 
boyfriend or girlfriend feels or thinks, just because they are 
different sexes, as if a woman could never know in herself what a 
man experiences, and vice versa. 

Actually there is nothing more false. Through the art of tuning in 
you gain the possibility of going through the whole range of 
sensations and feelings pertaining to the other sex. For instance, a 
man comes to know in his own body how it feels to have breasts, 
to have a uterus, to menstruate, to be pregnant... By this I do not 
mean some sort of theoretical or intellectual understanding, but 
the real and direct experience of the feeling, exactly as if he was 
inside a female body. This also applies to a vast range of emotional 

This process can virtually be regarded as an initiation. Once 
achieved, the way of relating to the other sex will change 
dramatically: much less complicated and based on a true 
understanding. Various psychological problems connected with 
relating to the other sex (and that usually covers quite a few 
problems) will automatically disappear. 

At this stage, it may be of interest to mention a fact about the 
etheric body (layer of life force, or prana in Sanskrit, qi in 
Chinese). Esotericists such as Steiner have often pointed out that 
the etheric body of a woman is male, that of a man is female. This 
creates an inner substratum which greatly facilitates access to the 
feelings of the other sex. 

With the expansion of perception a human being tends to be seen 
not so much as a woman as opposed to a man, or a man as opposed 
to a woman, but more as a totality made of two polarities. In this 
context, concepts such as the war of the sexes lose a lot of their 
significance. We all have a man and a woman inside, and both must 
be brought to enlightenment. 

Yet it would be quite untrue to believe that the result is a being of 
a blended or asexual gender. On the contrary, the process 
contributes to discerning between the two polarities, and achieving 
one's femininity, for a woman, or one's masculinity, for a man. 
Realizing her male pole helps a woman's femininity to flourish. 
When a man is out of touch with his female pole, his masculinity 
is a gross facade, much more fragile than his chauvinistic attitude 
may imply. 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

In the Indian tradition there is a symbol 

which illustrates this concept: the Siva- 

lihga. The Siva-lihga is an erect phallus, 

and its symbolic significance goes far 

beyond genital connotations. You find it 

on the altars of temples all over India. 

If you take a close look at a Slva-llnga, 

you will notice that the phallus actually 

rests on a yoni, meaning a female 

generative organ. This symbolises that it 

is only on the basis of its opposite polarity that the male force can 

be strongly established. 

11.8 You are what you eat 

There is one field where the art of tuning in will give you 
particularly quick and spectacular results: eating. Tune into the 
foodstuff while it is on your plate and in your mouth, and your 
meal will turn into an unexpectedly intense experience. Some 
vegetables, such as carrot or beetroot, and some fruits, such as 
lemon, are endowed with energies that will literally explode in 
your mouth. Instead of the process being localised only in your 
digestive tract, it is as if your whole body was participating and 
receiving vibrations from the food. As a by-product, you might 
find it easier to reduce your consumption of junk food. 
By tuning into the foodstuff and observing your reactions to it, it 
becomes possible to accurately work out a diet that is right for 
you, without a dogmatic attitude. It also becomes clear that the 
state of consciousness in which you ingest the food may have as 
much influence on your system as the quality of the food itself. 
This dimension seems to be completely missed by most modern 
systems of nutrition. If patients suffering from cancer, allergies 
or parasites go to see a naturopath, they are immediately given 
lists of foods that they should or should not eat. But not much is 
said about the way the food should be eaten. 

Take a group of people eating exactly the same food. Some will end 
up with intestinal parasites and some won't. To the clairvoyant 
eye, it appears that it is sometimes when the mind is 'parasitised' 
that the digestive tract tends to retain parasites. In astrology this 
connection is symbolised by the fact that the sign Virgo and its 
planet Mercury are the rulers of both the mind and the intestines. 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

We have seen how the capacity to tune in is directly opposed to 
mental rigidity. The more fixed the mind is in stereotypes, the 
more difficult it is have access to a variegated range of feelings. 
Actually there is an interesting connection between the state of 
mind in which you eat and your level of mental flexibility: 
depending on how you eat, the rigidity builds up or diminishes. 
Each time food is swallowed with poor awareness and no perception 
of its energetic qualities, the rigidity of the mind is significantly 

In other words, when you eat from the mind, you feed the mind! 
A mental stamp is imprinted onto the food, and your whole 
structure becomes more mental. Seen from the eye, it appears that 
one of the main tricks the mind uses to maintain its hegemony is 
to make you eat without awareness. 

On the other hand, by resonating in harmony with the foodstuff 
you develop the pliability of your mental substance, and your 
general capacity to tune in is greatly enhanced. To the common 
statement 'the body is made of what you eat', one may add 
another: 'and the mind is made of how you eat it'. Of course, many 
other factors apart from nutrition play a role in the economy of 
the mental layer. But still, one can have a major action on the 
dynamics of the mind by carefully regulating food intake and the 
state of consciousness during meals. That is why Gandhi used to 
say: "When the sense of taste is under control, all the senses are 
under control." 

Another factor that can positively influence the process of inner 
alchemy is a fairly strict regularity of meal times. The astral body 
is intensely involved in the process of digestion. By following a 
fairly strict routine of meal times, you make the astral body work 
at regular times, and this imprints a sense of rhythm. 
Rhythm is exactly what the astral body lacks. The astral body is 
the layer in which emotions take place. Now, take some basic 
rhythmical activities of the physical body, such as the heart beat 
and the breath. As soon as you experience an emotion, the 
frequency of both become irregular! Presently, our astral body is 
the enemy of rhythm: any big wave in the astral body tends to 
impair the cadences of the physical body. As far as rhythm is 
concerned, the entire education of the astral body is yet to be 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

Hence the value of eating meals every day at the same time, and 
avoiding eating between meals. The benefits will not only be 
physical, but also psychological. By imprinting a sense of rhythm 
in the astral body you reinforce its whole structure, which will 
result in increased emotional stability, mental clarity, endurance 
and tenacity. A certain force of soul is fostered, which facilitates 
your connection with higher worlds. 

Apart from this spiritual perspective, regularity of meals should 
be given as a basic recommendation to patients suffering from 
various disorders such as cancer, asthma, allergies, parasite 
infestation, etc. If you can be clever enough to get children to 
adopt a certain regularity of meal times, you help them to 
structure themselves and develop harmoniously. 
In terms of the rhythms of the body, there is a modern invention 
that proves to be a disaster: daylight-saving time (DLS). 
Throughout the world farmers have noticed that DLS has an 
upsetting effect on cattle. Behind this observation there are 
profound mechanisms related to subtle bodies. Animals have an 
etheric and an astral body. When the rhythm of their life is 
disturbed, various problems occur. The result is reduced 
productivity, which is immediately noticed by farmers. 
It would be foolish to believe that the human body does not suffer 
from this interruption to natural rhythms which occurs twice a 
year. The number of severe diseases and the general wearing out of 
the body influenced by DLS is probably far greater than we think. 
It is to be hoped that more concern will arise over this problem 
and that more researchers will conduct studies on its effects. 

11.9 A few suggestions on how to communicate with 

Let us finish this chapter with how the art of tuning in can be 
applied to communication with higher spiritual beings. During 
meditation, a common experience is to see non-physical lights and 
colours. As soon as your third eye opens you see many of these 
lights. It may happen that you have reached a stage where you see 
all kinds of lights in your meditation, and you wonder how to go 
further. These lights are very nice and the process gives a certain 
serenity, but what is the next step? That is the moment to 
remember what was discussed earlier in this chapter: whenever 
there is a vibration or a light, there is a being behind it. The 
colours that appear in front of you are like the garment, the 


Chapter 1 1 - The Art of Tuning In 

external appearance of non-physical beings. The next step is 
therefore tuning into the lights in order to discern the presence 
of the beings behind them. 

Another experience that may happen, during meditation or out of 
it, is to feel the presence of an angel or of some high spiritual 
being around you. This experience is not uncommon after a big 
(and sincere) emotional release while practising the Clairvision 
techniques of regression. It gives the feeling of the descent of a 
supremely peaceful energy that surrounds you and sheds light on 
your whole being. 

What to do with an angel? There is the sense that the moment is 
precious, and that if one does not display the right receptivity, a 
great deal of the experience may be lost. Some people tend to try 
and engage in dialogue with the angel, to ask all sorts of questions 
or even to channel the angel, to let the angel speak through them 
and answer other people's questions. The problem with this attitude 
is that it tries to establish a mental communication with a being 
that comes from far beyond the mind. It is a great waste. This 
beautiful super-conscious presence is close to you, and you limit it 
with the concepts of your mind. In terms of the example 
developed earlier, it is like trying to make the angel fit into your 

The approach of the Clairvision techniques is different: remain 
extremely still and silent, and tune into the angel. Become the 
angel. Let its glory become alive in you. You will get infinitely 
more out of the moment, because the experience isn't limited by 
any mental filter. On the contrary, it allows some completely new 
patterns of consciousness to be initiated in you. Many dynamic 
activities and operating functions of the Higher Self will be 
triggered, which will slowly mature later on. In terms of your 
own experience, it will give you a glimpse of the states of 
consciousness that come next, and activate the seeds of the 
transformation leading to them. 

This mode of approach based on tuning in is altogether similar to 
that expressed by the ancient Sanskrit saying: 
devam bhutva devam yajnet 
To worship a god, first become the god. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

12.1 The first reflex whenever you hear cancer 

The interest in ley lines originated around the 1930s in Europe, 
mainly Germany and France, in some cities that were small enough 
for their whole population to be treated by only one or two 
medical practitioners. Some physicians were struck by the fact 
that in certain houses, cancer cases arose with unusual frequency. 
The family doctor would treat the grandmother for cancer. The 
grandmother would die. Five years later, the doctor would see her 
daughter come in with the very same cancer. In the meantime the 
daughter would have taken over the grandmother's bed. Or a 
woman would bring her husband in with cancer. The husband 
would die. The woman would remarry and a few years later the 
new husband, sleeping in the same bed and at the same place, 
would get exactly the same cancer as the first one... 
Several similar cases triggered the curiosity of the physicians, who 
decided to seek the help of professional dowsers. The result was 
the discovery of lines of so-called harmful 'earth rays'. Actually, 
nobody really knows what these lines are made of, but it became 
customary to call them earth-ray lines, or sometimes ley lines. As 
no rays have ever been identified in relation to these lines, I will 
avoid the misleading term 'earth-ray line' and refer to them more 
simply as 'earth lines'. 

The intensity of the lines varies from one place to another. The 
essential fact is that whenever the dowsers investigated the house 
of a cancer patient, they would systematically find earth lines of 
noxious intensity, either where the patient's bed was or in a place 
where he/she would spend a lot of time, such as a desk. 
A kind of battle ensued for a few decades in Germany, in which 
many respectable medical authorities tried to disprove the whole 
theory. Studies were conducted on thousands of cases — sometimes 
as many as thirty or fifty thousand cancer patients. And each 
time, the results were so overwhelmingly in favour of the 
existence of these harmful earth lines that the would-be 
detractors turned into the most ardent defenders. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

It should be emphasized that these people were not marginal 
healers, but scientists and professors of medicine, who were 
risking their reputation and career. Their confronting and almost 
unanimous conclusion was: it is very unlikely for cancer to occur, 
unless you have been regularly sleeping or staying on a noxious 
line. Those harmful earth lines were found in the houses of nearly 
99% of the cancer patients. 

In February 1987, it reached the stage where the West German 
Government itself started to invest millions of Deutschmarks in a 
research program to investigate the effects of earth lines on 
living organisms. 

One should certainly not disregard the importance of other factors 
in the genesis of cancer, such as poor diet or emotional stress. A 
disease, and especially such a serious disease as cancer, is always the 
result of a combination of causes. Yet the statistics of the German 
scientists are such that whenever we hear 'cancer', our first reflex 
should be: Dowse for the lines! And then move the bed, or maybe 
even move house, depending on what is found. Removing the 
patient from the noxious line is not enough to cure the disorder, 
yet it seems to be an important factor in improving the patient's 
chances of healing. 

Harmful earth lines have also been incriminated in other 
pathological processes such as cot-death, joint problems, migraine 
headaches, heart conditions, varicose veins, bed-wetting and several 

A common reaction when sleeping on a toxic line is to have bad 
dreams, insomnia or difficult nights resulting in fatigue. The 
feeling of being more tired in the morning than before going to 
bed is often described by patients. Very typical, for instance, is 
the case of a child who is found every morning upside down in 
bed, unconsciously trying to escape from the line. 

12.2 Commonly observed facts about the lines 

• The lines make a grid all over the surface of the earth — the 
Hartmann grid. In this grid, the lines are about 2.5 metres apart, 
though this varies slightly from one place to another. 

• The lines are not confined to the surface of the Earth. If a line 
is found on the ground floor of a house, the very same line will be 
found at the same place on each floor above it. 

• The lines of the grid are sometimes heavily noxious, sometimes 
much lighter and not so toxic. Yet it is never advisable to sleep or 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

sit on a line. 

• The crossings of lines are particularly noxious. 

• In the vicinity of a geological fault, the (toxic) intensity of the 
lines is reinforced. 

• An underground creek creates a particularly noxious extra line, 
in addition to the grid. It also makes all the other lines around it 
more toxic. The more intense the flow of water, the more noxious 
the line. 

• Water pipes, in a house or below it, act like small underground 

• Electric cables create additional lines. 

• When a house is built like a Faraday cage, with metal and electric 
wires everywhere, the lines are reinforced and extra lines are 
added. This makes skyscrapers an ecological disaster. 

• The strength and width of the lines are: 

— reinforced during storms and stormy weather 

— multiplied by two between 1 a.m. and 2 a.m. 

— multiplied by three on the Full Moon. 

• Most living organisms get sick when located on the lines: plants 
die, trees get cancerous growths, all rotting processes are 
favoured. The crossings of lines are therefore very good places to 
put your compost heap — but not your bed. 

• On the other hand, certain plants and animals seem to thrive on 
the lines. This happens more than any other with the oak, the 
sacred tree of the Druids. Most huge old oak trees are found on 
strong lines. Other 'line seekers' among the trees are willows, 
ashes, firs... Among other plants: mistletoe, mushrooms, 

Ants love the lines, which fits well with their function as cleaners 

of all that is rotting in nature. Ant heaps are usually found on a 

heavy line. This should make you cautious whenever there is an 

ant-heap close to your house. 

Unlike dogs, cats are said to seek the lines. So, traditionally the 

place favoured by your cat is not a good place for you. Yet from 

my experience today's cats are more after cushions than earth 

lines. So if your cat goes straight onto your pillow each time you 

find a new place for your bed, don't panic. 

Beetles and termites are also attracted to the lines. So are parasites 

and microbes (hence the rotting processes). 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

12.3 Ley lines and earth lines 

Strictly speaking, a distinction must be made between ley lines and 
earth lines. The earth lines make roughly a square grid that we 
have just described. They are the ones that have been incriminated 
in the genesis of cancer and several other diseases. These earth 
lines, which many people call earth-ray lines, are sometimes also 
referred to as the Hartmann network or the Hartmann grid. 
The ley lines, on the other hand, are also lines of telluric energy, 
but of a different nature. They do not make a square grid and 
there is much more distance between them: ley lines are 
sometimes up to hundreds of kilometres apart. Ley lines are not 
noxious to health. They are more like lines of spiritual intensity 
all over the planet. Holy places such as Glastonbury or the 
cathedral of Chartres for instance, are said to be located on ley 

Yet in practice, many dowsers tend to use the same term, ley line, 
for both the ley lines and the earth lines. 

In this chapter, we will deal with the earth lines of the Hartmann 
network, as they are found everywhere and concern everybody. It 
should be understood that there also exist other grids of telluric 
lines apart from these; but to simplify things we will not concern 
ourselves with them in the beginning. 

12.4 What are these lines? 

Nobody really knows the exact nature of these lines. The term 

'earth rays' is misleading: even though the whole phenomenon 

appears like a kind of telluric radiation, no actual 'rays' have ever 

been identified. 

On the level of clairvoyance these earth lines do not appear like 

lines, but like walls. This could also be deduced from the fact that 

a line found on the ground floor of a building will be detected at 

the same place on each floor above it. 

From the third eye, these walls can be seen as a kind of smoky 

energy. The more toxic a line is, the more smoggy, dense and 

thick the smoky energy appears to be. For instance, in stormy 

weather or around the Full Moon the walls appear significantly 

wider and murkier. 

The more toxic a line is, the more it gives a nauseous feeling when 

tuning into it. 

The lines, and especially the most noxious ones, seem to 

concentrate negative energies. This effect is maximum at the 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

crossing of lines. In other words, the lines act like garbage cans 
and gather all the 'etheric dirt' of a room. 

Those houses that seem to have bad vibrations and make most 
people feel uncomfortable are usually built on a grid of noxious 
lines. When an entity, or non-physical parasite, is found in a 
room, it is nearly always on a crossing of lines. 

12.5 Energy wells 

Whenever there is a dragon, there is a princess! Energy wells are 
the positive counterpart of the harmful earth lines. Energy wells 
are more mysterious, and certainly not as well documented as the 

If you have read the adventures of Carlos Castaneda, you probably 
remember how Don Tuan made him look for 'his spot' in a room, 
the place where he could be protected and safe. That is an energy 
well. Energy wells are spots endowed with healing properties and 
also with spiritual properties. They are places where it is easier to 
pray or meditate and to connect with spiritual worlds. When an 
angel wants to shed his light into a room, an energy well is a good 
place for him to descend. 

On the level of clairvoyance, an energy well looks like a column of 
light, or one could say like a geyser of light (although they are 
not associated with any modification of temperature). Often, the 
diameter of the column varies between 1.5 to 2 feet — possibly 
more if you find a big one. 

Tust as the lines may be classified according to their toxicity, so 
different wells have different sizes, intensities and healing 
potential. But contrary to the lines and their grid, there does not 
seem to be any regular pattern of distribution of the wells — none 
that I know of, anyway. 

12.6 Lines and spiritual practice 

If you want to learn about energy, inside you and around you, you 
certainly have to take great care of the lines, for the grid of a 
place determines its quality of energy, and therefore the quality 
of your own energy whenever you are there. 

There is no such thing as a closed living organism. Even more on 
the level of energy than on the level of matter, you are 
permanently involved in multiple exchanges with your 
environment. To become clairvoyant and to get in touch with your 
Higher Self, a deep transformation of your subtle bodies is needed. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

This alchemy will be fostered or hampered depending on whether 
you put yourself in a position where the grid works for you or 
against you. It is therefore essential to dowse the grid of the place 
where you live and to make sure you are neither sleeping nor 
meditating on a line. 

This rule becomes even more important when you undergo longer 
periods of meditation, for example during a course or a retreat. 
While meditating, your body of energy, or etheric body, opens 
significantly. And therefore the exchanges of energy with your 
environment are enhanced. 

If you meditate while sitting on a line, especially for long periods 
of time, you run a high risk of catching wrong energies and 
damaging yourself. You may well feel uncomfortable and restless. 
These are very common symptoms when you undergo long periods 
of meditation: you certainly do not need to be on a line to feel like 
that. But the agitation will take much greater proportions if you 
are sitting on a line. And if the line is bad, there is virtually no 
limit to the damage you may do to your body. Teachers of 
meditation should be particularly aware of the grid in the room 
where they conduct classes. For students tend to fill up the 
available space, and it is most probable that some of them will end 
up sitting in the wrong place. 

We are introducing a concept that is not so widespread nowadays, 
even though in the past many traditional cultures were familiar 
with it: the results of spiritual practice depend on the place where 
the practice is implemented. This does not only apply to the 
general area, or to the building. Inside one room, different places 
may induce completely different experiences. Finding the place 
that is right for you is just as important as finding the right 
technique or teaching. 

The same applies to healing and therapy in general. If you put 
your massage or acupuncture table on an energy well, your results 
will be ten times better than otherwise. It will be much easier for 
an invisible helper to come and give you a hand. The well will do 
half the work for you, if not more. But if you practise something 
like acupuncture, regression or rebirthing on a toxic line, you may 
well end up making your clients worse with your treatment. 
Finding the lines is extremely simple! In the trainings of the 
Clairvision School at least 80% of students manage to find them 
the first time they try, provided they have followed — just 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

followed, not even mastered — the preliminary techniques of 
opening the third eye, as indicated in this book. 

12.7 Dowsing the lines: the gear 

You will need two L-shaped rods and two ball-point pens. 
The rods are made of thick wire. The longer side of the L is 
approximately 40 centimetres (400 millimetres) or 15 inches. The 
shorter side is about 12 centimetres (120 millimetres), or 4.5 
inches. A few millimetres either way won't make any difference. 
An excellent way of making rods is to get wire coat-hangers and 
to cut them as indicated above. If wire coat-hangers are not 
available you can use any metal wire, provided it is rigid enough to 
keep its L-shape. 

Then take two cheap ball-point pens. Remove the ink parts and 
keep only the plastic shells. Insert the shorter parts of your L- 
shaped rods inside the shells. This is all you need to dowse. 
IMPORTANT: your rods must be able to rotate freely inside the 
shells, so make sure: 

1) that you have made a sharply bent 90 degree angle between the 
two parts of your rod, and not a progressive curve; 

2) that on each side of the L, the wire is as straight as possible. If 
the shorter side of the rod is bent, even slightly, then unwanted 
friction will hamper the free movement of the rod. 

I suggest that you always leave two rods and shells in the boot of 
your car, so you have them at hand whenever you need to dowse. 

12.8 Learning the eye-belly attitude for dowsing 

Dowsing has to do with an 'eye-belly' awareness. This means being 
aware both in the third eye and in the area below the navel. To 
develop the eye-belly awareness, first practise walking around the 
room keeping a strong awareness of the navel area or, more 
precisely, the energy centre one inch below the navel. You do not 
need to locate the centre precisely, just be aware of the area below 
the navel. Walk 'from the belly'. Imagine you are a cowboy or an 
American policeman, both usually quite good at walking from their 
belly. Or walk like a Japanese master of martial arts. 
The lines are made of an etheric energy that is very close to the 
physical plane. From an experiential point of view, the key word 
for etheric is: vibration. Roughly speaking, whenever you feel a 
vibration, you feel the etheric. Some etheric vibrations are quite 
tiny and subtle, half way between a light and a vibration. Others, 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

like the ones you feel when tuning into the lines are 'denser' and 
more physically tangible. To dowse the lines, you have to be aware 
of the vibration in your belly and not be floating in the light 
somewhere above your head. The more you are in the vibration, 
the closer you are to the perception of the lines. 
Then re-establish eye-centred awareness. Practise a few seconds of 
reconnection: Become aware of the vibration between the 
eyebrows, breathe with the throat friction, and connect the 
friction with the vibration in the eye. 

Keep a tight awareness of the vibration in the eye and remain 
aware of the area below the navel at the same time. You are aware 
of the vibration both the eye and below the navel. Practise walking 
around the room with your eye-belly awareness. You will notice 
that a strong vibration in the eye allows you to be even more in 
your belly. Several techniques of protection, which will be detailed 
in Chapters 18 and 20, will be based on strengthening your energy 
by a tight focus kept simultaneously in the eye and in the belly. 

12.9 Dowsing technique 

Hold one rod in each hand, at about the same height as your navel. 
If you hold the rods as you would hold guns, you have the right 
height and probably the right belly awareness too: once more it's 
not the time to be airy-fairy, but grounded in the vibration. 

A common mistake is to block the rods with your thumbs. The 
rods must be left free to rotate. 

Start walking slowly, like a tiger, with a strong awareness of the 
vibration both in the eye and below the navel. Keep your hands 
steady to avoid any movement of the rods. The rods remain 
pointed in front of you. If they swing, it should be due to the 
signal of a line and not to your own movements while walking. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

Don't block the rods with your thumbs, keep them free. Be 
attuned to any sensation that could come from your belly. Keep 
breathing with the throat friction, walking slowly. 
When you cross a line: 

1) The rods swing and position themselves parallel to the line. So to 
determine the direction of the line, you just have to look at the 
direction pointed to by your rods. It does not make any difference 
whether the rods rotate to the right or the left, or one to each 

2) When crossing a line, just a fraction of a second before the rods 
turn, a very 'physical' sensation can be felt in the belly. This is 
what I will call the 'belly signal'. Actually, it is not a very nice 
feeling. The more toxic the line is, the more uncomfortable you 
will feel in your belly. This is a simple way of determining how 
toxic a line is. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

As soon as you get a rough idea of the general orientation of the 
grid, it is preferable to walk in a direction perpendicular to the 
lines. You will then have a clear rotation of the rods each time you 
cross the lines. (If you were to walk nearly parallel to the lines, 
your rods would barely swing at the crucial time of crossing.) A 
good idea is to have a roll of sticky tape with you. Stick some on 
the floor each time you cross a line to remember its location. 
Since the lines make a roughly perpendicular grid, you will most 
often find two groups of lines, the lines of each group being 
parallel to each other. Once you have explored all the parallel lines 
of one group, start walking perpendicular to them, to explore the 
second part of the grid. 

Now, what if you find a line that does not fit with the grid, a line 
that is diagonal, for instance? It indicates that you have located 
something additional to the natural grid, such as an electric cable, 
a water pipe, or even an underground creek. Go (even more) into 
your eye, tune into the line, and try to find out what it is. 
Electric cables usually make moderate lines. Underground water 
creates the type of lines that make you sick when you tune into 
them. Water pipes are somewhere in between the two, depending 
on the volume of water flowing through. 

12.10 Dowsing the lines: do's and don'ts 

• If your rods go on swinging around even before you start 
walking, consider the possibility that you may actually be standing 
on a line! Take one or two steps and try again. 

• Suppose you find a line that is due to a cable, and there is no 
cable under the floor, what can that mean? Possibly the cable is in 
the ceiling! The lines are not only generated above a cable or a 
pipe, but also below them. 

• Do not dowse the lines for too long a period in one day. Unless 
you are very trained, the practice can be exhausting when pursued 
for more than half an hour. There is a simple reason for this: to 
perceive something, you have to tune into it. If you want to dowse 
the lines you have to connect with their energy. Since these lines 
are noxious by nature, one can easily understand why dowsing is a 
tiring sport. 

For this reason, it is not advisable to dowse for lines when you are 
low in energy or depressed. Dowsing is not a good activity for 
pregnant women, or for children. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

• After dowsing the lines, wash your hands in running water for 
a fairly long time, according to the method explained in section 
4.12. A shower would be even better. 

• There are many dowsers' associations, and most of them organize 
field days on the topic of earth lines. It might be a good idea to 
join one of them for one or two Sundays, just to check that your 
dowsing technique is accurate. 

12.11 The belly signal 

In Chapter 1 1 it was discussed how, through the art of tuning in, 
one can learn to let the qualities of an object 'become alive' in one's 
consciousness. To the apprentice clairvoyant, dowsing the lines is 
one of the most striking examples of this process. The lines prove 
to be particularly easy to tune into. And while crossing a line with 
the rods, a tangible effect takes place in the navel area, around the 
manlpura chakra of the Indian tradition. It is a gut feeling, very 
'physical' — unmistakable. The process of dowsing is a clear 
example of how one can tune in, and then feel a modification of 
one's energy in response. 

As a consequence of this tangible effect, students usually have a 
pleasant surprise: they tend to find the lines in the same places, 
even though they may be dowsing for the first time. 
Dowsing earth lines is remarkable in that it is probably the easiest 
of all extra-sensorial perceptions to objectify and reproduce. If 
anybody was to try to demonstrate ESP type of phenomena 
scientifically, I would certainly advise them to work on earth 

About the 'belly signal': it is interesting to note that a certain 
fraction of the population seem unable to dowse — probably about 
10% of the students I see. There seems to be a correlation between 
the inability to dowse and emotional blockages in the abdominal 
area. In other words, these helpless dowsers are systematically 
those with major obstructions of energy in the navel area. When 
these students undergo a regression process, releasing their belly 
blockages, they gain (or rather regain) their capacity to dowse 

12.12 Feeling the lines without rods 

Once you can locate the lines of the grid according to the dowsing 
method indicated above, the next stage is to feel the lines without 
the rods. This is something that will surprise your dowser friends 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

very much. It is quite a comic situation: how can you, who have 
only been dowsing for a few weeks, not only find the lines but 
even find them without rods, when they have been working on 
the subject for years and wouldn't have a clue how to do that? 
Really, it is because your dowsing comes from a systematic 
training of perception and not from an isolated skill. 
With a strong awareness in the eye, it is actually not very 
difficult to sense the lines with your hands, without rods. 
Start walking down the room slowly, your hands in front of you. 
As before, keep a tight awareness of the vibration, both in the eye 
and below the navel. Breathe with the throat friction, to amplify 
the vibration. Tune into the lines from your belly. 
When you walk across a line your hands will feel a slight 
resistance, as if you were meeting something thicker and denser 
than just the air of the room. Sometimes there is also a slight 
vibration added to your hands when you 'touch' a line. Walk back 
one step and come to the line slowly again. Dwell on the feeling, 
learn to recognize it. In fact, it is more appropriate to use the 
word 'wall' rather than line, for what you feel is actually like a 
wall of vibration, a bit like a wall of etheric smoke. 
As always, there is one secret: practise, practise, practise! If you do 
so you will be able to enter a room and immediately tell where the 
lines are and how noxious they are. You won't need any rods. You 
won't even need to walk across the room. 

12.13 Seeing the lines 

Seeing the lines, or rather the walls of smoky energy, is not much 
more difficult than seeing halos of light around people. The 
techniques to use are exactly the same as those we have described 
in the chapters on seeing. 
Implement the triple process of vision: 

1) Motionlessness and focus in the eye, blinking as little as possible. 

2) Don't look for the lines, become aware of the fact of seeing, or 
seeingness. If seeingness is out of reach, just feel the image in 
front of you instead of looking at it. 

3) Try to feel from your heart, and in this case from your belly 
at the same time. If you find it difficult to be in the eye, the 
heart and the belly at the same time, just keep the eye and the 
belly. Look from the belly, through the eye. If this too is 
difficult, focus mainly on the belly centre, one inch below the 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

Tips for beginners 

• The more the people in the room are in their eye, the easier it is 
to see. 

• You will find it easier to see the lines if you try while another 
person is dowsing in the room. 

• From my experience, when a number of beginners all try to 
tune into an object or to see it clairvoyantly at the same time, it 
creates a big cloud of chaotic energy in the room and even trained 
clairvoyants have difficulty discerning anything. It sometimes 
takes a good half hour before anyone can perceive anything again. 
The same applies to earth lines: if too many inexperienced students 
try to see them at the same time, it is likely that after thirty 
seconds absolutely nobody can see anything anymore. 

• Practise seeing the lines around the Full Moon and in the 
evening, when the lines are at their widest. 

12.14 The aura of the dowser 

An interesting practice is to sit quietly, implement the triple 
vision process, and watch the aura of somebody who is dowsing. 
Each time they cross a line you can see a change in the colours and 
the intensity of their aura. Even if you are not seeing colours 
clearly yet, you won't find it too difficult to sense the 
modification that takes place in the person's energy. 
Also try to tune into their belly energy. When they cross a line 
you will be able to sense the 'belly signal' in them. If the line is 
really toxic it can easily make you feel a bit sick even from a 
distance, just by tuning into the dowser's belly. 

12.15 Diagnosing geopathic stress 

As you become a bit more advanced, you may develop an 
interesting skill in diagnosis: feeling the imprint left by lines in 
people. If somebody sleeps for months on a line, it leaves a track 
in their energy. And you can actually feel and see the line's energy 
on them. 

This practice is much less difficult than it sounds. You need to 
have developed a certain feeling for the lines. This means you need 
to know exactly what the energy of a line feels like. Then when 
tuning into someone you look for the same feeling. If they have 
noxious earth lines imprinted in their energy, meaning if they 
suffer from what has been called 'geopathic stress', you will 
recognize the 'line feeling', the same as you get when tuning into 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

the grid. This will give you the capacity to suspect very quickly if 
a disease is due to a toxic line. 

12.16 Finding energy wells 

The subject of energy wells is much more mysterious than that of 
noxious earth lines. Very little has been written about them. 
Finding the wells entails a great understanding of telluric forces, 
but it also requires that you cultivate a certain respect for the 
land, that you value its energies. 

To find energy wells you need two main qualities: respect and 
attunement. It won't be you that finds the wells, it will be the 
land that shows them to you. Maybe. If the land feels you are a 
nice person. 

What is a nice person, from the point of view of the land? You 
arrive at the place with your head full of the mental activity 
generated by modern life, but the land vibrates on quite a 
different frequency. The first step is to become attuned to the 
land, to let yourself vibrate on its frequency. The land is also 
sensitive to your magnetism. It appreciates and respects people of a 
certain density. You have to be steady in your belly and to connect 
your belly energy with the land, anchoring the force of your 
lower chakras in the ground. So before exploring the house itself, 
it is good to spend a few minutes walking around it, to sense the 
energy of the area and to connect with it. 

Once you are in the right inner disposition, how do you find the 
wells? If you have achieved a certain clairvoyance, it is quite 
simple: you just have to look around you. An energy well looks like 
a little fountain of energy, a little 'geyser', a column of light. 
Even if you do not find it easy to see auras yet, practise the triple 
vision process and scan the space of the room from your eye. If 
you are attuned to the energy of the place, an unexpected flash of 
vision may take place. 

Then start walking around the room very slowly, your palms in 
front of you, as if you were trying to sense the lines without 
rods (section 12.12). There is a German word that can't really be 
translated: gemiitlich. It means 'full of feeling', nice and 
comfortable for the soul — and that is exactly what an energy well 
feels like. 

In my experience, energy wells are often found adjacent to an 
earth line (but not on the line). So don't be worried if you find 
one just on the edge of a line, there is nothing wrong with it. 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

The size of energy wells varies. Those we see in Sydney are often 
between one and two feet in diameter, or possibly a bit more. But 
there are aboriginal sites, for instance, where one may find much 
bigger ones. Certain sites are really magic, with energy wells 
everywhere, like fairies' fireworks. Walking on these sites with 
the right consciousness transports you into another dimension of 

Different energy wells have different properties. Some have more 
of an inspirational value, some of healing. You have to tune into 
the being of the well to discover it. But be very gentle, for these 
beings are shy. Look without looking, tune in as if from a 
distance. Otherwise they will conceal their energy and the well 
will remain undetected by your eye. It is only once you have 
gained a certain familiarity with the little being behind the well 
that it will reveal all its secrets to you. 
Everything is yet to be discovered about energy wells! 

12.17 Can one neutralise noxious earth lines? 

Dowsers have made many attempts to neutralise the noxious lines. 
Many devices have been designed, such as copper rods of various 
shapes, lead coils, electromagnetic apparatus, candles, oil lamps, 
mandalas and magic signs under the carpet. After having tested 
many of them, I have come to the conclusion that nothing really 
works. Some devices bring a temporary improvement, but I have 
never seen any that last. After a few weeks or at most a few 
months, the grid recovers its noxious character. 
Maybe the answer is of a different nature. Although some of these 
lines are bad for our health, they are not necessarily bad for the 
Earth. The lines are to the Earth what the acupuncture meridians 
are to our body. Why should we try to block these flows? 
Maybe the solution does not lie in attempting to correct the 
natural grid of the Earth, but in placing our houses on spots that 
are appropriate and favourable to human life. The grid is not 
noxious everywhere: many places have a lovely energy. If you build 
a house just on top of an underground stream, you are assured of 
having a noxious grid all around the house. But if you build the 
same house fifty metres away, there may not be any unfavourable 

In Australia, where telluric energies are particularly strong, I have 
seen a few houses that were built on aboriginal burial grounds or 
on sites that aborigines had traditionally judged unfit for human 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

habitation. In these houses people fell sick and fought all the time, 
went bankrupt, committed suicide... Even the cats, that normally 
have a great time on the lines, hid in the cupboards and had 
nervous breakdowns. Would it be reasonable to start a war against 
the land to clear such a place, or should one consider that no house 
should ever have been built there? 

The real problem is that we are not living in harmony with the 
energies of the Earth. We place our buildings according to mental 
considerations after drawing nice squares on a map. We are 
disconnected from the land: we do not even try to consult it 
before building. And then when the vibes in the house are awful, 
we want technology to come to our rescue to stop the natural 
telluric flows and turn our spooky place into a homely little 

The real answer is to introduce architects and builders to the 
science of telluric lines and wells. And as far as you are concerned, 
to check the grid and the vibrations of a house before moving into 

Practically, what can you do? Dowse your house in great detail. 
There is always a grid of lines, 2 to 2.5 metres apart. But in many 
cases the grid is not particularly noxious. Still, you need to make 
sure that no line crosses your bed, that you are not meditating on 
a line and that none of the places where you regularly sit is on a 
line. Don't hesitate to move the furniture. 

Then the second stage is to start hunting (gently!) all over the 
house for the energy wells and to explore what you can gain from 
them. All this means that you have to reconsider your habits and 
to start using the space in harmony with the energy of the house. 
If you can be clever enough to design the interior of your house in 
such a way that you meditate, sleep, eat, work... on energy wells, 
then the benefits will be immense as far as your physical, mental 
and spiritual health is concerned. 

What if the grid is noxious, or full of additional lines, or if the 
house has been designed in such a way that wherever you put your 
bed it is on a crossing of lines? My advice is to move. Spiritual 
awakening is a process of opening. It can't happen smoothly in a 
place where the vibrations are toxic. When you undergo deep 
transitions, you need your environment to support you, not to 
work against you. Go and find a place where it is 100% right for 
you to be. This is an important part of the spiritual quest and 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

therefore, if your motivation is right, the universe will support 

12.18 A geography of enlightenment 

If you really want to know about energy, I would suggest you 
apply yourself to perceiving the lines until you reach the point 
when you can know immediately where the lines are as soon as you 
enter a room. It doesn't matter if you can't see them in the 
beginning. But you have to develop your feeling to the point 
where you can open the door, tune in, and sense where the lines 
are without even having to walk through the room. This will 
structure a deep connection with land energies. 
Then when visiting a new place, you will automatically avoid the 
lines and pick the right spot to sit. This will happen 
spontaneously, you won't even have to think about it. You will just 
sit somewhere, and later on realize that you have picked up an 
energy well again. And if for some reason you ever happen to sit 
on a line, you will immediately receive a signal from your belly, 
and you will feel the desire to move. You do not even need to see 
the lines clairvoyantly to reach that stage. It is enough to train 
yourself to feel them systematically. 

As you become more aware of these telluric energies, you will be 
surprised to see that some people keep going straight from one 
line to another, due to some kind of strange magnetism. If there 
is a bad crossing somewhere in your lounge, they walk straight 
there and sit down. If there is a spooky house available in town, 
they rush to rent it. And even if their house is quite sound earth- 
line-wise, they manage to put their bed on the worst crossing 
they can find. In a way, you can say that these people have 
developed a sensitivity to the lines! But they unconsciously use it 
against themselves. These earth line kamikazes would greatly 
benefit from working on their eye and learning to dowse. Yet you 
find that many of them obstinately refuse to try, or even simply 
to acknowledge the existence of the lines. 

This leads you to feel that there is a correspondence between our 
own quality of energy and the places where we sit, be it in our 
own home or even in a restaurant, cinema or friend's place. This 
means that many people unconsciously pick harmful spots to 
perpetuate their energy disorders and imbalances. But it also means 
that by systematically choosing spots of high quality energy we 
can influence our state of health and consciousness positively — 


Chapter 12 - Ley Lines, Earth Lines and Energy Wells 

maybe much more than we think. It also suggests that two people 
may live in the same environment and yet be in two different 
worlds, one by systematically staying on lines, and the other on 
energy wells. 

As we come to the end of this chapter, I have a favour to ask you. 
The knowledge about the lines is quite simple, yet the troubles it 
may save are enormous. Please talk about earth lines. Discuss the 
subject fully with your friends and relatives. Never waste an 
opportunity to make it a subject of conversation. If you are a 
journalist, then write about it or get the subject broadcast on radio 
or TV. If you are a health practitioner, explain the matter to your 
patients. It won't spoil your reputation, due to the vast amount of 
scientific evidence available to back up the phenomenon. It should 
be understood as an act of higher compassion to create as much 
interest as possible in this subject. 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

Dormlens vlglla 

While asleep, stay awake. 

In that which is night to all beings, 
the enlightened one is awake. 
That in which all beings are awake, 
is night to the enlightened one. 
Bhagavad-Glta 2.69 

Night practice is a set of techniques designed to induce a state of 
psychic sleep, and to use your nights for the purpose of self- 
transformation. When performed during the day, night practice is 
a quick and sure way to recover from stress and fatigue. Higher 
stages of night practice deal with conscious astral travelling, for 
which a few preparatory techniques are suggested in the next 

13.1 Critical times 

Where do you go after you die? 

According to the Tibetan and Hindu sciences of dying, the moment 

of death is critical, for it determines the conditions of your 

journey after life. Like attracts like. A resonance is said to take 

place between the contents of your mind at the very moment of 

death and the place to which you will be attracted. A verse of the 

Bhagavad-Glta puts it in these terms: 

yam-yam va 'pi smaran bhavam tyajaty ante kalevaram tam-tam 

evai' ti... 

Whatever object/state someone thinks of at the final moment of 

leaving their body, that and that alone they attain. (8.6) 

There is a story from the Buddhist tradition of a man who had led 

a very virtuous life. As he lay dying his nephew sat by his 

bedside, pretending to grieve but secretly coveting the 

inheritance. The man got very angry when he saw that his 

nephew's grief was fake. The dying can easily read the minds of 

those around them, for they are already half in the astral. His 

anger was enough to propel him straight into a burning hell, 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

where he had to spend some time before his next human 
incarnation. Because the moment of death is so critical, many 
esoteric schools, western and eastern, have developed precise 
methods for leaving the body the right way so one can find one's 
proper direction in the non-physical worlds. 

Let us now look at a daily experience which is no different from 
the adventure of death. Where do you go after you fall asleep? A 
whole range of planes of consciousness are open to you. Some are 
light and refreshing, others are more likely to induce terrible 
nightmares. As far as fatigue recovery and spiritual development 
are concerned, the value of your sleep depends on the quality of 
the planes that your astral body visits during the night. If you 
wander into the wrong places you may well wake up more tired 
than when you fell asleep, or even sick. 

What determines which planes you visit during your sleep? Once 
more, your state of mind when crossing the threshold is essential. 
At the gate of sleep as at the gate of death, a resonance takes place. 
The quality of your consciousness at the very moment of falling 
asleep plays an essential role in determining where you will 
journey during the night. Hence the inestimable value of a time of 
pure and coherent awareness just before falling asleep, which will 
allow your astral body to be drawn towards the 'right place' during 
the journey. Many valuable side effects will result, such as greater 
energy during the day, better resistance to disease, increased 
memory and enhanced creativity. 

You would never treat the moment of your death lightly. The 
parallel between the two experiences is such that the moment of 
falling asleep should be treated with the same importance. 

13.2 Initiatory death and the mystery of the threshold 

Several traditions have emphasized the analogy between death and 
initiation. Even without any occult knowledge, you can convince 
yourself of this correspondence just by observing a dying person. 
There may have been traumas and suffering beforehand, yet when 
the moment of death approaches, the person starts to radiate a 
great serenity. If he has not been sedated with too many drugs 
you can clearly sense that an opening takes place. 
From an esoteric point of view the connection between death and 
initiation is obvious: the initiate is the one who can, while alive, 
become aware of those planes visited by the dead. The initiate can 
see the non-physical planes and travel through them even though 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

he is still incarnated in a physical body. The non-initiate, on the 
other hand, will have to wait until death to discover what is on 
the other side. 

Moreover, when certain 'clicks' occur on the path of initiation, you 
realize that you are accomplishing at that very moment work that 
will be completed by others only at the time of their death. And 
your subtle vision is suddenly boosted. It is like an explosion. You 
know that when the time comes for you to die physically, a great 
deal of the work will already have been done. 

There is nothing grim about this aspect of the initiation process. 
Think of the serenity and opening of the dying person. Once you 
start crossing the thresholds of initiation, a bit of this serenity 
remains with you, always. Even if you are caught in the agitation 
of the world, the soft feeling remains in the background. And 
because you are both dead and alive at the same time, you can start 
to live for good. The Spirit is the source of magnificent paradoxes: 
having gone through a death-like process you become much more 
alive. Before, you were animated and nothing more; now you are 
alive. It is so simple that it becomes extraordinary. 
In a quest for initiation, there is always a search for the 
threshold, the gate that opens your vision to the non-physical 
worlds. But to the clairvoyant eye, it appears that it is not only at 
the time of death that the gateway is crossed. Every day, all 
human beings pass by, missing what the western tradition has 
called the 'guardian of the threshold'. It happens at least twice a 
day (four times, if you have a nap): each time you fall asleep, and 
each time you wake up. But the tragedy is, the guardian of the 
threshold remains unnoticed. It is common to fall asleep and 'fall 
awake' as fast as slipping on ice. You are walking, and suddenly 
before you know it you find yourself on the ground. It happens so 
quickly that you have absolutely no idea what took place in the 
meantime, nor how it took place. This means that twice or even 
four times every day, a fantastic opportunity for self- 
development is lost. 

Thresholds are always essential. The day is yang, the night is yin, 
and what is twilight? Twilight is a time when pairs of opposites 
can be transcended. That is why so many sages and enlightened 
people will tell you that they had their first flash of illumination 
at twilight. 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

The right side of the body is the male, solar side. The left side is 
the female, lunar side. And what about the middle line? It is the 
seat of the serpent-fire of the western tradition, symbolised by 
Hermes' caduceus. This corresponds to the susumna-nadl of 
Kundalini-yoga, the central channel in which the force moves. 
Now, what happens when this central channel opens? You are 
neither solar nor lunar, neither male nor female, neither inside 
nor outside. You transcend the duality of manifestation and you 
get in touch with your eternal Self. We could go on investigating 
several similar pairs of opposite values and find that each time, 
something critical takes place at the borderline between the two. 
One of the purposes of night practice is to explore the dividing 
line between waking and sleeping. Cultivate an interest in this 
threshold, wonder at it! (Wonder is a great spiritual quality, one 
never practises it enough!) It should become a gentle obsession each 
time you are going to sleep: What am I going to get out of 
crossing the threshold this time? The full experience of the 
threshold is one of superconsciousness, but as discussed before it is 
usually missed because you are too quick. So the tactic of night 
practice is to induce a slow transition from waking to sleeping via 
a gradually increasing relaxation. You reach a stage in which you 
are neither awake nor asleep, or rather both at the same time, and 
aware. There you can pursue your quest for the guardian of the 

13.3 Sleep and subtle bodies 

To understand our topic fully, we need to go through a few basic 
points regarding subtle bodies. A human being can be regarded as 
made of four parts: 

1) a physical body (PB) 

2) an etheric body (EB), or layer of life force. This life force is 
identical to what is called prana in Sanskrit, qi in Chinese. The 
etheric body is the same as the prana-maya-kosa, or 'envelope- 
made-of-prana' of the Indian tradition. In terms of inner 
experience, there is a simple reference: whenever you feel a 
vibration or a tingling, something has been activated in your 
etheric body. 

3) an astral body (AB) or layer of mental consciousness. Whenever 
you think or experience emotions, something is taking place in 
your astral body. 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

4) an Ego, or Higher Self. 

The astral body (AB) and the Ego are linked, forming an 'upper 
complex'. The physical body (PB) and the etheric body (EB) are 
linked too, forming a 'lower complex'. Unless you are an initiate, 
the physical and etheric bodies never fully separate as long as you 
are alive. 

The upper complex (AB+Ego) is the seat of your consciousness. 
While you are awake, this upper complex penetrates the lower one 
(PB+EB), a bit like a hand enters a glove. In other words your 
consciousness cognizes the physical world through the physical 
(and etheric) bodies. 

When you fall asleep the upper complex (AB + Ego) becomes 
disinterested in the lower one (PB+EB). It withdraws from it. Seen 
from outside you lose consciousness, meaning you fall asleep. But 
in reality your consciousness is not lost, it is just somewhere else. 
Instead of cognising the physical world, the upper complex 
(AB+Ego) wanders in different astral worlds, or sometimes in the 
higher realms of the Spirit. A vast range of planes can be 
experienced, some beautiful and regenerating, some grey and dull, 
some really noxious. It depends a great deal on the quality of 
consciousness in which you cross the threshold. If you fall asleep 
drunk after eating sausages and watching horror videos, for 
instance, your sleep may not be too refreshing or enlightening 
because you are likely to be attracted to unclear areas of the astral 
sphere. It is part of the process of transformation to find those 
evening activities and foods that allow you to be directed towards 
higher realms at night. 

Around the time of waking up, you become interested in the 
physical world again and the upper complex (AB+Ego) reintegrates 
into the lower one (PB+EB). The hand goes back into the glove. And 
that is another critical time, for if the reconnection does not take 
place properly you are very likely to be in a bad mood all day. You 
can probably recall certain days when everything seemed to go 
wrong, and when you wished you had not woken up till the 
following morning. To a certain extent, this can be avoided by a 
proper management of the moment of waking up. Tust as falling 
asleep is an art, waking up is too. 

What happens at the time of death, in terms of subtle bodies? The 
upper complex (AB+Ego) departs for good. The physical and etheric 
bodies are left to disintegrate. So we find another parallel between 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

death and sleep. In terms of subtle bodies, sleep is a transient 
separation of the astral body and Ego from the physical and 
etheric, while death is a permanent one. 

13.4 Angels and the chiselling of the organs of 

In order to gain a direct vision of the spiritual worlds, some new 
organs have to be built. It is obvious that to be able to perceive the 
physical world we need physical sensory organs and nerves. In the 
same way but on another level, some astral structures are needed 
to perceive non-physical worlds. One of the reasons why most 
human beings are presently blind to anything other than the 
physical reality is that these organs of clairvoyance are lacking. 
They have to be built for vision to open. 

During the day, the astral body is too busy operating inside the 
physical body for the building up of the new organs to take place. 
Our mental consciousness, and therefore our astral body, is 
directed towards the physical world. The astral body gets saturated 
with the physical perceptions it receives from the senses via the 
brain. It is therefore during the night, when the astral body 
withdraws into a life of its own, that the new instruments of 
perception can be chiselled. 

Now, who chisels? This is a key question! If you can answer it, not 
intellectually, but through direct experience, a good part of the 
work is done. As the process of initiation unfolds, you realize that 
the carving of the astral organs of clairvoyance requires the 
collaboration of non-physical guides and higher spiritual beings, 
such as different categories of angels. These beings express 
themselves creatively in us, planting new seeds and forming new 
structures. They are trying their best to help. But the problem is 
that it is not always possible for them to approach us. 
This tragedy is quite common. There are many people who seem to 
be desperate for spiritual progress. They go on crying, "I wish God 
could help me, if only God could help me..." And if you look just 
above them, what can you see? Guides and angels who keep on 
whispering, "Please tune into us, please receive our light!" Instead 
of lamenting, if these people could tune in, they would 
immediately receive a shower of spiritual gifts. 
What are the conditions that allow these higher beings to conduct 
their creative chiselling work on us? First: perception, of course! 
If you can perceive the angels' action, then just by tuning into 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

their energy consciously you will greatly facilitate the process. 
Apart from this it is valuable to cultivate a certain aspiration, to 
pray for their help. Guides and angels have a certain code of 
ethics: they have a great respect for the free will of human 
beings. It is therefore much easier for them to help if you ask 
them first. Now be careful, because mental prayers usually don't 
reach very far in heaven. In fact, the less mental your prayers are 
and the more they are accompanied by true perception, the better 
they work. 

Apart from your receptivity, some other factors play a part. 
Angels live in very pure spheres, and some physical environments 
are simply not fit for them to connect with. If the place is too 
dirty or messy, if the vibrations are too heavy, if there have been 
people drinking alcohol or fighting, or if the place is full of the 
smell of tobacco, then to the angel it is a suffocating space. The 
angel cannot approach or connect with you. 

Have a good look at your room and ask yourself: Would an angel 
come down here? And then take measures to improve the situation. 
(This approach makes cleaning much more interesting!) 
There is an art of weaving good vibrations in a room that greatly 
facilitates the connection with higher spheres. 

Even more important than your environment, is... yourself! If 
your vibrations are not right, or if you are too agitated, the 
angels cannot do their work. All the thoughts, words and actions 
of the day weave a web of vibrations inside you, which determines 
to a great extent how deep the light of the angel can penetrate. 
But once more, the moment of falling asleep is critical. It can have 
an even greater influence than all the activities of the day, just as 
in the story of the virtuous man who became angry at the 
moment of leaving his body. So, we come to another reason why a 
time of coherent consciousness before falling asleep can have very 
positive consequences. Through night practice you can leave your 
subtle bodies in a condition that allows higher spiritual beings to 
come and help. The practice indicated in the following chapter 
(phases 4 and 6, in particular) operates a rearrangement and a 
powerful withdrawal of the senses from their objects of 
perception. This creates an internalization of the astral senses, 
very favourable to their development during the night. 

13.5 Night practice and the etheric body 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

Let us now deal with the relationship between the etheric body, 
layer of life force or prana, and the astral body, layer of mental 
consciousness and emotions. 

Some people tend to imagine the etheric body as a 1 or 2 inch layer 
outside the limits of the physical body. Such a layer can actually 
be seen, but this picture is inaccurate. For the etheric is not only 
outside but also inside the tissues of the physical body. Imagine a 
sponge (the physical body) permeated with water (the etheric 
body). The sponge has water inside it, and there is also a layer of 
water around it. 

Something similar can be observed with the astral body, on 
another level. The astral body permeates the etheric body, and 
extends beyond it. 

But the astral body does not always penetrate the etheric with the 
same intensity. Sometimes the hand is completely in the glove, 
sometimes it is only half inside. Or to take another example, 
imagine a mist (the astral body), and a valley (the etheric body). 
Sometimes the mist is condensed into the valley like a thick fog — 
that's when you are fully awake. Sometimes the mist is floating 
over the valley like a cloud — that's when you are sound asleep, 
dreaming and/or astral travelling. Several intermediate stages can 
be observed between these two extremes. Of course this is nothing 
more than a metaphor and should not be taken too literally. 
What are the consequences for the etheric and physical bodies 
when the astral body comes closer or moves away? Let's look at the 
physical body first. The general action of the astral body is to 
make everything contract. Take a strong emotion, such as anger or 
fear. A disorganised wave arises in the astral body, and you start 
to feel angry or anxious. Immediately a chain reaction of tension is 
generated in the physical body. Your eyelids contract, there is 
tension in your solar plexus and in your abdominal muscles, your 
heart starts to beat (meaning to contract) more quickly, and so on. 
The more the astral body grasps the physical body, the more the 
physical body gets contracted and cramped. 

On the other hand, what happens to the physical body when the 
astral body withdraws, as during sleep or deep states of relaxation? 
The physical body relaxes, it lets go of tension. 

Now, how does the etheric body react when the astral body moves 
in or out of the lower complex (PB+EB)? When the astral body is 
more impacted into the lower complex, and therefore into the 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

etheric body, a contraction process takes place on the etheric level 
as well as on the physical. The etheric body becomes compacted, 
compressed, denser, more 'opaque' and closed to external 

On the other hand, when the astral body withdraws from the 
lower complex, and therefore from the etheric body, the opposite 
can be observed. The etheric body expands. It becomes more spread, 
sparse and open. This is more than a simple relaxation, for etheric 
matter is far from being as inflexible as physical matter; it is 
much more malleable and fluid. Therefore, it is a real dilation, a 
swelling of the etheric body, that takes place when the astral body 
moves away from it. The etheric body does not feel as dense. You 
can feel the limits of your own energy extending much further 
away than when the astral body is closely impacted. 
So altogether, the etheric body is sometimes closed and compacted, 
sometimes dilated and more permeable, depending on whether the 
astral body is near or far from it. In Chapters 18 and 20 we will 
see how a conscious mastery of this balance can be used to protect 
your energies. There is a certain way of being fully present that 
impacts the astral body into the etheric, shielding the latter 
against negative influences. It gives the feeling that the aura is 
closed and impermeable. 

But no living structure can flourish if it remains contracted all 
the time. To maintain the health of the etheric, there have to be 
times when it can completely relax and expand. The more the 
grasp of the astral body is released, the more the etheric body is 
set free. The stress of modern life tends to generate a cramped 
condition in which the astral body never really lets go of its grip 
on the etheric. In the long run this creates a wearing out and an 
exhaustion of the etheric layer. Night practice allows you to reach 
a degree of etheric relaxation that is far superior to usual sleep. 
The perfect state of etheric relaxation is very similar to what a 
baby experiences naturally. Why does a baby sleep all the time? 
Because its astral body has hardly landed on the planet. The baby's 
astral body is floating above, and only incarnates from time to 
time into the etheric. Therefore the baby's etheric is completely 
open and in a state of absolute relaxation. 

This also means that you should take great care of your baby, for 
this openness makes it very vulnerable to its environment. The 
baby 'breathes through its skin' all the influences of the world 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

around it. Some parents take their baby to parties and consider 
that everything is fine because baby remains sound asleep, even in 
the middle of the noise and agitation. This is a big mistake. The 
disorganised vibrations of the environment flow into the child and 
create far greater disturbance than the parents realize. 
Through night practice you learn to achieve the baby's climax of 
relaxation, not only of the physical but also of the etheric body. 
The etheric can be given a time of complete opening and expansion. 
That is why night practice may allow you to recover much more 
quickly than an ordinary siesta. A lifestyle that never allows a full 
opening and expansion of the etheric body, as is the case for most 
people at the moment, generates accelerated aging processes and 

However, the opening also implies that certain precautions should 
be taken during your night practice. It would not be appropriate 
for instance, to go into a state of deep relaxation in the hall of a 
busy railway station. Your etheric body would be likely to catch all 
sorts of negative energies, and it might take you a few weeks of 
clearing, if not more, before you get rid of them. 
During night practice your etheric body opens significantly more 
than during meditation. Meditation is practised in a sitting 
position, and due to the fact that it operates through the waking 
state, much more control is retained over the physical and etheric 
bodies. It is possible, even though not necessarily recommended, to 
meditate in the middle of a crowd, because several mechanisms of 
defence are maintained. But it would be absurd to try to do a 
night practice in the middle of a crowd, just as it is crazy to take 
a baby to a demonstration. Even during a nap or during the most 
unconscious sleep, your etheric remains much more closed and 
impermeable than during night practice. 

From this we can deduce a few recommendations concerning night 
practice. Their logic is simple: when your etheric body is open, you 
should be in a quiet, clean and protected etheric environment. 
Let us review a few of the factors of 'etheric pollution': 
• It is not advisable to implement night practice on an earth line. 
The lines make a grid of densif ied etheric energy that proves toxic 
for the human etheric body. Your etheric is more open during 
normal night sleep than while you are awake, therefore earth lines 
are more toxic during sleep than during the day. The etheric is 
even more open during night practice, so make sure you don't use 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

the technique on a line. Study Chapter 12 and dowse your bedroom! 

• Avoid beds made of or containing iron, spring mattresses, etc. 
Iron tends to amplify any factor of electromagnetic pollution. For 
the same reason, avoid electrical wiring and electronic equipment 
in the vicinity of your bed. Electric blankets should be discarded, 
even if they are not switched on. Before sleeping on a water bed, 
consider that there is nothing better than a mass of running or 
stagnant water to attract entities of all kinds. Modern technology 
sometimes leads to energetic disasters. 

A fridge can be quite toxic for your etheric, if you practise less 
than about five metres from it. I suggest that you do the 
following experiment: Place a mattress in your kitchen, say one or 
two meters from the fridge, and do a night practice. Fridges 
remain 'dormant' for some time, and then their electrical 
apparatus is activated — that is when they start making a noise. At 
the very moment the fridge starts making a noise, if you are in a 
state of etheric relaxation, you will feel a kind of lash in your 
etheric body. You can't miss it: a sudden, painful discharge, 
extremely tangible, and often accompanied by the perception of a 
flash of colour. Try it! It won't hurt you if you only do it a few 

This will allow you to meditate on the connections between the 
etheric layer and the electromagnetic force. The two are certainly 
not identical: the electromagnetic field belongs to the physical 
sphere, and the etheric is beyond the physical sphere. Yet there 
are direct bridges connecting the two, as shown by this 
experiment. A similar experience can occur when sleeping in a 
building full of iron, such as a skyscraper, with central heating. 
From time to time a discharge of static electricity goes through 
the heaters, often accompanied by an abrupt little sound. At that 
moment, if you are doing night practice, you feel exactly the 
same type of lash in your etheric body. 

• It is not advisable to implement night practice while lying too 
close to somebody (or to an animal, or even to plants). The reason 
is obvious: your etheric body starts to expand. If it meets the 
resistance of another living being's etheric, the expansion process 
will simply stop. And your etheric will start to retract again, due 
to a mechanism of self-protection. Your night practice will remain 
superficial, you won't be able to dive deep into a hyper-relaxed 
state. If you were to insist and force the opening, you could pick 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

up unwanted negative energies from the other person and have 
your own quintessence of life force drawn out. 
Once more it should be remembered that during night practice 
your etheric body becomes significantly more dilated and open 
than during normal sleep. So even if you live with someone, share 
a bed and have sex with him or her, it is preferable to keep some 
distance while doing night practice. It does not make any 
difference whether the other one is practising with you or not. 
In practice, how far apart should you stay? A distance of 1.5 
metres (5 feet) is fine. So if you share a bed the advice is: leave it 
during the practice and come back once you've finished. This will 
also diminish your chances of falling asleep in the middle. I 
suggest that during the practice you try to sense how far your 
etheric expands and discover for yourself, as always, what the 
right distance should be. 

However, you will see that the presence of somebody else 
practising with you in the room, provided there is sufficient space 
between the two, is rather supportive. The combined astral 
energies of the two people help overcome the dullness of 
unconsciousness and make it easier to maintain some awareness 
during sleep. Astral travelling is significantly facilitated. It could 
be that in the coming decades a new form of socialising will 

13.6 Night practice and awareness in the eye (1) 

There is one common feature to all the techniques in this book: 
maintaining awareness between the eyebrows. Whether you are 
meditating, seeing auras or dowsing earth lines, you always keep a 
focus in the third eye. But there is one exception to this rule: 
night practice. It is not advisable to switch on the vibration in the 
eye while practising the techniques of psychic sleep. And there are 
a few simple reasons for this. 

While practising channel release you may have noticed that when 
awakening the vibration in the hands, a stimulation of the energy 
automatically takes place, both in the eye and all over the body. 
This has a grounding effect: if you are feeling somewhat sleepy or 
'floating', it re-anchors you inside your physical body and wakes 
you up. What creates this, in terms of subtle bodies? The type of 
strong vibration generated in your eye by rubbing your hands 
pulls the astral body into the etheric. This movement of the astral 
body is similar to what happens when you wake up. You become 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

more awake and you can feel the life force flowing all over your 

Now to a certain extent, a similar movement takes place each time 
you awaken a strong vibration in your eye, even if you do not rub 
the hands: the astral is drawn into the etheric. Of course if the 
purpose is to sleep, you want just the opposite! You want the astral 
body to move away from the etheric and physical bodies. And you 
want the etheric and physical bodies to become very quiet, not 
vibrating all over. So quite logically, you should not try to 
stimulate the vibration in the eye during night practice. If you 
were to do so you might get agitated and find it difficult to fall 

This is a common reason why some people who follow a path of 
meditation go through periods during which they can't fall asleep 
at night. They may not realize it, but they unconsciously foster 
the vibration in their third eye. It is like a clenching of the eye. 
And, due to the above-mentioned mechanisms, they are kept 

You can notably improve these people's sleep by helping them 
become aware of what takes place, and getting them to release the 
vibration in the eye. A good method is to focus on the heart. A 
well known Sanskrit text, the Brhad-Aranyaka-Upanisad (2.1.17-18) 
explains that to fall asleep there has to be a withdrawal of the 
pranas (etheric energies) and the senses into the heart. A gentle 
awareness (no concentration!) in the heart centre, behind the 
middle of the chest, will favour the right gathering of the 
energies, thereby inducing sleep. 

13.7 Third eye flaring — a possible experience 

If you follow a systematic training to build your subtle bodies, it 
may happen that you go through a phase when a strong vibration 
is automatically and permanently switched on in your third eye, 
day and night. You are not even clenching unconsciously, it just 
happens as a natural part of the process, and it often has to do 
with the guides pouring energy into your structure. You feel your 
eye quite intensely, there is a lot of vibration, and there can also 
be a lot of light too. Sometimes there is so much inner light that 
it feels like the middle of the day, even though you are lying 
down in a dark room in the deepest part of the night. It may well 
be that you can't fall asleep because the vibration in the eye is too 
intense. Another common symptom is that you need to get up a 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

few times to pass urine, as a consequence of the discharge of astral 
energies into your physical body. 

If you are in this situation you can always try to focus gently on 
your heart. It will help. But basically there is not much you can 
do: the process has to follow its course. So if it happens to you, 
don't worry, and be patient. You have to accept that you are not 
going to fall asleep early for some time. Enjoy the light. Anyhow, 
you will often find that you are not tired the following morning, 
even if you had little normal sleep. For even though you are fully 
awake, you are halfway to a form of psychic sleep, and the body 
can recover to a certain extent. Moreover there is often a natural 
'amphetamine-like' effect that takes place (without any drug of 
course) at the same time, which gives you a lot of extra energy. 
The process stops by itself after some time. 

How long does such a phase of awakening last? A few days, or a 
few weeks — sometimes, but rarely, as long as a few months. See 
the positive side of it: strong forces are implanted in your eye. 
The more intense this phase, the more powerful the vision that 
will follow. But note that this phase of 'enlightened insomnia' is 
certainly not compulsory. Many people go through their complete 
development without ever meeting it. It may or may not happen, 
depending on your own internal organisation. 

13.8 Night practice and awareness in the eye (2) 

From what has been said so far, it should not be understood that 
any awareness in the third eye tends to impact the astral body 
into the physical and the etheric, thereby preventing sleep. It is 
only when there is a vibration between the eyebrows that this 
happens, not when you feel the purple space. 

Remember what was described in relation to the first technique of 
meditation (section 3.5). When vibration, tingling or pressure is 
felt between the eyebrows, it indicates that the etheric part of 
the eye is activated. In terms of subtle bodies, a strong vibration 
between the eyebrows indicates that the astral body gets more 
impacted into the etheric part of the eye, and into the etheric 
body in general. 

However, when you get into the perception of the purple space, 
the astral body is orientated towards astral worlds, not towards 
the etheric and physical bodies. For the purple space is nothing 
other than a layer of the astral spaces. 


Chapter 13 - Night Practice 1 : Theoretical Aspects 

The problem is that in the beginning, when you go into your eye 
you find it difficult to dissociate the vibration from the light and 
the space. You get a bit of everything: vibration, light and space, 
all at the same time. So in night practice it is better to avoid the 
eye altogether, because the intensification of the vibration would 
be opposed to the natural direction of sleep. 

But when you are more advanced and able to bring the space in the 
eye at will, without any vibration, there is no reason why you 
shouldn't be in the eye during night practice. 

13.9 Allow enough normal sleep 

When some people hear about techniques of deep relaxation, 
psychic sleep and others along the same lines, they sometimes 
design a strange arithmetic. They hear that one hour of psychic 
sleep can help them to recover as much as three or four hours of 
normal sleep. Then they think: "One hour of psychic sleep equals 
four hours of normal sleep. Therefore I'll have three hours of 
psychic sleep every night, and that will do. What a lot of time I'll 

These calculations are based on a misunderstanding! The people who 
think that sleep is a waste of time are completely missing all the 
astral events that normally take place in the course of a night. 
First you would need to become a grand master of psychic sleep 
before your body could recover enough with only three or four 
hours per night. But even if that were the case you would still 
benefit from all the experiences of maturation and travelling that 
occur during the night. The desire to reduce the amount of sleep 
comes from a very materialistic perspective, and does not 
correspond to the reality of the process of transformation. 
Night practice should be understood as a way to make your sleep 
more efficient and enlightening, not to replace it. A reasonable 
duration of night practice is between 30 and 60 minutes before 
going to sleep, plus one or more sessions during the day if you 
wish. But in order to allow the process of transformation and the 
building of your subtle bodies to follow their course, keep your 
normal hours of sleep every night. 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the 

14.1 If you are reading the instructions for friends 

Apowerful way to learn night practice is to use the cassettes which 
are part of the Clairvision School's correspondence courses. You can 
also have someone read the instructions for you while you are 
lying down. In either case, just let yourself be guided by the voice, 
so that you can completely relax and let go. The more you can lose 
control and let yourself be carried by the flow of the voice, the 
deeper you will travel. 

The one who reads the instructions should sit on the floor, 
preferably in a meditation position. The others lie down with their 
heads towards the one who is reading: the reader should have the 
heads, not the feet, oriented towards him. If there is no carpet, 
participants should lie on a thin mat or on one or two blankets. 
They should not touch each other's bodies, in order to avoid 
undesirable transfers of energy (as discussed in the last chapter). 
If practising during the day, cover the windows to create an 
atmosphere of semi-darkness. If practising at night, keep at least 
one faint light on to avoid complete darkness. But if you are 
practising in bed just before going to sleep, there is no need to 
have a light on. 

Anyone who does not practise should leave the room. Make sure 
that there are no factors of distraction in the room, otherwise 
nobody will 'take off'. 

It is usually a good idea for those who are lying down to cover 
themselves with a blanket because people often feel cold in the 
deep state of relaxation, even if they did not feel cold when they 
started the practice. If pillows are used they should be thin, 
otherwise tensions in the neck may build up and disturb the 

The arms should lie flat by the sides of the body. The legs should 
not be crossed. (Crossing the legs while undergoing a process in a 
lying position is usually a sign of resistance.) The body should be 
perfectly straight and the position should be completely 
comfortable, so that no tension arises during the practice to take 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

the person back to surface consciousness. 

Here are a few recommendations for the person reading the 


• Make sure that nobody is lying on an earth line. If you realize 
that someone is on an earth line once the practice has begun, then 
try to sense what sort of interference is created by the line. 

• Do not read the instructions that are written inside brackets [ ]. 
Each time you meet three dots in the text: "..." make a short pause 
(a few seconds or more) before resuming the sequence of 

Each time you meet three dots in brackets: "[...]" make a longer 
pause (half a minute or more). 

Most important: do the practice yourself as you give the 
instructions. For instance, become aware of the body parts while 
naming them. Then your voice will sound 'right', because you will 
speak from the space of the practice. There will be a 
communication of the right experience. But if you give the 
instructions while your mind is wandering onto other subjects, 
your friends will not get as much benefit from their practice. 

• Pay attention to little signs such as tension of the eyelids. When 
a participant is deep inside, the eyelids are fully relaxed and 
absolutely nothing moves in the body. If the eyelids keep 
contracting you know the person is not 'diving'. By observing 
their breath you can also get a good sense of how deep they are. 
(These indications also apply when practising ISIS, the Clairvision 
technique of regression.) 

• Tune into the participants. Feel what they feel. Penetrate their 
experience. Try to see who gets out of their body and what they 
look like if this takes place. During the 7th phase in particular, be 
very much in the eye and in the seeingness. Try to perceive if 
some participants manage to lift their astral limbs. When this 
happens you can see a cloudy formation over the physical limb. If 
somebody takes off completely, which can happen during any of 
the phases of night practice, then the cloudy formation is bigger 
(usually slightly bigger than their physical body) and is hovering 
over the body, anywhere up to the ceiling. While observing this, 
look for the silver cord that is said to link the astral body to the 
physical body. After the session, share your impressions with the 
participants to confirm your perceptions. 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

It is not compulsory to have somebody reading the instructions to 
do a night practice. You can very well do it alone. Yet experience 
shows that beginners tend to fall asleep systematically, as soon as 
they reach a deep stage. I therefore recommend that you use 
cassettes or train a friend to read the instructions for you, 
especially during the phase of learning. 
Here is a standard set of instructions: 


"Take off your shoes, your belt and your wrist watch. 

Make sure that you are not on an earth line. 

Lie down on your back, your arms by your sides. 

Make sure your body is straight. 

Uncross your legs. It's often preferable to cover yourself with a 

blanket, for the body temperature tends to decrease as you enter 

deep states of night practice. 

Make sure you are not touching somebody else's body [...] 

PHASE 1: Becoming a master in the art of exhaling 

"Make a few long exhalations... 

Try to exhale as if you were expiring, as if you were giving your 

last breath... 

It's a quest for the absolute sigh... 

Look for the ultimate exhalation, the one that leaves your body all 

empty and soft, free from any tension [...] 

PHASE 2: Circulating through body parts 

[2a] "Each time a body part is named, become aware of it. [If you 

are practising alone, repeat the name of the part mentally as you 

become aware of it or, even better, hear the inner voice saying the 

name of the part.] 

Become aware of the vertex, the area at the very top of the head. 

Then become aware of the left part of the top of the head... right 

part of the top of the head, 

left part of the forehead, right part of the forehead, 

left eye, right eye, 

left ear, right ear, 

left cheek, right cheek, 

left nostril, right nostril, 

left side of the lips, right side of the lips, 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

left side of the teeth, right side of the teeth, 

left side of the tongue, right side of the tongue, 

left lower jaw and chin, right lower jaw and chin, 

left side of the whole face, right side of the whole face... 

Awareness of the left side of the throat, right side of the throat, 

left side of the neck, right side of the neck... 

Left shoulder, right shoulder, 

left upper arm, right upper arm, 

left elbow, right elbow, 

left forearm, right forearm, 

left wrist, right wrist, 

left hand, right hand, 

left thumb, right thumb, 

left fingers, right fingers, 

the left arm, as a whole... The right arm, as a whole... 

Left hip, right hip, 

left thigh, right thigh, 

left knee, right knee, 

left lower leg, right lower leg, 

left ankle, right ankle, 

left foot, right foot, 

left big toe, right big toe, 

left toes, right toes, 

the whole left leg... The whole right leg... 

The left side of the abdomen, below the navel... 

The right side of the abdomen, below the navel... 

The left side of the abdomen, above the navel... 

The right side of the abdomen, above the navel... 

The left side of the chest... 

The right side of the chest... 

The left side of the whole body... 

The right side of the whole body... 

Awareness of the whole body [...] 

Then we circulate a second time. This time try to become more 

deeply aware of each body part, as if you were one with it. Make 

your unity with the body part as it is named. 

[Read the sequence of body parts again, as indicated above.] 

Third circulation. Each time a body part is named, become aware of 

it and become aware of 'seeingness' at the same time. Switch on the 

seeingness and tune into the body part. 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

[Read the sequence of the body parts a third time, this time 

reminding them of the seeingness from time to time. Don't forget 

to implement the seeingness yourself. At the end of the sequence, 


"Seeingness of the whole body... Awareness of the whole body and 

seeingness... What can you see of your body? [...] 

[2b] Exploring the organs 

"Become aware of the spleen, on the left, behind the ribs and the 

stomach... Become one with the spleen.. 

Then, awareness of the liver... Become one with the liver, as if you 

were the liver... 

Awareness of the gallbladder... 

Awareness of the heart... Be completely in your heart... 

Awareness of the kidneys... Become one with the kidneys... 

Awareness of the lungs... Be one with the lungs... 

Awareness of the uterus... If you are a man, become aware in your 

pelvis, the lower abdomen below the navel... And look for the 

energetic equivalent of the female uterus. Become aware of your 

uterus of energy... 

We repeat the sequence of the organs a second time, adding the 

quality of seeingness. 

Become aware of seeingness, the fact of seeing, and tune into the 

spleen... Look for the earth element in the spleen [...] 

Become aware of seeingness, the pure quality of seeing, and be one 

with the liver... Try to sense the warm humidity of the liver [...] 

Seeingness and the gallbladder... Tune into the gallbladder... Look 

for the fire of the bile [...] 

Awareness of seeingness and awareness of your heart... Be one with 

the heart... Look for the presence in the heart [...] 

Awareness of seeingness and awareness of the kidneys [...] 

Become aware of seeingness and tune into the lungs... Become 

aware of the wind element in the lungs [...] 

Seeingness and the uterus... Tune into the uterus... Look for the 

water element in the uterus [...] 

PHASE 3: Awareness of the breath 

[3a] "Become aware of the area one inch below your navel. Become 
aware of the natural movement of this area, when you inhale and 
when you exhale. Tust witness the natural flow of your breath, 
without modifying it. It's like watching your body breathing. Each 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

time you inhale, the area below the navel goes up. Each time you 

exhale, it comes down again. Start counting down the breath, from 

33 to 1, in the following way: 

33 when the body inhales and the area below the navel goes up, 

33 when the body exhales and the area below the navel comes 


32 when the body inhales and the area below the navel goes up, 

32 when the body exhales and the area below the navel comes 

31 when the body inhales and the area below the navel goes up, 

31 when the body exhales and the area below the navel comes down 

Go on with the countdown, following the natural rhythm of your 

body... If you reach one, start again from 33 [...] 

[Remind the participants of their countdown every 1 or 2 

minutes, with instructions such as:] 

"Awareness of the area below the navel." 

[or:] "Remain aware of your countdown below the navel. 

[3b] "Now, become aware of the area in the middle of the chest, 

around the middle of the sternum. The same as before, each time 

your body inhales, the middle of the chest goes up. Each time your 

body exhales, the area comes down. Start a countdown in the 

following way: 

33 when the body inhales and the chest goes up, 

33 when the body exhales and the chest comes down. 

32 when the body inhales and the chest goes up, 

32 when the body exhales and the chest comes down... 

Continue your countdown, always following the natural rhythm of 

your breath. If you reach 1, start again from 33 [...] 

[Remind them of their countdown every 1 or 2 minutes, with 

sentences such as:] 

"Counting down the breath on the level of the chest" [or:] 

"Watching the breath in the middle of the chest." 

[3c] "Become aware of the breath that comes and goes through the 

nostrils. Each time you inhale, the air comes in. Each time you 

exhale, it goes out. Watch the natural movement of the breath. 

Just be a witness, don't interfere. 

Become aware of the mucosa inside the nostrils. Each time you 

inhale, there is like a clash between this membrane and the 

incoming air. Become aware of this sharp contact between the 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

vibration of the inhaled air and the vibration of the inner 

membrane of the nose. 

Start counting down the breath: 

33 when the body inhales and the air comes in, 

33 when the body exhales and the air goes out. 

32 when the body inhales and the air comes in, 

32 when the body exhales and the air goes out... 

If you reach 1, start again from 33. 

[Every 1 or 2 minutes, add a sentence such as:] 

"Awareness of the breath going in and out of the nose." 

"Counting down the breath on the level of the nostrils." 

[3d] "Drop the countdown and become more aware of this vibration 

in the mucosa inside the nostrils, each time the air comes in... Try 

to catch more and more of the energy of the air... as if you were 

drinking the air... At the same time become aware of the area at 

the root of the trunk, around the perineum and the coccyx... Try 

to see if something is stimulated in this area while you are 

catching more and more life force through your nostrils [...] 

PHASE 4: The subtle senses at the root of the physical senses 

[4a] "Pick up one smell in the air and focus on it for one minute 


Then drop the awareness of this smell and try to pick up another 

one, coming from further away... Remain aware of the smell for 

one minute [...] 

And now, pick up another smell. This time try to find a smell that 

comes through the window from really far away... and focus on it 

for one minute [...] 

Then let go of this smell. Instead of being aware of any smell in 

particular, become aware of the fact of smelling, the pure quality 

of smell... Awareness of 'smelling-ness', the action of smelling, 

independent of any particular smell [...] 

[4b] "Drop the sense of smell and become aware of a particular 

sound, coming from inside or outside the building. Any sound... 

Remain aware of this sound for one minute, focussing on nothing 

else but the action of this sound on your sense of hearing [...] 

Then drop this sound and try to find another one, coming 

through the window from further away... Even a very faint 

sound... Remain with it for one minute. Watch how this sound 

interacts with your sense of hearing [...] 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

Then look for a sound that comes from very, very, very far 

away... So faint that you can hardly discern whether it's a physical 

or a non-physical sound... Remain aware of that sound for one 

minute, trying to observe how your sense of hearing is affected 

by that sound [...] 

Then let go of any sound. Become aware of the fact of hearing... 

the pure quality of hearing, independent of any sound... Awareness 

of 'hearing-ness', the fact of hearing [...] 

[4c] "Remember a strong taste of food. Pick up a certain food and 

remember how it feels to have this particular food in your 

mouth... The texture and taste on your tongue, the flow of saliva... 

Be 100% in the taste, as if nothing else existed [...] 

Then remember the taste of another food. Do not think, just take 

the first food that comes to you. And then recall how it feels to 

have this food in your mouth... Put all of your self in the taste, 

experience it completely [...] 

Then look for the non-physical taste of the nectar: like a trickle 

or a little flow at the back of the throat, very fresh and sweet... 

The taste of the nectar flowing at the back of your throat... Let 

yourself be fed by it [...] 

Then drop all the tastes. Become aware of the fact of tasting, the 

pure quality of tasting, independent of any taste in particular [...] 

PHASE 5: Moving backwards through the day 

"Start recalling the images of the day. Begin with what you were 

doing just before the night practice... Don't do it, let it happen: 

just let the images of the day come back in front of you... And go 

on, moving backwards all through the day... 

Images of what you were doing in the evening [...] 

Images of dinner [...] 

Images of your afternoon activities [...] The people that you have 

been talking to [...] 

Images of lunch [...] 

Images of your morning activities [...] 

Images of breakfast time [...] 

See yourself as you were doing your morning meditation [...] 

Images of your bathroom time in the morning [...] 

Up to the very first images of the morning, in bed, before you 

got up [...] 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

PHASE 6: Spontaneous images 

[6a] "Now comes the phase of spontaneous images. Tust let any 

image flash in front of you... any image, the first one that comes 

to you... Stay with this image a few seconds [...] 

And then let another image come... Remember: no imagination, 

don't make up anything. Tust take the first image that comes [...] 

And then another image [...] 

Drop this one and let another image come... Just be in the space 

and let images come to you [...] 

[6b] "Let another image come in front of you. But this time 

become aware both of the image and of the fact of seeing, the 


Another image and seeingness, the process of seeing [...] 

Another image and seeingness [...] 

[6c] "Drop the images and remain aware of seeingness only... the 

pure quality of seeing, independent of any object [...] 

PHASE 7: Preparatory exercises for travelling 

[7a] "Become aware of your astral right arm — not the physical 

arm but the astral one, superimposed on the physical arm. Your 

physical body remains completely motionless. Practise lifting up 

the astral right hand and arm... And then put the astral right arm 

and hand back into the physical ones. 

Then become aware of your astral left arm and hand... Without 

moving the physical body, practise lifting up the astral left arm... 

Then put the astral left arm back into the physical one... 

Start the same process again on the right side: practise detaching 

the astral hand and forearm from the physical ones. Lift them 

up... and then put them back... 

Again on the left side [...] 

The right side [...] 

Lift up the left astral arm [...] 

[This can be repeated a few more times.] 

[7b] "Become aware of your right astral leg. Without moving 

anything of your physical body, practise lifting the astral right 

foot and leg out of the physical ones... and then put them back... 

Become aware of the left astral leg... Try to lift it up, out of the 

physical one... and then put it back into the physical leg... 

Practise in the same way, a few times on each side. Lifting the 

right astral leg up... Putting it back... 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

Lifting up the left astral leg... Putting it back... 

Lifting up the right astral leg... Putting it back... 

Lifting up the left astral leg... Putting it back... 

[7c] "Become aware of your astral body as a whole... 

Become aware of your physical body as a whole... 

The nature of your physical body is gravity, the nature of your 

astral body is levity or anti-gravity... 

Become aware of the gravity of your physical body... Become 

aware of the weight of your body on the mattress... All that you 

can feel that's heavy pertains to your physical body... 

Now, look inside yourself for what is lightness... Look for the 

levity principle, the force that moves upwards... Become aware of 

the force that pushes upwards, the exact opposite of the principle 

of gravity... It is there, inside you. It's a question of tuning into 

it... Tune into the force that moves upwards... Let it pervade the 

whole body... Let it lift everything upwards [...] 

Now go back into the perception of the gravity... Look for the 

heavy principle [...] 

Then awareness of the anti-gravity principle again.. Awareness of 

the force that moves upwards [...] 

[7d] "Awareness of seeingness, the fact of seeing... 

Practise seeing your body from above... 

Become aware of the seeingness and tune in with the image of 

your body, seen from above [...] 


"Start listening to the sounds outside [...] 

Become aware of your body again... Go back into the body... 

Take a few long, long inhalations [...] 

Move your hands a little... and your feet... 

Stretch your body... 

Roll on your side., and open your eyes." 

[If you are practising in bed just before sleeping, you do not have 

to go through this last set of instructions. Instead of reconnecting 

with waking consciousness, just roll over on your side and fall 



14.2 If you do not have much time 

If the purpose is to recover quickly during the day and if you do 
not have much time, a good option is to start with a quick rotation 


Chapter 14 - Night Practice 2: Instructions for the Technique 

around the body parts (phase 2). Then operate a countdown of the 
breath (phase 3) in a part of the body of your choice. As soon as 
you are deeply relaxed, move on to the consciousness of images 
(phases 5 and 6). It is when images flow clearly and freely in front 
of you that you have reached a state of intense relaxation and a 
fast recovery of your energies. Phase 6, spontaneous images, is 
therefore particularly useful whenever you want to have a super- 

Often when you are tired during the day, the fatigue is f ocussed 
in one particular area of your body: there is a spot, a focal zone of 
tiredness. For instance, it might be somewhere in your back, or 
maybe in your throat, especially if you have been speaking a lot. 
If you can find this spot and operate a countdown of the breath 
there while doing phase 3, you will recover very quickly from 
your fatigue. 


Chapter 15 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of 
the Technique 

15.1 Preparation 

Be fairly strict with details such as taking shoes off, lying in a 
proper position, and so on. They make a significant difference to 
the depth of experience reached by the participants. If even one or 
two of them do not follow these preparatory procedures and 
remain at the surface during the session, it is enough to disturb 
the vibrations of the whole group and prevent the others from 
accessing the experience. 

15.2 Phase 1: exhaling 

Exhaling is the very last thing a human being does on this planet. 

Hence the use of the verb 'to expire', which means both to die and 

to breathe out. Tust as a fantastic tension is associated with the 

first inhalation of the newborn, a fantastic release takes place 

when dying people give their last exhalation. 

The art of breathing out is a quest for the ultimate exhalation. Do 

this as if you were on your death-bed, having completed a very 

fulfilled life. 

You can learn to use exhalation as the vector to carry tensions and 

wrong energies out of your body. The practice of sighing can be 

quite therapeutic. 

15.3 Phase 2a: circulating in the body parts 

Practising awareness of the different body parts should not be 
regarded as a mere relaxation technique but as a major tool on the 
path of inner alchemy. By connecting your awareness with the 
body parts, consciousness is infused into the physical layer, and a 
deep transformation starts to take place. As you become relaxed 
and open, your consciousness reaches far deeper into the physical 
than if you were rotating through the body parts in the usual 
consciousness of the day. 

The more you can 'become one' with the body part, the deeper 
your consciousness will be instilled into the physical layer. Tune 
into the body part and let its qualities become alive in you, as 
described in Chapter 11. The feeling that comes from tuning in is 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


a knowledge through identity: you 'become' the body part. One of 

the secrets of the physical transformation lies in reaching this 

metaphysical unity, far beyond a mere mental awareness of the 

body part. 

While circulating around the body parts with seeingness, it is not 

uncommon to receive unexpected visions of bones, articulations and 


For instance, focus on the joint cavities. Between the two joining 

bones there is a space that is filled with a particular liquid, called 

synovial fluid. (Interestingly, synovia is a term that was 

introduced by Paracelsus.) When you tune into the synovial cavity, 

you get a feeling of space. In German and French, synovial cavity 

is actually named 'synovial space' (synovial raum, espace synovial). 

Clairvoyance reveals how the body connects with the universal 

astral space through this 'space in the articulation', which suggests 

an interesting new way of looking at joint pathologies. 

A powerful variation of this phase is to add a moment of 

awareness of the neutral mid-point in the centre of the body after 

each couple of body parts. For instance: the left eye... the right 

eye... the area in the middle of the two eyes... 

Or: the left knee... the right knee... the area in the middle of the 

two knees... 

The left and right sides of the body incarnate opposite polarities 

of energy, as do night and day, female and male, yin and yang, all 

of which represent pairs of opposite polarities. 

When circulating your awareness according to the sequence of 

phase 2a, you first get in touch with the left polarity of a body 

part, then with the right one. With the mid-point, you connect 

with the space where the polarities become nought: it is the 'Tao 

point', neither yang nor yin, or both yin and yang at the same 

time. See if you can feel this yourself. 

Another interesting way of circulating through the body is to 

listen to the inner sound in each body part. 

Why do we start with the left side for each body part? 

Interestingly, soldiers do the same when they walk: 'left, right, 

left, right...' In Hatha-yoga the practice called nadl-sodhana 

(alternate breathing), in which one breathes through one nostril 

while blocking the other with the fingers, always starts with an 

inhalation through the left nostril. In several examples we find 

that when dealing with energy, the left side is activated before 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


the right. 

Apart from this, when involved in spiritual activities such as 
throwing the coins to fathom the I Ching, it is traditionally the 
left hand that is used (the hand of the heart). The same applies 
when cutting Tarot cards. A connection may be established with 
the fact that the left side of the body is related to the right 
hemisphere of the brain, more intuitive than analytic, and 
therefore more spiritually inclined. And in Hatha-yoga the main 
circulation of energy on the left side of the body is Ida-nadI, the 
lunar nadl, which creates an internalization of energies and an 
opening into inner spaces. Rudolf Steiner has made the prediction 
that in the distant future of humanity, the left hand will become 
predominant, to the point where the right hand will ultimately be 

15.4 Phase 2b: awareness and seeingness of the organs 

As your clairvoyance increases you will, while practising this 
phase, have fascinating visions of your organs that will be 
accompanied by a deep intuitive understanding of their functions. 
Apart from its healing value, this process leads to a different 
knowledge of the organs. You will make many unexpected 
discoveries that will throw quite a different light on certain 
common facts of anatomy, physiology and pathology. The path of 
the seers is full of surprises. 

The more you clairvoyantly perceive the organs inside yourself, 
the more you will be able to perceive the same inside others — a 
great help for diagnosis! An essential fact about perception in 
general is that whenever something is seen or felt inside yourself, 
it can also be seen or felt in any other person. 'Inside' or 'outside' 
does not make much difference in terms of clairvoyant abilities. 
Why this particular sequence of organs? The hermetic (alchemical) 
tradition establishes correspondences between the organs of our 
body and the planets of the solar system. Man is the microcosm, 
the universe is the macrocosm. Each organ incarnates in the body 
all the symbols and functions of its corresponding planet. The 
sequence of the organs, as indicated in phase 2b, follows the 
traditional sequence of the planetary spheres: Saturn (spleen), 
Tupiter (liver), Mars (gallbladder), Sun (heart), Venus (kidneys), 
Mercury (lungs), Moon (uterus). 

A more advanced stage consists of being able to perceive the 
planetary forces behind the physical organs, turning this 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


technique into an astrological meditation inside your own body. In 
order to become a proper astrologer or alchemist, planetary 
energies should be intuitively comprehended and felt inside 
yourself, not only understood intellectually. 

People interested in star lore and its correspondences with the 
human microcosm would be well inspired to add another phase to 
their night practice. This consists of rotating around areas of the 
body, following the traditional correspondence with the 
constellations: Aries/head; Taurus/throat and neck 
Gemini/shoulders and shoulder blades; Cancer/breast; Leo/heart 
Virgo/intestines; Libra/kidneys; Scorpio/sexual organs 
Sagittarius/thighs; Capricorn/knees; Aquarius/ankles; Pisces/feet. 
Mentally say the name of the constellation whilst being aware of 
the corresponding body area. 

15.5 Phase 3: awareness of the breath and countdowns 

This is the part where everybody falls asleep. Even the worst 
insomniacs seem to collapse in the middle of this phase! But falling 
asleep is not necessarily wrong. Let us go back to an important 
point of theory. One of the purposes of night practice is to allow 
you to explore this razor's edge between sleeping and waking. 
If you remain fully awake throughout the practice, it means that 
you never cross the edge and this purpose is missed. On the other 
hand, if you fall asleep immediately and keep snoring till the end, 
the practice won't be so enlightening either. 

The problem is that as soon as you reach the borderline between 
waking and sleeping, you lose your awareness. You are familiar 
with the waking state and you are familiar with the sleeping state, 
but the separating space between the two is foreign to you. Each 
time you come near it you miss it, and you are immediately 
swallowed into the sleeping side. 

That is why this part of the technique will be much more 
powerful if you use a cassette, or if somebody reads or speaks the 
instructions for you. You fall asleep, and very quickly the voice 
calls you back: 'Remain aware of your countdown'. A few minutes 
later you fall asleep again, and the voice brings you back to the 
waking state again. So that you keep oscillating around the razor's 
edge, which is an excellent way to become more familiar with it. 
Gradually, you learn to retain more awareness while on the edge. 
With practice, practice, practice... you will reach an experience 
where you are both asleep and awake, and aware at the same time. 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


When you can stabilise yourself on the edge for more than a few 
seconds your awareness becomes super-awareness, and you get in 
touch with the mystery of the threshold. This is also the stage 
that will give you the capacity for an unusually quick recovery and 
make you a master sleeper of the Napoleon type. 

From this discussion we can draw the following practical 
conclusions: Do not include phase 3 if you are practising alone, 
without the spoken instructions of a friend or a cassette, and if 
you are practising in bed just before going to sleep, especially if 
you tend to fall asleep each time you go through the countdown. 
Do include phase 3: 

— if you have difficulty falling asleep 

— if you are practising during the day to recover from fatigue. In 
this case the intermittent dozing that comes from the countdown 
is one of the best ways to refresh yourself 

— if your awareness has become consolidated and if you are 
starting to be able to approach the razor's edge, without being 
projected into sleep 

— if the night practice is conducted for you by a friend. It may 
then be interesting to spend more time in phase 3 and to go on 
oscillating for as long as possible on the edge as discussed above. 
You can then spend a good 15 to 20 minutes on the phase of 

15.6 Phase 3c: vibration in the nose while inhaling 

If practised regularly, this exercise will greatly enhance your 
sensitivity to smells. Moreover, you will significantly improve 
your capacity to catch the energy from the air. As you become 
more expert in this part, it will become obvious that a clash takes 
place between the vibration of the air and the membrane inside 
your nose, each time you draw the air in. Focus on this clash, be 
more and more aware of it each time you draw the air in, and a 
sharp feeling of vibration will develop in your nose. An 
unexpected awakening will take place in your nostrils. 
It is almost as if you were 'drinking' the air. This nourishes and 
reinforces the whole pharynx and has a direct effect of 
stimulation on the third eye. Remember that your third eye is not 
a spot somewhere in the forehead, but more like a tunnel that goes 
from between the eyebrows to the back of the head. The olfactory 
nerves, after travelling in the nasal mucosa, gather and pass into 
the head cavity through the cribriform plate of the ethmoid bone, 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


approximately one inch directly behind the area between the 
eyebrows — hence the direct effect on the eye of the awakening 
of the sense of smell. 

To get a clearer picture of the connection between the third eye 
and smell, tune into the eye of a dog. The third eye of this animal 
is completely 'smell'. You can see clearly how its eye extends into 
its nostrils. 

In addition to its local effects, this exercise is a powerful 
stimulant to vitality in general, due to both the extra intake of 
energy and the reflex stimulation of several organs of the body 
from the mucosa of the nostrils. The capacity to receive more 
vibrant energy will persist during the day and you will develop a 
prodigious sensitivity to smells. Your nose will become a constant 
source of wonder. 

In Kundalini-yoga the sense of smell is related to muladhara-cakra, 
the root chakra, located in the perineum and at the base of the 
spine. In muladhara lies the most primal, the most grounded and 
physical level of the bodily vitality. Any strong awakening of the 
sense of smell is considered to trigger a reaction in muladhara, 
thereby activating the functions of the chakra. This can be used in 
the treatment of depressed patients who have lost motivation in 
the physical plane, and who neither wish to live nor die. (Think 
also of the smelling salts used to bring people back to consciousness 
after fainting.) 

Smell is the most primal of the physical senses. For instance, the 
olfactory lobe or rhinencephalon, which deals with smell 
perceptions, is one of the most ancient parts of the brain in terms 
of phylogeny. The above-mentioned technique to stimulate the 
'nose-power' can therefore give unexpectedly powerful results in 
re-awakening the life force of depressed people or in patients 
suffering from fatal illnesses. 

Many of those who run after vitamins would be very surprised to 
realize how much their vitality could be increased by educating 
their nose. The nose is a main organ of reception of the etheric 
(vital force) of the air. It is not only during night practice, but 
also during your daily activities that you can work at catching 
more and more energy from the air. 


• The regular practice of neti (see Chapter 16) will be a powerful 
aid in developing the sensitivity of your nostrils and building up 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


your nose power . 

While implementing this phase 3c, and night practice in general, 
you will have to be very careful of smells. The room should not be 
stuffy, and it is always preferable to keep a window open. There 
should not be any tobacco smell, incense or strong perfumes. The 
reason is that your sensitivity is increased in such proportions 
that these smells may make you really uncomfortable, and may 
even damage your subtle sense of smell and your capacity to 
receive energy from the air. 

15.7 Phase 4 

By separating images from the fact of seeing, or seeingness, one 
can become clairvoyant. The same principle can be applied to the 
development of other subtle senses, hence this work of discerning 
the fact of hearing from the sounds, the fact of smelling from 
the smells, and so on. 

This phase is also a powerful method to internalise the senses, to 
separate the astral senses from the physical ones, and to leave the 
astral body in a state which allows maximum help from higher 
spiritual beings during the night. 

15.8 Phase 5: recalling the images of the day 

This exercise is regarded as essential by several western schools of 
esotericism and you will often find it mentioned in esoteric 
literature. It works on a number of levels and has more than one 
purpose. Let us try to understand one or two of them. 
A common observation related by those who have come back from 
a near-death experience is that they witnessed the complete tableau 
of their life. It unfolded in front of them like a movie. Apart 
from this well-known fact, occultists describe the cycle of 
reincarnation as made of two alternating phases: life on Earth, 
during which actions are performed, and then the journey 
through non-physical planes. The latter is then followed by 
another life of incarnation on Earth, and so on. 
What happens during the journey between death and rebirth? 
Among other things, there is the work of integrating what was 
achieved on Earth. It is like a maturation of the physical 
experiences that the soul went through, and a slow incorporation 
of their quintessence. 

A crucial point is that the travelling soul is confronted with the 
impossibility of changing anything that was done during the 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


incarnation on Earth. The soul can work at digesting the actions 
that were performed. It can try to prepare its next incarnation in 
the best possible way. But even though deplorable deeds may have 
been performed and opportunities have been missed, it is simply 
out of the question for any past action to be changed. This can 
prove to be a terrible drama for the travelling soul. 
This spiritual fact can also be found in the Hindu tradition. 
Sanskrit texts describe how, as long as the individual soul is not 
incarnated, and even while staying in the mother's womb, it is 
still full of good resolutions: "I shall be a great worshipper of 
Shiva, I shall devote my life to the practice of yoga..." 
But as soon as the individual is caught in the vortex of life, he or 
she immediately forgets about all the good intentions and starts to 
behave according to the motivations of the lower ego. Then, as 
soon as the soul leaves the body at the time of death, it realises 
painfully that many occasions were missed. And the cycle repeats 
itself once more. Some progress may be made, but often this is 
not much compared to what could have been achieved if a 
remembrance of the purpose had been maintained. 
This exercise, in which the day is seen backwards, aims at creating 
every night an equivalent of the phase of contemplation of one's 
actions, which normally takes place only after death. Instead of 
waiting until you die, the maturation process can begin here and 
now, thereby speeding up the course of evolution. 
Note that it would be quite inappropriate to go through a mental 
review and to try to judge the moral value of our actions in an 
inner dialogue such as: "I should have done this, I should not have 
done that..." The exercise works at a much deeper level. It is not 
through a mental dialogue but through a deep opening of the soul 
that the maturation process will be initiated. The shallow 
consciousness of a moral assessment would prove completely 
inadequate to trigger the expected result. 

After death, the retrospective vision of life circumstances not 
only takes place during the first three and a half days, it is also 
repeated at different stages of the journey, with different 
modalities. If you have patiently observed the panorama of your 
day, every night before going to sleep, then a lot of time and 
energy will be saved later. Not that there is any urgency after 
death, but if you have done this work, your energy will be 
available to perform some other important tasks, and make the 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


transition more fruitful. 

As far as the technique of reviewing the images of the day is 
concerned, you can choose between two options. The first 
possibility is to review the tableaux of the day, starting with 
those of the evening, and finishing with those of the morning. 
The second and more accurate way of practising is to see your day 
exactly like a movie going backwards. Thus for example if you 
have been driving, you see the car moving backwards. If you have 
been walking, you see yourself walking backwards. You see the 
food you have eaten going out of your mouth, and more. This may 
seem difficult in the beginning, but with some practice you may 
reach a stage where all the images unfold effortlessly by 
themselves, and the whole day is covered in 4 or 5 minutes. It is 
one of those things that you can't really 'do' but that you have to 
allow to happen. 

The question is often asked as to how detailed the review of the 
day should be, and how much of the minute details and trivial 
circumstances should be incorporated. It seems reasonable to 
complete the technique in 5 to 10 minutes. The more proficient 
you become, the more details you will be able to include in this 
time span. 

15.9 Phase 6: spontaneous images 

As soon as images flow freely in your consciousness you know you 
have reached a state of psychic sleep. You have integrated the 
precision of the images of the dream state with the conscious 
awareness of the waking state. This is a state in which you recover 
fast from fatigue. Whilst practising, you will notice that the 
review of the tableaux of the day (phase 5) is a slow transition 
leading to the phase of spontaneous images. 

Once you have reached a certain mastery of this sixth phase, all 
you have to do is be in the space (the same purple space as in all 
the other practices of this book) and let images come to you. 
In order to go further, try to become aware of the seeingness and 
of your own presence in the heart each time an image arises in 
front of you. What does this mean, in terms of the work of 
clairvoyance we have done so far? It means implementing the 
triple process of vision from the dream state instead of the 
waking state. It means extending your magic wand to the 
experiences of the night, instead of using it only during the day. 
This will lead to magnificent visions and unexpected realisations. 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


15.10 Experiences during night practice 


It can happen that tension builds up, to the point where you have 
to roll over on your side and end the practice. Usually, as soon as 
you are not on your back any more and you have given up the 
practice for that night, the tension stops and you can fall asleep. 
This experience, which is similar to the build-up of tension that 
can occur during meditation (see section 10.11) is due to energetic 
and emotional blockages. Don't try to force yourself to stay on 
your back at any cost, which can easily turn the practice into an 
ordeal. The real answer is on another level: exploring the blockage 
through appropriate techniques such as ISIS regression. 
There is another reason that may cause or exaggerate muscular 
tension during night practice: maintaining vibration in the eye. 
Remember that during night practice there should be neither 
vibration in the eye nor throat friction, as discussed in Chapter 
13. Each time you feel tension during your night practice, make 
sure that no particular awareness is kept in the eye. Focussing on 
the heart may help. 

Falling asleep all the time 

Don't despair — you are not the only one. At least you have found 
the final answer to insomnia. Here are a few suggestions to 
improve the situation: 

• Practise on the floor, not in bed. 

• If you regularly fall asleep at a particular point of the 
technique, omit that phase for a while, going straight to the next 
phase. This helps to break what can become a bad habit. Return to 
the phase some days or weeks later. 

• Use night-practice cassettes. At the Clairvision School, experience 
has shown that a number of students who had difficulty 
practising this technique reported immediate improvement as soon 
as they started using the cassettes of the correspondence courses. 

• Practise during the day, in addition to your nightly session. This 
will increase your capacity to remain aware while on the razor's 

• Get a watch with a countdown and a gentle beep. Program it to 
beep every five minutes during your night practice. 

• Stargazing: Practise looking at the stars every night for a few 
minutes or more before going to bed. Be totally in your eye while 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


stargazing. 'Drink' the light from the stars, absorb their energy. 
This will have a strong influence on the quality of your awareness, 
not only during night practice but throughout the night. 
Basically, if you find it difficult to maintain vigilance during 
sleep, it is due to the weakness of your astral body, and to a lack 
of bridges between the astral and physical layers. Therefore, 
before starting your night journey, it helps to saturate your 
consciousness with an extremely sharp and refined astral energy: 
that of the stars. 

Every so often during night practice, and particularly when you 
feel that you are going to lose consciousness, don't hesitate to call 
the energy of the stars to your rescue. It can help to recall the 
images of constellations that you were looking at before going to 
bed. Tap from their energy. 

To conclude this section: your capacity to retain a conscious 
awareness during sleep depends on how much your subtle bodies 
are built up. It is therefore the whole process of inner alchemy, 
and not only night practice, that is needed to reach higher stages 
of psychic sleep. It is wise to accept that it will take some time 
and practice before you can remember all the journeys of the 
night when waking up in the morning. 

15.11 Taking the night at both ends 

The work on psychic sleep does not only take place at the 
beginning but also at the end of the night. The purpose of night 
practice is to maintain waking awareness in your sleep. The 
purpose of the 'morning work' is to remember as much as possible 
of your dreams and astral journeys in your daytime consciousness. 
Here are a few suggestions for working in this direction: 

15.12 Morning sharing 

If you sleep in the same room as a spouse/friend, tell each other 
what happened during the night as soon as you wake up. Do it as 
soon as possible, while still in bed and the remembrance is still 
easy. You will see that you tend to remember much more if you 
know you will systematically be sharing in the morning. It will 
motivate your subconscious to retain more memory of the 
experiences of the night. 

If there are children around you, get them to tell you their 
dreams as soon as you greet them in the morning. 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


15.13 A symbol used as a bridge 

During your night practice in the evening, before sleep make a 
strong resolution that the first thing you will do when recovering 
consciousness in the morning will be to try and remember what 
happened in the night. A good method is to choose a symbol (such 
as a star, a pentagram, or anything you judge appropriate) and to 
try at any cost to be aware of the symbol at the very moment of 
falling asleep and immediately when waking up. As soon as you 
recover your first thread of waking consciousness in the morning, 
recall the symbol. This creates a bridge between the two instants. 

15.14 Keep recalling your dreams across the buffer zone 

Sleeping Intemediary Waking 


A B 

Al A2 A3 

The limit between being asleep and being awake is more like a space 

than a line. 

In the morning you first recover your consciousness in A, let us 

say. You may not be aware of it, but you will have to cross the 

whole space between A and B before you are fully awake. It 

happens automatically and unconsciously. Most people never notice 


Now suppose you remember a dream or an astral journey in A. By 

the time you reach B, you are very likely to have forgotten it 

again. So that, to bring memories back with you into the waking 

state, you have to recall them a few times as you are crossing the 

buffer-zone. You will have to remember first in A, then in Al, 

then in A2, then in A3, then in B. 

Remember your dreams immediately, as soon as you recover a bit 

of waking consciousness. Otherwise you will end up in A3 or even 

in B without noticing it, and it will already be too late, everything 

having been forgotten. 

For the same reasons, remain extremely motionless in bed when 

you recover consciousness. By changing position you speed up the 

transition from A to B. As soon as your thread of conscious 

awareness is recovered in the morning, do not move and try to 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


remember anything you can. 

15.15 Use the memory of the third eye 

Here is a way of avoiding the hassles of the former 
recommendations and still remembering all that is important. 
As you develop your subtle bodies you will realize that you start to 
access a new form of memory: that of the eye. A number of 
things that have been completely forgotten by your conscious 
mind can be recalled immediately when you tap from the memory 
of your eye. 

This leads us to separate two memories: that of the mind, and that 
of the eye. Interestingly enough, they do not register the same 
things. For instance, the memory of the eye remembers auras. If 
you have seen an aura ten years ago, you can recall it instantly, 
just by tuning into the memory of the eye. This memory is much 
more reliable than the mental one. Maybe because it does not 
depend on the brain cells, the memory of the eye never forgets 
anything. And unlike the memory of the mind, the memory of 
the eye is completely effortless, things come back to you 

As far as nights are concerned, the mind tends to remember 
dreams, while the eye remembers astral travels and experiences of 
consciousness. So this memory of the eye is the true solution to 
the very common problem of 'morning amnesia'. 
Unfortunately, there is no simple formula that can be applied to 
develop access to the memory of the eye. It comes as a result of 
the whole process of inner alchemy. But the point is, this memory 
of the eye is already present in many people. The problem is that 
they just don't think of tapping from it. When they have to 
remember something they search in their mind and don't even 
think of trying to remember from their eye. 

So, every morning go into your eye and try to remember from 
there. It will be like doing an aura reading of your night. If you 
live with somebody, you will discover that once you can remember 
your night experiences from your eye, you can also see what 
happened to them that night. As discussed before, the perceptions 
of the third eye are not confined to the limits of your skin. 

15.16 If you can never remember anything 

Wait for your next holidays and then, for five consecutive nights 
or so, wake up after each dream and note down everything you 


Chapter 1 5 - Night Practice 3: The Whys and Hows of the 


can remember. Keep a notepad, pen and torch by your bed. For 
some people it is enough to make a strong resolution before falling 
asleep in order to wake up after each and every dream. If this is 
not the case, then get an electronic watch to beep and wake you up 
every hour. 

If you have to spend a night on a train or in any situation where 
you have to doze rather than sleep, don't miss the chance of noting 
down all your dreams one after the other. 

15.17 Variation for acupuncturists 

Practitioners of acupuncture, Shiatsu and other areas of oriental 
medicine will find it valuable to incorporate a phase of awareness 
of the meridians, between phase 2 (circulation through the body 
parts and the organs) and phase 3 (awareness of the breath). This 
additional phase on the meridians is similar to the work of channel 
release (Chapters 4 and 6), but without any rubbing, since the body 
remains completely motionless from the beginning to the end of 
night practice. If time is limited, then do the circulation of phase 
2 only once. 

In each meridian, first try to sense the vibration or tingling, 
which is nothing other than the perception of the ql or etheric 
energy. Then try to perceive the flow of the vibration in the 
meridian (it does not always flow in the direction indicated in the 
Chinese books!) Then try to activate the flow by moving energy 
consciously along the line of the meridian, according to the 
technique of the 'little hands' described in section 4.10. 
As far as the sequence of the meridians is concerned, follow the 
traditional order of the circulation of energy: Lung, Colon, 
Stomach, Spleen, Heart, Small Intestine, Urinary Bladder, Kidney, 
Heart Constrictor, Triple Warmer, Gallbladder, Liver. Finish with 
Conception, Governor and ultimately the central chimney of the 
chong mai, which bears similarities to the Indian susumna, the 
central channel in the middle of the body as it is developed in 
Kundalini-yoga and Kriya-yoga. As the anatomical paths of the 
meridians are described in all the acupuncture books, interested 
readers are referred to the literature on the subject. 


Chapter 16 - Complementary Techniques 

16.1 Neti 

In the ancient Sanskrit treatises of Hatha-yoga, several techniques 
of inner purification are described. A group of six of them are 
called the sat karman, or 'six actions', which are: 

— neti, a purification of the nasal cavity 

— dhauti, purification of the stomach 

— basti, a variation of an enema 

Apart from their local action, dhauti and basti are cleansers of the 
earth and water elements throughout the body. 

— trattaka, gazing at a candle or a minute object (see 5.6) 

— nauli, in which the two abdominal muscles recti abdominis are 
contracted one after the other, thereby giving an impression of 
rotation. Naull is a strong stimulant of the abdominal fire, and of 
the fire of the body in general. 

— kapalabhati, made of a short but intense hyperventilation. 
These techniques do not only purify the physical and subtle bodies, 
they also awaken the body of energy and its centres. Therefore 
they can all be recommended to a sincere seeker. 

Of these six techniques we will dwell on the first one, neti, for it 
has a direct and remarkable action on the awakening of the third 
eye. Apart from its effect on the frontal chakra, neti is also said 
to purify all the channels of energy in the neck and the head, 
thereby having a significant healing action on any disorder located 
in these areas. 

In the traditional way of Hatha-yoga, neti is performed with a 
long-beaked pot called a lota. The lota is filled with salt water. The 
yogis bend their head to one side, and the end of the beak is 
introduced in the nostril on the other side. The water is allowed to 
flow through one nostril and falls out through the other. The 
same operation is then repeated on the other side. 
For our purpose, there is a more efficient way of performing neti 
which does not require a lota (long-beaked pot): 

Take a mug, or even better, a vessel or small bowl that is shorter 
but wider than a mug. Fill it with lukewarm water, about the same 
temperature as inside your mouth. (Use clean, purified water.) Add 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

half a teaspoon of rock salt or sea salt. But do not use fine grained 

table salt, which would irritate your nose. 

Put your nose in the water. Start 'drinking' the salt water through 

your nostrils: draw the water through the nose and let it spill out 

through the mouth. The water goes straight from the nasal cavity 

into the mouth and gets expelled from there. 

The whole operation is quick and not at all uncomfortable. It gives 

a very refreshing and awakening feeling. It generates inner 

clarity, and a sharp perception of energy in the nostrils. 


• One of the secrets is not to take in air while drawing in the 
water. That is why a wider cup is advisable. Otherwise after 
'drinking' a quarter of the mug you start getting as much air as 
liquid, and the result may be slightly irritating to your nose. 

• Another secret lies in the art of drying your nose after you 
have finished expelling the water. Most of the modern treatises on 
Hatha-yoga remain vague and evasive on this topic, advising 
nothing more than blowing your nose. Mistake! If you practise the 
following drying technique you will be surprised to see how much 
more water will be expelled from your nasal cavities, even if you 
have previously blown your nose for a few minutes. 

Stand up with your legs apart and half-bent. Rest your arms on 

your knees. 

Without moving your trunk, throw the head upwards and 

backwards, exhaling violently through the nose at the same time. 

This is done in about half a second, after which a normal 

inhalation follows. 

Then, after half a second of motionlessness, quickly project the 

head downwards, while strongly blowing the air out of your nose. 

Inhale normally. 

Then project the head upwards again, while vigorously blowing the 

air out. Inhale normally. 

Continue like this for half a minute or so, blowing the air out and 

throwing your head up and down alternately. 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

Then repeat the process, but this time turn the head once to the 
right and once to the left. Blow the air out of your nostrils 
vigorously each time you throw the head to the side. 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

(There is no need to blow your nose prior to or after this method 
of drying.) 

• The neti practice should be implemented in the morning, before 
meditating, and therefore before eating. When you are trained, 
you complete it in 2 or 3 minutes, including the drying. 
Practise every morning for about one or two years, and then wait 
a few years before resuming another year of practice. 

• Neti has a sharp invigorating action. It makes you feel acutely 
aware, awake and refreshed. It strengthens the third eye in a 
conspicuous way and stimulates clairvoyant vision. If you can be 
brave enough to overcome the discomfort of the first attempts, 
you will soon enjoy it very much and gain substantial benefits 
from it. 

• Once you have mastered neti, you become able to suppress any 
cold if you happen to catch one. You gain the capacity to adjust the 
energy at the back of your throat in a way that will stop any 
nasal discharge. (The trick works better if you take the cold at its 

However I strongly advise you not to do so! Respect the little 
discharges of the body, do not suppress them. They are a natural 
elimination: they play a role in maintaining the general balance of 
your system. So please put up with the cold and according to one 
of our mottos, 'let it flow'. The modern habit of rushing to a 
health practitioner every time we have a little symptom is childish 
and based on a misunderstanding of the body's economy. In many 
cases minor ailments should be allowed to follow their course. 
Treating minor diseases can sometimes end up creating major ones 
in the long run. 

16.2 The use of rhythms 

In section 11.8 we discussed how the astral body is lacking a sense 
of rhythm. The following suggestions aim at strengthening this 
weak side of your astral body. 

The first advice is to practise your exercises every day at exactly 
the same time. The results of this measure will be out of 
proportion with the effort it will take you to implement it. After 
all, if you devote some time every morning to your meditation, 
does it make such a difference to you whether you start exactly at 
seven, for instance, instead of any time between a quarter to and a 
quarter past? And yet, as far as the results go, it does make a very 
significant difference. Every day your system will automatically 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

start the practices at the given time! Less effort will be needed to 
reach the meditation state, and the experiences of consciousness 
will be significantly deeper. Apart from these simple results, the 
meditation and other exercises will have a much greater impact on 
your astral body. 

Regularity has an unexpectedly potent action on the astral body, 
reinforcing its whole structure. Imagine a ship with a leakage in 
the hull. You can try to make all sorts of improvements to the 
boat: get better sails, add an engine... these will speed up the ship. 
But fixing the leakage will have an even more direct action, since 
it corrects a basic weakness in the boat. This is exactly what you 
achieve when you work at reinforcing the astral body's sense of 

You can potentize your practices even further by preceding them 
with a particular sequence of actions. For instance washing your 
hands, going to the toilet, taking a shower — whatever you want, 
but always in exactly the same order. Do exactly the same 
movements, one after the other, morning after morning, and 
something will coagulate in the structure of your astral body. It 
will also help if you instigate another similar sequence of actions 
every evening before your night practice. 

The more the astral body gets involved in these actions, the more 
efficient the exercise becomes. This means you have to perform 
each operation in full awareness, completely in your eye, putting 
all of yourself in the action — even if it is something apparently 
insignificant such as washing your hands or drinking a glass of 
water. Implement any single movement 'with intention', never 
automatically. More than aware, be awake! 


The night is yin, the day is yang, and what is twilight? Beyond 
the pair of opposites, twilight is a time for transcendence: 
awareness of the Self. Sunrise and sunset should be regarded as 
precious moments in which a very special energy is available for 
spiritual awakening. 

It is not very difficult to find out the times of sunrise and 
sunset, as they are indicated in most newspapers. These times vary 
little from one day to the next, so it is enough to get them once 
or twice a week. Anyway twilight is not a punctual instant but 
more a span of a few minutes. 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

It is of great spiritual value to tune in and be aware in the eye and 
in the heart, at least every evening at sunset (if your schedule 
makes it difficult to be awake at sunrise). You do not have to stop 
your activities, just tune in. Try to be in harmony with the very 
special energy of twilight, and let it work on you. 

New Moon and Full Moon 

Similarly, the nights of the New Moon and Full Moon have an 
energy which can facilitate great inner shifts. Once more, 
particular vigilance should be maintained at these times. 

16.3 Fasting for openings 

If your perception is completely blocked, if you never see or feel 

anything even though you are practising regularly, then the 

answer could be fasting. I have seen a number of students who 

achieved remarkable shifts and openings by fasting for a few days. 

Another good indication for fasting is when you are working on a 

particular blockage that never seems to yield or respond to your 


You don't necessarily have to undertake a drastic fast. First try 

two or three days on juices, or on (organic) fruits only: this is 

often enough to start getting things moving. Eating only fruits 

one day a week can also be a good way of supporting the process of 


A longer and more intense fast can also be quite valuable, but it is 

preferable to discuss the matter with a naturopathy-oriented 

health practitioner first. 

16.4 Proper management of sexual energies 

The Taoists have designed many techniques of inner alchemy and 
longevity based on a particular management of sexual energy. 
These techniques can make a substantial difference to your health 
condition and to the process of development of your subtle bodies. 
I therefore recommend them as a valuable complement to the 
methods indicated in this book. 

16.5 Vaccinations 

According to homoeopaths, vaccinations favour what they call the 
'sycotic miasm'. The sycotic miasm is a condition of energy in 
which, among other things, the rational mind is rigidified, to the 
detriment of intuition. Sycotic tendencies are at the very opposite 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

of the opening required to develop clairvoyant perception. If you 
feel completely blocked it could be valuable to visit a homoeopath 
and ask advice on the subject. 

Seen from clairvoyant vision, vaccinations appear potentially far 
more toxic than present scientific authorities seem to believe. My 
prediction is that a number of manipulations of the human 
physiology which are presently implemented could one day prove 
to be more disastrous to humankind than atomic weapons, by 
causing a dilapidation of the genetic capital, large-scale infertility, 
and a complete collapse of the immune system. Could it be that 
vaccinations are introducing a seed for a collapse of our immune 
system? The question should at least be asked, and seriously 

16.6 Telephone 

Each time the telephone rings, instead of rushing, remain very 
quiet inside for one or two seconds and try to feel who is calling. 
Be careful not to let your rational mind interfere by making 
'clever' deductions. Tust become empty and receptive for a short 
while. Make this technique an effortless habit: practise it 
systematically. (Sticking a reminder on the telephone usually 
helps.) It will not cost you any extra time in your day. The same 
practice can be extended to other situations of daily life. For 
instance, each time somebody enters your house, tune in and try 
to 'see' who it is. 

With the telephone this practice will be of a different nature, for 
the following reasons: seen from a clairvoyant eye, a telephone call 
is a curious melange of consciousness and an electromagnetic signal. 
The two get mingled into a wave, not unlike the manipulations of 
radionics. The telephone call is not only a signal carried by an 
electric current. A wave is generated in a particular astral layer, 
and the electric signal is but an outer manifestation of this wave. 
That is why some healers can be so efficient when helping a 
patient over the telephone: the telephone wave carries their 
psychic impulse. That is also why you sometimes feel so scattered 
after a telephone call, because a lot of emotional negativity can be 
conveyed to you through the astral layer of communication. 
I predict that in the coming centuries some human beings will 
develop amazing psychic capacities by using electronic devices (or 
the scions of our present electronic devices). Not all human beings, 
but some particular schools will work at using electromagnetism 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

and other technologies to amplify their psychic powers. They will 
connect their nervous system to strange machines, which will 
result in a monstrous bio-electronic symbiosis. Neuro-cybernetics 
will become a path of consciousness, and dark forces will try to 
take advantage of the powers it bestows. This will eventually be 
used as a major form of warfare. 

A group of souls are presently being trained, who will reincarnate 
with the particular purpose of fighting the dark forces that will 
be manipulating the radionics field. This astral layer will have to 
be thoroughly cleared, a task similar to the clearing of the Augean 
stables by Hercules. 

The battles will be incredibly violent, though of quite a different 
nature from the present forms of warfare. And the victory of 
the forces of light will depend on the support and integrity of a 
large number of human beings. A number of those who are 
reading this book will be involved in that war, directly or 
indirectly, and the soul forces that they are presently developing 
through their spiritual practice will prove essential in deciding 
which side will be victorious. 

16.7 Moxas on bai hui (Governor 20) 

Moxas are sticks in the shape of a cigar filled with a herb called 

mugwort (Artemisia Vulgaris). You can find them in Chinese shops. 

They are used in acupuncture to apply a soft warmth onto points, 

instead of needling them. 

The acupuncture point bai hui, or Governor 20, is at the back of 

the top of the head. 

To find it, take the axis of the ears, and extend it upwards in an 

arc, following the scalp. Bai hui is located where the two arcs join, 

at the top and the back of the head. To use moxas you do not need 

a very precise location of the point. 

Light the moxa with a candle. Hold it about one inch or so above 

the point. The person should feel a soft, comfortable warmth. If 

no warmth is felt, move the moxa closer. If it starts to become too 

hot, move the moxa a little further away. No burning sensation 

should be felt at any stage of the practice. Keep warming up the 

point gently for 5 to 10 minutes. Don't forget to remove the ashes 

from the moxa from time to time, or they might fall and burn 

your friend's head. 

When finished, there is a special way of extinguishing the moxa. 

Being very thick, it can't be treated like a cigarette butt. You have 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

to put the burning tip of the moxa into the earth in order to 
smother it (in a pot-plant, for instance.) 

Moxas on bai hui draw energies upwards, slightly release the astral 
body from the etheric, and the etheric from the physical. The 
etheric body is not completely withdrawn from the physical of 
course, but becomes slightly less impacted. This creates a 
temporary situation that is favourable for subtle perceptions. 
I do not recommend that you use moxas on bai hui on a regular 
basis, but that you experiment with it from time to time, to give 
a boost to your vision (for instance, before doing eye-contact). 
Moxas should not be used when the weather is too hot, to avoid an 
accumulation of heat in the body. 

16.8 Pony tail 

Another interesting way of stimulating bai hui (Governor 20) and 
the crown chakra is to tie a tuft of your hair in the same area 
(figure in section 16.7). This custom was practised by monks of 
various origins. Others have shaved this part of the skull to 
enhance their receptivity to higher worlds, but this is not so 
convenient if you live in the world! 

You will be surprised to see how the pony tail in the area of bai 
hui immediately enhances the energy of your crown chakra. It is a 
minor but beneficial complement that can be used when you are on 
a retreat and practising non-stop. 

16.9 Blind walking 

Put on a blindfold and get somebody to guide you on a walk 
through the countryside. 


Chapter 1 6 - Complementary Techniques 

The exercise provides an occasion for relying mainly on your eye 

to sense and explore your environment. 

It is also quite interesting for developing trust. 


Chapter 17 - Protection 

Protection level 1: Reinforcing the structure 

17.1 Simple things first 

Knowing how to preserve your energies and protect yourself from 
negative influences is certainly an important chapter. But before 
going into techniques and into esoteric anatomy, let us dwell on a 
few basic facts: the healthier and more balanced you are, the more 
protected you are. This is simple, but nevertheless very true. 
So the first recommendations for protecting yourself will be 
related to a healthy lifestyle. You would be quite misled if you 
overlooked them because they sound so un-metaphysical. Without 
this healthy lifestyle to sustain your foundations, other methods 
of protection will not be very efficient, and anyway your general 
process of development will be drastically slowed down. 
Let us review this general advice. 

17.2 Get enough sleep and rest 

It is when you are tired that you tend to catch negative energies. 
In a state of fatigue, your energy potential is low, you are 
'empty', and this emptiness creates a favourable field for the 
penetration of all sorts of undesirable energies. 
In traditional Chinese medicine, lack of sleep is said to exhaust and 
damage the kidney. Much more than a simple filter, the kidney is 
seen in acupuncture as the reservoir of the deepest vitality, called 
the jing, or quintessence of qi. The qi is the etheric, or life force. 
The jing is the quintessence of the life force, similar to the ojas of 
the Indian tradition and close to the quintessence sought by the 
alchemists. When your jing, or quintessence, is strong, you don't 
have to worry too much about preserving your energies. Of course 
you should always take precautions, follow the techniques, etc. Yet 
if for some reason you were to catch a negative energy, your 
general vitality would be such that it would not be too difficult to 
get rid of it, either on your own or with the help of an expert. 
But if your jing/ quintessence is weak or exhausted, not only will 
you catch negative energy after negative energy, but their 
removal will not be simple. 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

So if you want to undergo a process of esoteric development, the 
first recommendation is to have a good routine allowing enough 
sleep and rest. If you implement our techniques of night practice, 
it is unlikely you will have any difficulty falling asleep. 
By the way, have you ever heard of an animal going a whole day 
without a period of rest? Whenever you can, don't hesitate to do a 
short night practice during the day too, for instance after 
arriving home from work. 

17.3 The right diet 

I won't insist on factors such as the superiority of organically 
grown products, etc. They are important, and you don't need ESP 
to find abundant literature on the subject. I will just attract your 
attention to a few points. 

• Beware of unbalanced diets, such as only raw vegetables or 
nothing other than brown rice for weeks. For example, there is a 
way of misunderstanding macrobiotics that can lead to a very 
unbalanced intake with catastrophic consequences. When continued 
over a long period of time, a diet that does not give you what 
your body needs leaves you weak and exposed to negative energies 
and influences. 

• A regular routine of meal times has an unexpectedly strong 
effect in reinforcing your astral body and your general vitality 
(see section 16.2). 

• Your state of awareness and focus in the eye while eating may 
greatly enhance the spiritual value of your meal and your opening 
of perception. Eating with perception is a completely different 
experience (see section 11.8). 

• Some foods have an action that stimulates subtle perception. Raw 
carrots, for example (not so much cooked ones). Others such as 
beetroot have the power to stimulate the action of the Ego on the 
physical body. Some spices have traditionally been used for 
protection, such as garlic. The action of all of these will be greatly 
enhanced if you tune into their energy. Use your perception to 
discover what is good for what. 

• Does one have to be vegetarian to become enlightened and 
clairvoyant? Certainly not! Tibetan masters eat meat. (There was no 
way to grow crops on the mountains of Tibet.) However, most 
westerners do consume too much meat. If you eat meat, it is 
preferable to have it for lunch rather than dinner, to secure a 
better quality of psychic sleep. 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

• The main advice is: follow your sensitivity rather than any 
dogma (dogma is certainly not what is lacking in the field of 
nutrition!) If you listen to your body and if you watch the results 
of different foods on your state of consciousness, you will learn 
to discern what should be favoured or avoided. As you proceed on 
the path of opening, your taste will change by itself. Among other 
things it is very likely that you will naturally decrease your 
consumption of meat. 

17.4 The right physical exercise 

Techniques such as Hatha-yoga, for instance, go very well with an 
inner path. So do certain forms of martial arts, such as Aikido. 
People who have gained some mastery in a martial art usually do 
not have much difficulty protecting themselves when they 
undergo psychic training. 

Gardening or a bit of hard work on the land are wonderful 
activities for psychics: the more your feet are grounded in the 
earth, the more safely your head can wander in the stars. 

17.5 Be happy! 

Sadness and depression tend to make you empty and weak. A joyful 
mood is already a form of protection in itself. Cultivate laughter 
and if you are a therapist, make your patients laugh. If your 
spiritual path does not lead to joy, then change your spiritual path. 

17.6 Alcohol and spiritual work — a dangerous mixture 

I would never advise anybody to smoke, but it is a fact that one 

can go quite a long way spiritually and still be addicted to 

cigarettes. Tobacco generates negative vibrations, but its action is 

not lethal to spiritual life. 

Alcohol, on the other hand, can very quickly lead to disaster if one 

is learning to explore non-physical worlds. Alcohol automatically 

connects you with areas of the lower astral that are full of noxious 

entities. Therefore alcohol should be avoided at any cost, as soon as 

one starts to work on the third eye. 

Tranquillisers, neuroleptics and other psychiatric drugs disconnect 

you from higher worlds and negate the action of the work of 


Hard drugs, such as heroin, are totally incompatible with inner 

work, their effect being similar to alcohol but much worse. 

Trying to open perception while living in the same house as a 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

heroin addict is like smoking cigars inside a petrol refinery: 

What about other drugs? I could tell you the usual things: They are 
never necessary. They create scars and introduce toxins in the 
etheric and the astral — not only in the physical. If some can force 
an opening of perception, this opening is transient, uncontrolled, 
completely unprotected, and most often twisted. Even marijuana, 
when taken regularly, tends to make your astral body dull and 
unresponsive. And so on... All sorts of facts that you have 
probably heard before. 

However, it seems to me that the real answer to the question of 
drugs is that by developing your subtle bodies you will gain the 
capacity to be intoxicated without the need for any substance. A 
true seer is somebody who is permanently intoxicated with what 
he or she receives from the universe and beyond. You would be 
quite misled to believe that this is just an image and that it should 
not be taken too literally. Tust wait till you drink your first drop 
of the nectar of immortality! It will leave you laughing and 
rolling on the floor for half an hour. Truly. And it is excellent 
for your health. 

Tune in above the head and you can be instantly stoned (but not 
dull). Open your heart, and you have ecstasy. The company of 
angels bestows secondary benefits much sweeter than chocolate. 
Reach the Spirit of Life, the glorious transformed etheric body, 
and you will have the absolute heroin... On a simple level, several 
techniques of this book when practised — not even mastered, just 
practised — generate an instant flow of endorphins. It is one of 
the dramas of the men and women of our civilisation to mistake 
drug ingestion for intoxication, and more generally to search 
outside for what is already waiting for them inside. 

Protection level 2: Correct management of energies 
17.7 Choose your colours 

Wear the right clothes: find out which colours suit and nourish 
your energy. 

If a surface appears white, it is because it does not keep any colour 
vibration at all, but reflects all of them. So the reason white 
stands for purity can be easily understood. White is the reflector 
par excellence. It sends everything back, it does not retain 
anything. And this does not only apply to colours, but to 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

vibrations in general. White is the symbol of what remains 
untouched by external influences. Consequently, if you are in a 
context where you really need protection, there is no better colour 
to wear than white. It is not by chance that in hospitals the 
medical staff wear white or that babies are traditionally clothed in 

On the other hand if a surface appears black, it is because it 
reflects none of the colour vibrations. Black retains everything, it 
is an absorbing principle. Hence black is the most absurd colour for 
funerals: it attracts all sorts of dark moods, energies and 
influences just when you need extra protection. In certain 
contexts, black garments can literally act as a vacuum-cleaner for 
bad vibrations. Therefore whenever you practise massage or any 
form of therapy, whenever you deal with sick people or go to 
doubtful places, black should be avoided. The same applies when 
your vitality is low, when you are tired or depressed. The more 
you become sensitive to energies, the more you should have a 
really good reason for wearing black. 

These considerations do not only apply to clothes, but also to your 
walls. Energy-wise, dark hues make it difficult to keep a room 

17.8 Find your spot 

The knowledge of earth lines will be a great help in protecting 
yourself. Sitting or lying on an earth line makes you vulnerable to 
undesirable influences. On the other hand, if you can find an 
energy well in the room where you conduct your activities and sit 
there, a great deal of the protection business is achieved naturally. 
If you are a therapist, be very careful of the quality of the room 
where you are working: it is usually in bad places that big 
problems arise. 

17.9 How to purify a room 

If the place has had awful vibrations ever since it was built, my 
advice is to give up. Find another place. A certain percentage of 
houses on the market are unfit for human habitation and that is 
the architects' fault, not yours. Often just by building the house a 
few metres away, all the problems could have been avoided. But 
once the house is in the wrong place, there is not much you can 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

Now, what if a room once had a reasonably good atmosphere and 
suddenly its vibrations were spoiled? Here are a few suggestions to 
restore the quality of energy. 

• Burn incense and candles intensively on the crossings of the 
earth lines for a few days. Traditionally, the Chinese used to put 
bags of rock salt in the corners of the room and to 'beat' the 
walls, as if to erase their memory (this can easily be done with a 
large towel). 

• Another trick is to use a heater and make the room as warm, 
and then as cold as possible, alternating every few hours. This is a 
process similar to the one for purifying your hands, in which you 
use hot and cold water alternately. 

• If none of this works, it is likely that your room has caught an 
entity, meaning an undesirable non-physical presence, like a 
parasite. Then it is better to seek recourse to an experienced 

When you move into a new house it is always a good idea to paint 
the walls, getting rid of old wallpaper, and to implement some of 
the above-mentioned measures to get rid of your predecessors' 

17.10 Work in harmony with the Moon cycle 

Energy varies, according to a number of cycles. The most obvious 
is the cycle of the Moon. By developing your sensitivity it will 
become clear to you that your energy feels different around the 
New Moon and around the Full Moon. Around the New Moon 
everything becomes internalised and quiet; it is the time of the 
deepest withdrawal. Around the Full Moon there is a kind of 
explosion of the energy. The fairies become manic, and all the 
little elemental beings in nature are fully active. There are 
variations from one Moon cycle to another, depending on other 
factors, but a few basic recommendations can be given. 
The day of the Full Moon is a very good day to meditate, to tune 
into your guides, to have spiritual realisations... but it is a bad day 
for sex. Moreover, in acupuncture it is said that one should not use 
any needles on the day of the Full Moon, nor get involved in any 
intense manipulation of energy (such as surgery or going to the 
dentist), otherwise the body will be harmed. On that day all 
energies are intensely externalised, and therefore one should 
remain gentle and contained, to avoid energy leakages. 
Hyperactivity or trauma could exhaust your pool of deep energies. 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

17.11 Frequent use of running water 

In section 4.12 we described an important technique to get rid of 
negative energies by washing your hands in a flow of running 
water. Use it! As soon as you feel a wrong energy in your hands, 
don't hesitate to clear it with water. If you systematically do so, 
you will develop a greater sensitivity, and you will become aware 
of any negative energy as soon as it gets attached to you — which 
will allow you to take measures to remove it before it can 
penetrate in depth. 

As you develop your awareness of energies, an essential function 
arises in the etheric body: excretion. Presently, most people are 
hardly aware of the movements inside their etheric, and are 
unable to expel an energy at will. Yet it is crucial to develop this 
ability, especially (but not only) if you are a healer or therapist of 
any kind. 

17.12 Releasing energies into the elements 

Become motionless and aware of the vibration in the eye. Breathe 

with the throat friction and build up the vibration for 1 or 2 


Then become aware of the vibration all over your body and 

connect it with your eye. Use the throat friction to amplify the 

perception of the vibration throughout the body. In other words, 

become aware of your etheric body as a whole. 

Put your hands and forearms under running water, while 

remaining aware of the vibration all over your etheric body. At 

the same time, open the mouth and exhale with a vigorous throat 

friction, and with intention. Release as much negative energy as 

you can into the flow of running water. 

Repeat the process of etheric excretion, this time using the flame 

of a candle instead of running water. 

Sit in front of a candle flame. Build up the vibration in the eye. 

Become aware of the whole layer of vibration. Use the throat 

friction to enhance the vibration in the etheric layer and its 

connection with the eye. 

Then place your hands on each side of the flame. 

Tune into the fire. The same way as a descending flow of energy is 

associated with the running water, an ascending flow can be 

perceived around the flame. Tune into this flow. While remaining 

aware of your etheric vibration, keep the mouth wide open, exhale 

with a loud throat friction, and with intention. Project any 


Chapter 1 7 - Protection 

negative energy into the ascending flow. Feel your etheric, and 
release all you want to get rid of into the flow. 
Go on for a few seconds, up to one minute. 


• Whenever you are close to a bonfire, do not miss the 
opportunity to implement this technique. A big fire generates an 
energy that is far superior to that of a candle, making it possible 
to reach a high level of purification. 

• The same technique may be applied to releasing energies into the 
wind and into the earth. 

• When angry or agitated, you will benefit from releasing your 
fire and your wind into the earth. Sit on the ground (it has to be 
soil, not concrete!) Tune into the presence of the earth. Feel your 
etheric vibration. Put your palms flat on the ground. Open the 
mouth. Pretend you are a dragon and exhale with a loud friction, 
and with intention. Release. 

• With the earth element, you will need more time than with the 
fire, at least a few minutes. 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

18.1 The fight or flight reaction 

Before going through techniques of protection, it may be 
interesting to have a look at what nature does when she wants us 
to be protected. What is the natural reaction when the life of a 
human being is threatened by great danger? It is the 'fight or 
flight' response, which is mediated through a massive discharge of 
secretions of the sympathetic nervous system, involving the 
adrenal glands. The arterial pressure is increased, the heart beats 
faster and more strongly, and a number of drastic physiological 
changes take place that increase your muscular strength and 
mental activity. Suddenly you are fully awake. 
What does this mean in terms of subtle bodies? Remember what 
we discussed in section 13.5: When the astral body (layer of mental 
consciousness and emotions) is floating, away from the etheric and 
physical bodies, you are asleep or sleepy, or in a deep state of 
meditation. Everything in the physical body is very relaxed and 
the etheric body is dilated and spread out to a certain extent. 
From what we have just described, you can readily conclude that 
exactly the opposite takes place in the fight or flight reaction. The 
astral body is pulled strongly into the etheric and physical bodies 
and exerts its action, which tends to make everything contract. 
Of course, it would not be appropriate to trigger a big shot of 
adrenalin every time you wish to induce psychic protection. Yet it 
is important to notice that in terms of subtle bodies, the natural 
response when physical protection is needed is a vigorous 
impaction of the astral body into the etheric and physical bodies. 

18.2 Sealing the aura: why and when 

We are permanently exchanging energies with our environment, 
the same way as we inhale and exhale air, ingest liquids and 
foodstuff, and pass out urine and stools. In our present framework 
of existence, no life is possible without exchange. But that does 
not mean we should take just anything in. For instance, inhale 
enough carbon monoxide, or swallow just a little cyanide, and your 
physical body is dead! Tust as some physical substances are 
poisonous to the physical body, so some etheric and astral energies 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

are to your subtle bodies. Similarly, just as chronic bleeding 
exhausts the physical body, so a leakage of etheric energy can 
deplete your pool of life force and leave you depressed, tired and 
sick, even if your doctor can't find anything wrong with you. 
For instance, the company of some people leaves you exhausted. 
Spend just half an hour or even less with them and suddenly you 
feel tired and less joyful, if not semi-depressed. You were light 
and now you feel heavy, you were happy and now you feel worn 
out. It is very likely that a drainage has taken place, a sort of 
vampirism of your life force. The whole process is really a waste, 
because usually the person who drains you does not even receive 
the energy that you have lost. It is more a dissipation than a 
transfer that takes place. 

The problem can become drastic for therapists, especially (but not 
only) when physical contact is involved, as in massage, for 
instance. Many people who learn massage and who are quite 
enthusiastic about it in the beginning give it up after two or three 
years of practice, simply because they are not able to protect 
themselves and get too drained. Another high risk situation of 
vampirism is whenever you have to deal with lots of people, for 
instance if you sell train tickets in a station or bread-rolls in a 
shop. The need for a technique to seal your aura is obvious. 
How do you know when you have caught a negative energy? Well, 
that is precisely one of the problems: most people do not notice 
when it happens, because they are completely unaware of their 
energy. You can therefore readily come to the conclusion that 
perception and awareness are the first steps towards real 
protection. If you are not able to sense what takes place in a room 
on the level of energy, you walk through life as if you were 
blindfold, trying to cross a forest full of swamps. So all the work 
that is suggested in this book, from channel release to seeing auras 
and dowsing earth lines, will be the first step towards gaining a 
genuine protection. For instance, some houses that would have 
seemed normal to you in the past will immediately be recognised 
as suspect, as soon as you enter the front door. Then you can be on 
guard, seal your aura and take any other necessary precautions. 

18.3 Opening and closing the aura, introductory practice 

An important skill to develop is the capacity to recognize how 
open or closed your aura is, and later on to modify this balance at 
will. For instance just after a night practice or a deep meditation, 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

or when you are floating and 'spaced out', your aura is very open. 
We have seen earlier that the fight or flight reaction closes your 
energy. However, we are in search of something less clumsy and 
stressful. Here is an exercise to introduce you to the art of sealing 
the aura. 

Phase 1: opening 

Sit in a meditation position on a mat or a chair. Keep your eyes 
closed throughout the practice. Start meditating, going through 
the different phases of the first technique: friction and vibration 
in the throat, vibration in the eye, light in the eye, the purple 
space (section 3.7). 

After 5 or 10 minutes, become aware above the head. Remain 'just 
aware' of the space, floating above the head. Doing nothing, just 
being aware. Let yourself be spread out above the head. 
Then try to sense the limits of your aura. How far does your 
energy extend? Could you sense the presence of objects around you 
(even if you can't see them)? Could you 'touch' them with your 
aura? If there are other people in the room, can you sense their 
presence within your own space? How does your aura mingle with 
the people and the objects around you? Could you even get a sense 
of the walls of the room? How dense does your aura feel? Tune 
into the energy, inside and around your body. Does your energy 
feel thick or sparse? Go on exploring in every direction for a few 
minutes, with an open awareness above the head. 

Phase 2: sealing 

Next, refocus between the eyebrows. Start breathing with a 
marked throat friction, and build up a strong vibration between 
the eyebrows. 

Vibration, light and space in the eye correspond to three levels of 
increasing depth of experience. When you are in the space, you are 
deeper into astral consciousness than when you are seeing colours. 
And when you are seeing colours, you are deeper than when you 
are feeling the vibration. 

Now is the time to awaken an intense vibration in the eye. There 
may be some light, but a thick and intensely vibrating light — not 
an airy-fairy floating one! Don't let yourself fade into the space. 
Rub your hands for a few seconds, then become motionless with 
the palms upwards. Feel the vibration in your hands, as in channel 
release work (Chapters 4 and 6). Connect the vibration in the hands 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

with the vibration in the eye. Rubbing the hands awakens a very 
'physical' and grounded vibration in the eye, which is exactly what 
you want. Maintain the throat friction to benefit from its 
amplifying effect. Then try to feel the same intense vibration all 
over your body. 

Now, try to get a sense of the limits of your aura again. How far 
do you extend? Can you still feel the limits of the room? Can you 
still 'touch' other people and objects inside the room with your 

Then sense the density of your aura. Become aware of the energy 
inside and outside your physical body. Is it as fluid as before? 
Spend one or two minutes exploring, keeping a strong vibration in 
the eye and the throat friction. 


• It is a very common experience, when going through this 
practice, to feel one's aura much wider, more open and diluted in 
the first phase. In the second phase, the aura is perceived as 
smaller, thicker and closed to external influences. In the second 
phase you can no longer feel the limits of the room, or 'touch' 
other people or objects with your aura, simply because your aura is 
more compacted and does not extend as far as before. Obviously in 
the first phase your aura is more open than in the second. 
Another sensation can arise when your aura is fully open: it is not 
uncommon to feel higher up, as if above your body. You may also 
have the feeling that your energy is elongated upwards and 
stretched like a marshmallow. 

When the aura is closed and gathered, you will sometimes get the 
feeling that your body wants to bend forwards, rounding the back 
with the shoulders forward. 

How does this mechanism of closing and opening the aura work? It 
is nothing other than a practical demonstration of the contracting 
power of the astral body. In the first phase, when you are floating 
in the space, when you can hardly feel your physical body, your 
astral body is half inside, half outside the etheric and physical 
bodies. How far away your astral body may go depends on how 
deeply you can meditate. In some states of profound meditation, 
similar to the samadhi states of the Indian tradition, you are 
completely out. Another situation of complete withdrawal takes 
place when you have built your subtle vehicles to the point of 
being able to astral travel. 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

On the other hand, when you awaken a strong physical vibration 
in the eye, when you can feel the vibration flowing in your hands 
and all over the body, it is just the opposite that takes place. Your 
astral body is fully impacted into the etheric and physical bodies. 
Therefore, due to the contracting action of the astral body, your 
aura is sealed, much more impermeable to external influences. (This 
allows you to understand clearly why it is so difficult to fall 
asleep when experiencing a strong vibration in the eye.) 
Now, let us be very clear on one point. I am not suggesting that 
one of the two conditions of energy, either the open or the closed 
one, is superior to the other. Saying this would be like supporting 
the idea that sleeping is superior to being awake, or vice versa. 
These are two phases of existence, each as indispensable as the 
other. Life cannot blossom without the alternating succession of 
sleeping and waking, and the master is the one who can sometimes 
be completely open and sometimes completely closed. 
However, there are times when one of these two conditions is 
inappropriate. For instance, if you fall asleep every time you 
arrive at work, and if you are wide awake as soon as you get into 
bed, you are in trouble. Similarly, if you allow your aura to be too 
open when you are waiting in a packed railway station or visiting a 
friend in a hospital, you may catch all sorts of negative influences. 
You may even get sick in an insidious way, for there may be quite 
a long delay between the energy contamination and the onset of 
the disease, so that you won't be able to make the connection 
between the cause and the effect. A basic principle is: 
Whenever you need protection, be completely inside your body, 
not floating above! 

18.4 Protection through being in the eye 

At this stage a commonly-held false notion should be corrected. 
You may have heard people comment on how a psychic opening 
may leave you more vulnerable to negative energies and influences. 
If you are following a complete training, in which you learn to 
close your energy as well as open it, there is nothing more false. 
The very opposite takes place! Due to your increased perception you 
can immediately detect when protection is needed. Due to your 
mastery of energy you can achieve such protection by sealing your 
aura. Moreover, the more you progress the more the sealing of 
your aura tends to take place automatically as soon as your Higher 
Self senses a possible negative energy approaching your field. So 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

you end up being naturally protected from all sorts of negative 
energies which the man in the street unconsciously catches all the 

Of course, if you are following a teaching that shows you only 
how to open your aura and to float above, then you may become 
more vulnerable. This may be the case if you are trying to become 
a trance-medium psychic and make yourself 'transparent' so you 
can pick up ideas and trends of influence. This can also be the case 
if you are following a spiritual path in which everything is 
designed to unground you: eating very little and very light foods, 
waking up before dawn (so you remain half asleep during the 
whole day), cultivating an airy-fairy state of mind. Such methods 
may be appropriate if you are withdrawn from the world, living 
in a monastery or meditating in a cave. But unless you spend your 
life in a secluded environment, they leave you unprotected and 

The Clairvision techniques have been designed for those who live in 
the world. That is one of the reasons why the very first technique 
of this book aims at awakening the vibration in the third eye. By 
learning to maintain a permanent vigilance in the eye, you build 
up a wonderful shield against negative energies and you develop 
your sensitivity and your intuition at the same time. 

18.5 The will centre 

There is a centre of energy located approximately one inch below 
the navel that is of great value whenever you need protection. It 
corresponds to the area of the acupuncture points Conception 5 and 
Conception 6, and is related to the hara where one learns to 
concentrate energy in martial arts. 

If you search with your fingers about one inch below the navel, 
you will find a depression, like a notch right in the middle of the 
abdominal wall. The will centre is more or less centred around this 
notch. The notch is sometimes felt more easily when you contract 
the abdominal muscles. If there is too much fatty tissue in the 
area it becomes very difficult to feel the notch. 
What are the functions of this centre? It is a place in which an 
extraordinary potential of energy is stored. For instance, the 
Chinese name for the acupuncture point Conception 6 is qi hal, 
which means the 'sea of energy'. Through proper training this 
energy may be made available to the physical body. 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

Another essential function of this centre is physical grounding. 
The name of the point Conception 5 is shi men, meaning the 'gate 
of stone'. This is the foundation stone upon which everything can 
be established, the same way as Peter was the rock upon which the 
church could be founded (the Greek word for stone is petra). 
The centre below the navel is the will centre. This applies to 
common will, but also to the supernatural will of the wizard who 
can perform actions beyond the normal range of the laws of 
nature. It is also in this area that the Taoist alchemists work at 
structuring the embryo of immortality, a new body made of (non- 
physical) immortal matter, in which they can depart and maintain 
conscious existence after physical death. 

This centre is therefore essential in the work of inner alchemy. 
But apart from alchemy, there are a number of daily life 
circumstances in which you can derive great benefits from 
focussing your awareness in this centre: 

— When you need to be physically strong, to perform a task that 
requires an effort. 

— When you need to be psychologically strong and assertive, when 
negotiating, at an auction for instance. When you need to display 
authority, or to resist the authority of a domineering person. 
When you need to stand up for yourself, to resist aggressive 
people and remain calm at the same time. 

— When you need to protect yourself against negative energies, in 
a hospital for instance, or a similar type of dangerous and highly 
polluted energetic environment. 

— When you are tired and weak. 

— The Taoists also suggest that you should work on this centre to 
restore your energies after having conceived a child, for a man, or 
after having delivered the child, for a woman. 

Let's now look at practices to awaken and strengthen the will 

18.6 Practice 

Sit in a meditation position. When working at developing the 

centre below the navel, a good posture is to sit on your knees, 

with your buttocks on your heels, or with your buttocks between 

your heels, in which case the posture becomes the vajrasana of 


But the practice can very well be performed while sitting on a 

chair, provided you keep your back straight. 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

Slightly contract the abdominal muscles and 

massage the point one inch below the navel, 

by rotating the end of the middle finger 

(between the index and the ring finger) in 

the notch, if you can find it, or otherwise 

simply one inch below the navel. Keep on for 

half a minute or so and then release. Then 

try to feel the vibration in the area. 

Rub your hands for a few seconds, then hold 

them flat, one on top of the other, parallel 

to the abdomen 2 or 3 inches away from the 

will centre. 

Start breathing with the throat friction. 

Connect it with the tingling between the 

eyebrows. Build up a strong vibration in the eye for 2 or 3 

minutes. Then, keeping up the throat friction, become aware of 

the vibration in the will centre one inch below the navel, where 

you felt the vibration after massaging. Connect the throat 

friction with the will centre, to build up the vibration. 

Feel the vibration in your hands, and in the will centre. The way 

they are placed, the hands act as reflectors and concentrate the 


Keep on with the practice for a few minutes, reinforcing the 

vibration one inch below the navel, through both the throat 

friction and the reflecting action of your hands. 

18.7 Eye-belly awareness 

Sit in a meditation position with your eyes closed. Start breathing 
with the throat friction, building up the vibration in the eye for 
2 or 3 minutes. Then practise being aware of the vibration, both in 
the eye and in the will centre. Maintain your throat friction to 
enhance the vibration and to connect the two centres. 
In the beginning, some kind of link can be established between the 
two centres. As you proceed further, try to anchor the eye into 
the centre in the belly. Remember: no imagination, no 
visualisation. The experience is quite tangible, as if your eye was 
being grounded, rooted in the vibration of the will centre. 
Continue for a few minutes, building up the vibration in the two 
centres and connecting them. 

Then open your eyes. Start looking at some objects around you, one 
after another. Remain very motionless, aware both in the eye and 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

below the navel. There is the object, there is the fact of seeing, 
and there is the vibration in the eye and below the navel. 
When we were practising looking at objects and being aware in the 
eye, we noticed that a certain centredness would arise 
spontaneously (see section 9.1). Now it is not only centredness but 
also grounding that can be experienced. By being both in the eye 
and in the belly, you automatically feel more solid, more dense, 
less likely to float away with the first puff of wind. It is as if 
you were making a denser hole in the physical space. 


• If practised sufficiently, this technique will put you more in 
touch with your own power. It can be recommended to people who 
suffer from low self esteem and need to develop their 

• I have had encouraging results with these techniques of 
grounding when working with borderline schizophrenics. Due to 
the nature of their disease, certain schizophrenic patients are 
caught up in a turmoil of extrasensory perceptions which are 
sometimes genuine but completely out of control, and therefore 
generating a terrible anxiety, if not panic. By teaching 
schizophrenics how to ground themselves vigorously when they 
sense a flash of delirium approaching, they are sometimes able to 
avoid it and keep their sanity. 

18.8 Walking from the belly 

Re-read section 12.8 for the description of this technique. On the 
basis of the anchoring work we have just done, you should now be 
able to walk from the belly in a much more convincing way. 

18.9 Stimulating the fire 

It is not necessary to be in a meditation position for this 
particular exercise but it is preferable to be seated. As always in 
life, it is better to keep your back straight. Become aware in the 
eye and in the will centre. Become aware of your breath, and 
breathe from the abdomen only. Abdominal breathing means that 
when you inhale and exhale nothing moves in your chest. When 
you inhale, only your abdomen moves forwards, and the ribcage 
remains motionless. 

Remain aware of the breath and for one or two minutes keep 
watching any movement in the trunk, to make sure that nothing 


Chapter 18 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (1) 

moves apart from your abdomen. 

Then proceed in the following way: maintain a purely abdominal 
breathing, without any movement of the chest. But with each 
inhalation, contract the abdominal muscles, operating a counter- 
pressure. Each time you exhale, relax everything. 
Breathe according to your normal rhythm. The intensity of the 
breath is as usual or slightly deeper. 

Each time you inhale, contract the muscles of the abdominal wall, 
and build up the pressure in the belly. While exhaling, relax all 

Remain aware of the vibration in the eye and in the will centre, 
and continue with the same breathing for as long as half an hour, 
or more if you wish. 


• This practice may seem simple yet it can awaken considerable 

• The regular practice of this exercise is recommended to those 
who find it difficult to tap from the assertive energy of their 
will centre. 

• Try this exercise just before an exam, to fight anxiety and to 
awaken the energy you need. 

• It is also remarkably efficient after a heavy meal, or whenever 
you are close to indigestion. On one hand there is a mechanical 
action, like an internal massage, that speeds up the emptying of 
the stomach and bowels. On the other hand there is a powerful 
stimulation of the digestive fire, through an activation of the 
abdominal centres of energy. 


Chapter 19 - Baby Work 

19.1 The aura of a pregnant woman 

The aura of a pregnant woman is one of the easiest to see, for it is 
particularly luminous and full of gold. This explains why a 
pregnant woman often arouses a feeling of respect, if not awe. 
Even though the people around her may not be able to see her aura 
consciously, they unconsciously register some of the golden 
energy and are impressed by it. 

So whenever you find yourself in the presence of a pregnant 
woman take the opportunity to practise the triple process of 
vision. The gold colour in the aura indicates that the pregnant 
woman is intensely connected to high spiritual beings who support 
and foster the embryo. Pregnancy is therefore a privileged time 
for spiritual growth. It is a time to do a lot of meditation and 
enlightening reading, and to work at developing intuition and 
perception. Apart from the fact that the baby is extremely 
sensitive to the mother's thoughts and emotions and influenced by 
them, a spiritual focus during pregnancy can bring about big 
inner shifts in the mother. 

While discussing the energy of pregnant women, let me mention 
the great difficulty there seems to be in finding out the baby's 
sex clairvoyantly. I must say I have seen some great clairvoyants be 
repeatedly confused on this point. One of the reasons is probably 
that you tune into the astral body of the baby, and so what you 
see relates more to the baby's past life than to its present 
incarnation. Thus even if you pick up a clear sex determination, it 
is pretty difficult to know whether it applies to this life or the 
last one. Moreover, souls who incarnate nowadays arrive with much 
more of both polarities, male and female, in their astral body than 
a few centuries ago, which does not simplify the exercise. If you 
want some friendly advice, don't stake your reputation as a 
clairvoyant on a bet like this one. You might very well end up 
being wrong more than 50% of the time! 

19.2 The aura of a newborn baby 

The aura of a newborn baby is intensely luminous. This can be 
partly related to the fact that for a while, the baby keeps some of 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

the light of the angels that have assisted in the process of birth. 
The strong participation of the hierarchy of the angels in all that 
is related to birth makes a delivery a most fascinating experience 
of consciousness. It feeds the spirit of all those who are present. I 
would recommend to all spiritual seekers to seize any opportunity 
to be present at a birth. 

In the process of inner alchemy, when you work at building the 
body of immortality, one of the major problems is that certain 
layers have to be made out of very special (non-physical) matter 
and materials, which cannot be found anywhere in your usual 
astral and etheric environment. If you had just a little of these 
substances, you could make them grow the same way as a crystal 
can grow out of a primary core. But getting this first core is quite 
a difficult task. This is where you have to seek the cooperation of 
certain angels. Being far more advanced, angels' bodies are teeming 
with these substances. If you can tune into them in a certain way, 
the new matter falls into you like the Holy Spirit into the apostles 
at Pentecost. This cannot be improvised, of course. It requires a 
pure heart and a precise technique. But whatever your level may 
be, just a few seconds of closeness to the beings of higher 
hierarchies will prove to be an immense source of inspiration. 
Apart from the touch of the angels, during its first 10 to 15 days 
on Earth the baby is still saturated with effulgent astral 
impressions coming from the journey it has just completed 
through intermediary worlds. These can be perceived as extremely 
vivid images that flow into your consciousness as soon as you tune 
into the child's aura. You receive clear visions of where the baby 
comes from: space, worlds between death and rebirth, and also 
possibly its last incarnation. The baby overflows with astral 
images. All you have to do is tune in and impressions rush into 
your field of vision. 

19.3 Babies are very aware in their eye 

Babies are utterly psychic. A simple and spectacular way to 
convince yourself of this fact is to remain very focussed in your 
third eye while in the company of a baby (less than one year old). 
You will be amazed at how responsive the baby seems to be to any 
message you send through your eye. 

Practise in the following way: each time the baby starts crying or 
expressing some dissatisfaction, go straight into your eye and tune 
into the child. You will be surprised how often you get a clear 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

response: the baby stops screaming immediately and tells you 
what's wrong, directly from eye to eye. Even if the yelling does 
not stop completely, there is a response and the child acknowledges 
that contact has been made. 

Many babies get irritated at not being able to communicate with 
their environment on a psychic level. They try to express a whole 
range of feelings but nobody seems to take any notice. It is quite a 
depressing experience. Any psychologist would be alarmed to hear 
of a child being left deprived of physical contact or stimulation. 
Well, when your vision opens, you immediately realize that is 
exactly what happens to most babies, but on another level. 
So a first step towards a more enlightened way of bringing up 
babies is to maintain the vigilance in your eye and to be receptive 
to any signal they may send you. As soon as the baby sees that you 
respond, greater harmony will develop between you. Furthermore, 
the baby will use its eye more and more to communicate with you. 

19.4 Watching baby fall asleep 

In the chapters on night practice we described how human beings 
cross the critical borderline between waking and sleeping at least 
twice a day and yet do not derive any benefit from it. Living in 
high psychic intensity, babies are more in touch with this 
mystery. Therefore you will gain from being in your eye and in 
your heart and tuning into the baby each time it crosses the 
threshold. Try to sense and participate in the state of 
consciousness experienced by the baby while it falls asleep and you 
will become more familiar with the experience of the threshold. 
When we fall asleep, our astral body (AB) and Ego withdraw from 
the physical body (PB) and the etheric body (EB). The upper 
complex (AB+Ego) detaches from the lower complex (PB+EB). The 
upper complex (AB+Ego) goes off travelling for the night and the 
lower complex (PB+EB) stays in bed. 

But for most adults the upper complex cannot separate fully from 
the lower one. It is like an articulation that gets a bit stiff with 
time. So, unless they become masters in night practice, most 
adults never reach the depth of sleep they used to experience as a 
child. The situation usually goes on deteriorating: old people wake 
up several times a night and rarely feel completely refreshed in 
the morning. This slow separation of the upper complex (AB+Ego) 
from the lower one (PB+EB) explains why it is not so easy to 
observe an adult leaving his body at night. 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

On the other hand, in young children this dissociation is quick and 
intense. Therefore if you apply your vision to a baby falling 
asleep, you will be able to see the upper complex leaving the lower 
one quite clearly. To put it simply, it is strikingly easy to see your 
baby getting out of its body (which is far from being the case 
with adults). 

Babies are remarkably good at astral travelling. As soon as they 
fall asleep they zoom into the space. Due to the intense light that 
pervades their astral body, it is not very difficult to follow them 
clairvoyantly in the first stages of their journey, just after they 
have left their physical body. Each time your baby falls asleep, be 
very tuned in and... see! 

I remember a one-year-old toddler I was minding who used to 
confuse me all the time. I would put him to sleep, which is never 
very easy at that age. I would then tiptoe out of his room, hoping 
he would not wake up too quickly. Often, as soon as I had collapsed 
in an armchair (minding toddlers is a hard job), I would see him 
walking in through the lounge room door. There would be a second 
of "Oh, no! Not again!", and then I would realize that it was not 
the child's physical body but his astral body. Relief! It meant the 
toddler was still sound asleep in his cot. It is actually quite common 
for babies to pop in and say hello just after falling asleep, in the 
very first stage of their astral travelling. And then you either 
lose them or follow them far away, depending on your own talents 
as a traveller. 

It is quite rare to see an adult's astral body so clearly and quickly 
after they fall asleep. The person would have to be remarkably 
trained and their subtle bodies very developed, constructed and 
'crystallised'. Apart from initiates, the separation of the astral 
body of adults during sleep is usually much more gradual and 
somewhat hazy. 

19.5 Your baby as a meditation teacher 

By definition, the physical body is made of physical matter and 
therefore subject to gravity. Gravity is an essential characteristic 
of the physical layer. When you come back from a journey far 
into astral and spiritual planes, feeling this gravity is a sign that 
you are approaching the physical layer. You start feeling heavy, 
and you know you are not far from the physical world. You just 
have to let yourself fall a bit more and you are back into your 
physical body. 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

If babies are so good at astral travelling, it is because their upper 
complex (astral body + Ego) is endowed with a fantastic energy of 
levity, or anti-gravity, that projects them upwards as they fall 
asleep. There is a lot to learn from this upward moving energy 
which is akin to the udana-vayu, highly praised in Sanskrit texts. 
The presence of this levity energy can also be related to the fact 
that babies are saturated with the light of angels. Anti-gravity is 
as natural to angels as gravity is to the physical world. Roughly 
speaking, one could say that one becomes an angel as soon as one 
becomes able to fall upwards. 

To benefit from this very special energy and give a boost to your 
meditation, proceed in this way: When your baby is about to fall 
asleep, hold it in your arms. Let the baby fall asleep on your chest. 
Be aware in your eye and in your heart, as explained throughout 
this book. But don't be too strongly focussed in your eye, for that 
could be too intense for the baby. Tust maintain a soft awareness, 
a slight focus between the eyebrows, and connect with the baby. 
A mingling of energies naturally takes place whenever you hold a 
very young child (up to fifteen months) on your chest. As soon as 
the baby is in your arms, the borderline between its etheric (layer 
of the vibration), and yours is not so clear. Try to become aware 
of this melting process. 

Now, the very moment the baby falls asleep, if you tune into it, 
you too can be projected upwards. This is a great occasion to 
meditate. All you have to do is tune in and let yourself be taken 
up into the light. It's like 'falling upwards' into the light. The 
lifting effect is immediate and creates an expansion of 
consciousness enabling you to reach a high level of meditation. As 
you become more familiar with this energy and learn to flow with 
it, the effect will become clearer and clearer. If you are working 
at astral projection this experience will be of great help. 

19.6 A few words to the travellers 

From what has been said so far, it must already be obvious that if 
astral travelling is one of your great preoccupations in life, there 
is a lot you can learn from babies. 

Human beings are presently in a condition where they are so 
incarnated in their physical body that they are unable to get out 
of it consciously. They are completely stuck by the force of 
gravity. The baby is in the opposite situation: its astral body is 
saturated with forces of anti-gravity. For the baby, it is 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

incarnation that is a problem, so much so that it is unable to stay 
in its body very long. It constantly falls asleep because it is pulled 
up out of its body by the extraordinary levity of its astral body. 
So the motto could be: 'follow the baby!' 

What can be seen clairvoyantly over the body of an adult who is 
sound asleep? A sort of cloudy formation, actually quite easy to 
perceive. (When in the same room as somebody who is asleep, don't 
miss the opportunity to observe them clairvoyantly.) But this 
cloudy formation is not their entire astral body, only a part of it. 
The rest of their astral body is spread out into the astral worlds, 
but this is much more difficult to perceive. For that, you must be 
able to follow the sleeping soul. As we discussed earlier, very 
young children are easier to follow because among other factors, 
they get out of their body fully and instantaneously, whereas 
many adults remain half in and half out, only withdrawing 
gradually from their physical body. 

Practise in the following way: sit comfortably, after putting the 
baby to sleep in its cot. Go into your eye and into your heart, and 
tune into the baby. You have to be very quick and manage to see 
the baby astrally as soon as it gets out. In the first few minutes 
after it falls asleep, you can often see the baby astrally as an exact 
replica of its physical form. Tune into the same particles of light 
as those of the third part of the third eye meditation (section 3.7) 
but this time with your eyes open. Remain very motionless, gazing 
at the cot, blinking as little as possible. 

The baby will remain around you for a few minutes or so, and 
then disappear. That's when you have to be tuned into the baby 
and connected with its anti-gravity force as much as you can. If 
you can manage to resonate with the baby's extraordinary levity 
energy, you will be literally pulled upwards and projected into the 

The next step consists of trying to follow your baby as far as you 
can. Let yourself be carried by the energy around the child and 
feel the quality of the space changing around you as you enter 
different layers and worlds. Being in a half-awake, half-asleep 
state of great tiredness (common to many parents who are woken 
up several times every night by their baby) will actually help 
experiences of travelling. I would not recommend sleep deprivation 
to anyone, but if the parents are already in that state, they might 
as well take advantage of it. 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

Babies will be delighted if you can travel with them. To them, it is 
great fun and also very reassuring to feel a continuity between 
this world and the others, meeting the same people in different 
layers. They also know that if anything goes wrong during the 
night, they can rush to you and get help. 

19.7 How long does it last? 

How long will your child remain psychic? To a certain extent, that 
will depend on how much spiritual work is shared with the baby. 
The more you practise the baby work, the more seeds of spiritual 
awakening are implanted, at this age of maximum receptivity. 
Yet as soon as the child's mental development reaches a certain 
level, psychic abilities begin to diminish. Therefore, as early as 
sixteen or eighteen months, when the child starts uttering a few 
words, a notable drop will be observed. The golden time for 
psychic work with babies is during the first year, or up to 
eighteen months maximum. 

How much of the psychic capacity will be retained during 
childhood and adolescence depends on the nature of the child and 
the quality of home environment and education. Yet I do not think 
that one should fight for the child to remain psychic at any cost. 
Humanity was once very clairvoyant. If you go back as far as the 
beginning of Atlantis, you find that human beings could perceive 
spiritual worlds even more clearly than the physical one. Yet it 
was part of the training of humankind that this atavistic 
clairvoyance should be lost and that dark and disconnected ages 
should come. We are now at the dawn of an age when humanity 
will recover clairvoyant abilities, but on a higher mode, in which 
the Ego will play a direct role. 

Each human being repeats the history of the world, but in a much 
shorter span of time (which makes the study of embryology 
fascinating). Babies arrive on the Earth completely open, bathing 
in the light of the spiritual worlds and hardly aware of the 
physical reality around them. If this cosmic perception were not 
veiled, it would be very difficult for the child to establish 
physical references and become grounded. So to respect the natural 
trend of development, you have to accept that your child becomes 
more 'mental' and less psychic. You may accompany the spiritual 
growth of the child with the proper education but you can't block 
the child from living in the mind. 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

What you help the child develop in the first year will remain like 
a treasure waiting for him or her. All the psychic work achieved 
in infancy will reappear several years later in the adult, 
metamorphosed in the form of intense soul forces. But the 
decision to re-open will have to come from the free will of this 
teenager or adult, not from your own desires. 

19.8 The fabulous babies 

Psychic couples are rare and therefore it is not easy for evolved 
souls to find suitable parents. How do children find their parents? 
The soul floats in the astral and is attracted, as if by a principle of 
similarity, to a particular mother. A kind of resonance takes place 
between the dispositions of the child and those of the parents, and 
that is what creates the attraction for a particular womb. The 
more advanced a soul is, the more selective it becomes in its choice, 
waiting as long as needed to find parents who are evolved enough. 
Consequently, the more spiritual and clairvoyant you become, the 
more chance you have to parent a baby-guru. Like attracts like. 
The Hindu tradition suggests that the spiritual aspiration of the 
mother, before and at the beginning of the pregnancy, is essential 
in determining what sort of soul will incarnate. The spiritual 
vibrations of the mother, if they are genuine and deep, will 
attract a soul with a spiritual direction. It is therefore advised that 
the mother should spend time meditating, and carefully select her 
readings and sources of inspiration. 

Apart from this general principle, my vision is that many 
extraordinary souls have incarnated on Earth during the period of 
the triple astrological conjunction of Saturn, Uranus and Neptune 
that went on and off from 1988 to 1997. These are 'the fabulous 
babies' who are coming to introduce completely new principles in 
the fields of science, arts and spirituality. It can be expected that 
many of them will display exceptional psychic abilities right from 
cot-time, and will continue to do so throughout childhood and 

I foresee that the parents will have to do a lot of work on 
themselves if they want to be of any help to their children, or 
even simply to understand what's happening in their own home. 
These children won't be easy to follow, not only because their level 
of development will be far superior to that of their parents, but 
also because they will come to introduce totally new concepts and 
seeds in the fields of science, arts and spirituality. 


Chapter 1 9 - Baby Work 

Preparing the field for these fabulous babies is one of the main 
reasons the Clairvision School was founded. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

20.1 Where are you speaking from? 

Practice 20.1 consists in producing sounds from specific levels. We 
will start with something very simple: chanting a long 'ooo' sound 
(you can do it while reading this, there is no need to close your 

Phase 1 

Chant the 'ooo' sound and make it resonate in the abdomen, around 
and below the navel. There is a way of producing the sound that 
makes the abdomen vibrate so that both the physical vibration of 
the sound and the etheric vibration (the one we have cultivated in 
the eye and in channel release) can be felt in your belly. 
Continue with a few long 'ooo' sounds, trying to produce vibration 
in your belly and in no other part of the body. 

A simple way of enhancing the vibration is to place your hand 
parallel to your abdomen, 2 or 3 inches away, using it as a 

There is no particular awareness in the eye in this phase, nor in 
phases 2 and 3. 

Phase 2 

Then try to chant a long 'ooo' that resonates only in the chest. The 

pitch does not really matter. Look for a sound that generates as 

much vibration as possible in the chest but in no other part of the 


Use your hand as a reflector, placing it parallel to the middle of 

your chest, 2 or 3 inches away. 

Keep on chanting 'ooo', putting all of yourself into the sound. 

Feel the physical vibration of the sound resonating in your chest, 

but also the vibration of energy. 

Try to eliminate any vibration from other parts of the body, in 

particular the abdomen, the throat, the head. 

Phase 3 

Produce a few 'ooo' sounds that vibrate only in the throat. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

Place your hand as a reflector, 2 or 3 inches in front of your 


This time try to reach a sound that resonates purely in the throat 

without any vibration in other parts of the body. 

Phase 4 

Repeat the same practice with a focus between the eyebrows. Chant 

a few 'ooo's and try to make them vibrate in the eye and in the 

eye only. 

Do a few rounds of this exercise, starting again from phase 1 and 

going through the whole sequence. 

If you practise this exercise with friends, you will be able to give 

each other feedback as to the exact location of each sound. 

20.2 Speaking from different levels 

Phase 1 

Take a very simple sentence, such as: "What a beautiful day!" 

Practise repeating the sentence from the belly. 

Tust as in the last exercise, try to get your sound to vibrate only 

around the navel. 

When you utter a sound, a physical vibration is generated. But an 

etheric vibration is generated too, of the same nature as the 

vibration you feel between the eyebrows when meditating. As you 

repeat the sentence, try to become aware of the physical and the 

non-physical vibration at the same time. 

In this first phase, apply yourself to getting the vibration moving 

only in the belly area, as if you were speaking 'from the belly'. 

As in the last exercise, no particular awareness needs to be kept in 

the eye during the first three phases. 

Phase 2 

Drop the awareness in the belly and go on repeating the same 
sentence from the chest. Try to make the sound vibrate in the 
chest alone. 

Phase 3 

Repeat the sentence from the throat. Feel your sound vibrating in 
the throat. Feel the physical tingling taking place in your throat 
organs as you speak. But be aware of the non-physical vibration at 
the same time. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

Phase 4 

Repeat the same sentence, making it vibrate between the eyebrows. 
Repeat this four-phase sequence several times. 


• This form of work introduces a different approach to 
communication. Practise this exercise with friends and watch 
carefully to see where they can or cannot speak from. Many people 
have great difficulty uttering a sound from one area or another: 
belly, heart, and so on. This is often quite revealing as far as their 
psychological organisation is concerned. Being unable to speak from 
one of those areas nearly always indicates a major emotional 
blockage that needs to be worked out before a balance can be 
reached. Watch people around you, at work, etc. to see who speaks 
from where, and relate it to what you can observe of their 
psychological features. 

• The more aware in your eye you are, the easier it is to sense 
where people are speaking from. You will clearly feel the vibration 
being activated in their body, in the corresponding area. Whenever 
you can perceive something inside yourself, it does not take long 
before you can feel the same in others. 

As your perception opens, it is not only vibration that you will 
feel. You will also see light patterns in the area from which they 
are speaking. Practise being in the eye and aware of the seeingness 
as described in the chapters on seeing. 

• Note that I am not suggesting it is preferable to speak from any 
of these areas, be it the heart, the belly or anywhere else. Speak 
from where you like, by all means! It is only if it is impossible 
for you to speak from one of the centres that something is 
wrong, and that the imbalance needs to be corrected. 

20.3 What if you have to display authority? 

Let us repeat the same exercise but with different words. The 
following sentence was suggested in one of my classes by a man 
who had eleven boys (and no girls): "Clean your room!" 
Repeat the sentence "Clean your room!" a few times from the 
belly, then from the chest, then the throat, then the eye. Each 
time, ask yourself the question: Would they? (clean their room). 



Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

• The answer is obvious: when you're only in the throat, they 
wouldn't! The eye can be a bit more convincing, but the heart 
would probably not be strong enough against the eleven at the 
height of Full Moon. Let's accept the fact once and for all: 
authority comes from the belly. 

• Now, start noticing around you, at work for instance, those who 
are seen to be authoritative by nature. You will discover that some 
people have the capacity, when they speak to you, to be very 
strong in their belly and to make you feel weak in yours at the 
same time. That is where a large part of their authority comes 
from. Note that nearly all of them do it unconsciously and not as 
the result of training. But still they do it! As soon as the trick is 
revealed to your eye, you will start to see it as a hoax. You will 
gain the capacity to stand up for yourself when somebody tries to 
abuse you with such a gross method. 

20.4 The eye-belly power 

Now, choose a few sentences and repeat them several times with a 
strong eye-belly awareness. Try to make the sound resonate in 
both your eye and your belly, following the method suggested 
above. It is as if you were talking from the eye and the belly both 
at the same time. If you do it fully, it is quite likely they would 
clean their room. 


• This exercise will help you structure the 'eye-belly power' which 
is a great help when you need real protection. 

• You will find it easier to implement this exercise if you can 
direct your words towards somebody, rather than speaking in a 
void. This is because you are displaying a lot of force, and a force 
often finds it awkward to manifest outwardly unless matched by 
another force. 

• Whenever doing physical work, think of tapping from your 
eye-belly power. 

• By now you can probably understand better why those who have 
done a lot of work on their hara, or will centre, by practising a 
martial art, usually have little difficulty protecting their energies. 

20.5 Inhaling/exhaling 

In the Hindu Tantric tradition, there is a Sanskrit text called the 
Siva-svarodaya, that gives a lot of information related to the nadls, 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

meaning the circulations of pranic (etheric) energy. In verses 1.92- 
98, the text gives the following advice: when you walk towards 
your guru, friends and relatives, all those who love you and want 
to help you, you should inhale deeply. When you walk towards 
enemies, thieves, beggars and other people that you want to keep 
away, you should exhale deeply. It is dangerous to inhale deeply in 
the middle of a quarrel, or in front of a superior who is angry at 
you, or in the company of wicked people or thieves. 
Let us try to put this into practice immediately. 

20.6 Closing the aura through deep exhalation 

If you have gone through all the protection suggested so far, at 
this stage it is likely that you are starting to get a sense of when 
your aura is open or closed. So proceed in the following way: Sit in 
front of a friend or a mirror, though in this particular case a 
friend is preferable, for a force usually needs to be matched by 
another to express itself freely. 

Position yourselves as you would for the practices of eye contact 
(section 5.2). Keep your eyes open throughout the exercise. 

Phase 1 

Become aware of how open or closed your aura is at that particular 


Then make a deep, slow exhalation with a slight throat friction, 

and sense the quality of your aura while exhaling. 

Then inhale deeply and slowly, and sense the quality of your aura 

while inhaling. Do it as if you were inhaling the other person, 

taking him/her in. Sense how open your aura feels while inhaling 

and compare with the phase of exhalation. 

Keep on breathing slowly and consciously for a few minutes. 

During this first phase, your friend is neither deeply inhaling nor 

deeply exhaling, but just breathing normally and trying to 

perceive the modifications in your energy. To allow him/her to 

follow what you are doing, you can raise your hand slowly each 

time you are inhaling and lower it while exhaling. 

Phase 2 

Drop any particular awareness of your breath and become the 
perceiver while your friend inhales and exhales with full 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

Get your friend to take long, deep, breaths: breaths with 
intention. There is a way to draw the air in and to expel it from 
the body that is not just a mechanical action but a conscious 
movement of energy. It is like consciously pushing the air and the 
vibration out while exhaling, and pulling them in while inhaling. 
Continue the practice in the same manner for 3 or 4 minutes, 
trying to sense the modifications in the aura of the one who is 

Phase 3 

Both people breathe in and out consciously at the same time for a 

few minutes. 

Raise and lower your hands correspondingly, to be able to follow 

each other. Keep a slight throat friction. Take very long, slow 

inhalations and exhalations that leave enough time to sense the 

density of your auras. 

Keep the synchronicity: both friends inhale at the same time, both 

exhale simultaneously. 

During this practice, your aura tends to become lighter and wider 

when you inhale. When you exhale, on the contrary your aura 

feels more gathered, denser and thicker, its limits closer to the 

skin. In other words, this means your aura tends to open each time 

you inhale, and close each time you exhale. The intensity of the 

opening or the closing depends on how fully and consciously you 

breathe. While breathing normally and unconsciously, this cycle of 

expansion and contraction is faint and hardly perceptible, but 

nevertheless present. By gaining conscious control over this 

mechanism, you can go one step further in the protection of your 


Phase 4 

Resume the practice as in phase 3. Both friends exhale deeply at 
the same time, and then inhale deeply. Accompany the breathing 
with movements of the hands in order to keep synchronicity. 
This time, try to get a sense of how your auras meet and mix 
when you are exhaling (closing the aura) and inhaling (opening it). 
While 'inhaling each other', as your auras are open, there is a kind 
of mingling of your energies. The separating line between you and 
your friend is not so clearly defined. 
Keep on exhaling and inhaling for a few minutes. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

While exhaling, as your auras are denser and closed, the separation 
becomes much clearer. You can feel a surface of contact in which 
both auras meet but don't mix. On the level of clairvoyance one 
can see sparkling lights where the two auras clash. 

20.7 Drawing energy in and out 

For this exercise you can either be alone or sit in front of a 
friend. Keep your eyes open during the whole practice. 
Become aware of the vibration in your eye and all over the body. 
Keep some throat friction throughout the exercise. 
Exhale slowly and deeply, and with intention. Place your hands 
parallel in front of you, the palms facing away. Move your hands 
away slowly while exhaling, as if you were pushing something or 
somebody, or as if you were pushing the air and the energy away. 
Inhale deeply and with intention. Turn the palms around and move 
them slowly towards you, as if you were drawing energy towards 
yourself with your hands. 

Continue exhaling and inhaling slowly and deeply for a few 
minutes. Try to feel the pressure of the energy on your hands. 
When exhaling, intensify the throat friction to strengthen your 
repelling action. 

If you practise with a friend, the 'clashing' surface between the 
two auras will be very clearly perceived while exhaling. 

20.8 Exhaling when facing a crowd 

Apply this knowledge to your daily life. In a street or a train 
station, practise exhaling with intention when walking past a 
crowd or a group of people. Be in the eye and in the belly, densify 
your aura and exhale the energy out. Practise similarly whenever a 
stranger walks past you. Become aware of their energy being 
gently kept away. 


• Without this training, in these types of situations there is often 
an unnecessary and inappropriate mingling of auras. As the day 
goes on, especially if you live in a big city, this mingling of 
energies tends to be repeated over and over, and you end up 
exhausted at the end of the day. 

If you live in a small town and meet only friends and 
acquaintances when you go out, then the situation is completely 
different. There is certainly not the same need for protection. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

• People who frequently use the telephone in their job should be 
aware that many energy exchanges take place during calls. As 
discussed in section 16.6, the electromagnetic wave of the 
telephone signal not only conveys but also amplifies some of the 
emotions and psychic movements taking place during the 
conversation. Therefore be vigilant and don't hesitate to implement 
our palette of protection techniques when using the telephone. Go 
and wash your hands in running water (sections 4.12 and 17.12) 
after a negative phone call, or from time to time during the day 
if you are using the phone continuously. 

The same recommendations also apply to the use of computer 

• The more you practise exhaling consciously and repelling 
energies at the appropriate moment, the more this function will 
become automatic. 

In the beginning you have to work at it and remain vigilant, 
exhaling and sealing yourself each time a foreign energy passes by. 
Then, after practising for some time, you find yourself exhaling 
automatically when needed. You don't even need to think about it, 
it happens by itself. Each time, a dissipation of energy is avoided, 
which makes a big difference at the end of the day. This will 
prove to be one of the most valuable results of your training. 

20.9 The same protection using normal breathing 

One of the problems with technique 20.8 is that you can't go on 
exhaling forever. If you are walking through a crowd, in a railway 
station, or if your boss is having an agitated meeting with you, 
you still have to inhale from time to time! The solution lies in 
developing a new skill. Through deep breathing you have learned to 
create both open and closed conditions of your aura. The next step 
is to learn to reproduce the same conditions while breathing 

Sit in front of a mirror or a friend. Be strong in your eye. 
Practise exhaling in the following way: don't breathe any more 
deeply than normal, but focus all your attention on the exhalation. 
Put yourself in an 'exhaling' state of mind. Tust make the lengths 
of your exhalations longer, say 2 or 3 seconds, and take brief 
inhalations (1 second or less). So that overall, the rhythm of your 
breath remains quite normal. 

Reinforce each exhalation with throat friction, but not one that 
can be heard. At this stage you must be able to sense that behind 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

your physical throat friction, a non-physical vibration is 

generated, which is the appropriate one for this practice. If you 

are not too sure about it, just make a contained friction, one that 

you feel inside your throat but that can't be heard outside. 

Don't blink too much. Remain somewhat motionless, enough for a 

certain coagulation of your energy to take place, but not too 

much, so that your face still looks natural. The general idea behind 

this practice is that you should be able to implement it in any 

social situation where you need protection and have to stand up for 


To summarise, you are: 

— aware in the eye, coagulated, somehow motionless and not 

— in an exhaling mode, making only short inhalations 

— reinforcing your exhalations with a silent friction. 

An interesting result of this exercise is that you become able to 
keep your aura closed, even while you are inhaling. The more you 
master the process, the more the 'exhaling mode' of the aura 
becomes independent of the physical breathing. 

20.10 Sealing the aura 

On the basis of the work done in these two chapters, let us now 
describe the full technique of sealing the aura. 

Sit in a meditation position. Close your eyes. Practise the third eye 
meditation (section 3.7): throat friction; then vibration in the eye; 
light in the eye; awareness in the purple space. After a few 
minutes of being in the space, become aware above the head. Let 
yourself be spread out into the space. Let your aura become as 
extended and open as possible. 

Then: closing. Become aware in the eye and in the will centre, 
approximately one inch below the navel. Build up the vibration in 
the two centres by being aware and breathing with a strong 
throat friction. Anchor your eye in the will centre. 
Now, re-densify your aura by activating the will centre. Pull your 
aura in from there, as if this centre was a (non-physical) muscle, 
capable of gathering and pulling in your aura, making it dense and 
vibration-proof. Achieve a closed condition of the aura, the same as 
in the 'exhaling-mode'. Spend 2 or 3 minutes reinforcing and 
thickening your aura, resting on the 'gate of stone' one inch below 
the navel. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

Then reopen your aura. Become aware above the head again. Make 

your energy as sparse and extended as possible for 1 or 2 minutes. 

Let yourself be diluted in the space. 

And then close again, the same as before, sealing your aura from 

the will centre. Repeat this cycle, opening and closing several 


20.11 Practice 

Follow the same procedure as before (practice 20.10), but more 
quickly. Open your aura for about 10 seconds. Then close it from 
the will centre for about 10 seconds. Open again for 10 seconds, 
and keep alternating the same way for a few minutes. 


• Practice 20.10 is one of the most important of this book, not 
only because of its protection value, but also because it is a 
powerful way of developing the autonomy of your etheric body. 
Practise, practise, practise! 

• In the beginning, to help re-anchor yourself in a strong 
vibration all over the body, you can rub your hands vigorously for 
a few seconds. It helps gather the aura. Later on, this won't be 

• You can reinforce the action of the will centre by a slight 
contraction of the abdominal muscles below the navel. At a later 
stage you do not need the physical contraction to generate the 
action on the level of energy. The will centre gets activated and an 
'etheric contraction' takes place on the level of the vibration, 
without any contraction of the physical muscles. 

• As this skill develops, there will be more and more occasions 
when the sealing of your aura will automatically take place if 
needed. Unwanted energy transfers don't always come when you 
expect them. Your Higher Self will activate the sealing because it 
can sense potential dangers much better than you can. 

In practice it will happen like this: you will feel your aura being 
suddenly sealed, and at that very moment you won't necessarily 
understand why. But the reason will often become obvious in the 
following seconds or minutes. When this starts to happen, it is a 
sign that your etheric layer has reached a certain level of 
awakening and integrity. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

20.12 What if nothing works? 

A certain proportion of students find it impossible to speak from 
their belly. Even though they do their best to exhale with 
intention, it does not seem to modify their energy very much. 
Whatever practice they try, their aura never really appears closed. 
What does this mean? Blockage! Something has to be explored and 
released, usually in the area of the belly. These students are often 
those who are unable to dowse for earth lines. The reasons and 
remedies are the same as those discussed when dealing with 
dowsing (section 12.11). 

Apart from practising all the protection exercises described so far, 
the following complementary exercises (20.13 to 20.16) will be of 

20.13 Permanent awareness in the will centre 

For a few weeks, try to remain aware of the vibration in the will 
centre from morning to night. As long as the problem is not 
solved, establish an eye-belly awareness (as described in 18.7, 20.4) 
instead of being aware in the eye only as described in Chapter 9, 

20.14 Continual abdominal breathing 

Learn abdominal breathing. Devote some time twice a day to lying 
down and practising breathing from the abdomen only, without 
any movement in the chest or in the clavicle area. Place your 
hands flat on your ribs, to make sure that the chest does not move 
while you inhale. 

For a period of a few weeks or more, spend as much time as you 
can during your daily activities breathing consciously from the 
abdomen. This is not to suggest that you should breathe from the 
abdomen for the rest of your life, but a few weeks or months of 
intense awareness in this area will help to rebalance your energies. 
Never miss an occasion to implement technique 18.9 (stimulating 
the abdominal fire by a counter-pressure while inhaling). 

20.15 Stambhasana 

Gently massage the will centre, one inch below the navel. Become 
aware of the vibration in this area. 

Lie down on your back. Lift your head and legs to a vertical 
position. In Hatha-yoga, this exercise is called stambhasana, posture 
of the pillar. 


Chapter 20 - Protection: Sealing the Aura (2) 

Remain in the position for 1 or 

2 minutes. 

Relax and lie down again. Become 

aware of the vibration activated 

in the will centre. 

Repeat the sequence a few times, 

building up the vibration in the 

will centre. 

20.16 Practice 

Lie down on your back. Practise 
strict abdominal breathing (that 
is, without any movement of 
the chest or of the area of the 
clavicles). Have somebody press your abdomen below the navel with 
flat hands while you inhale. 

Each time you inhale you have to push against the other person's 
hands, matching the pressure. When you exhale, all pressure is 
released. Go on building the force of your abdominal inhalation. 
Remember to make sure the ribcage does not move while inhaling. 
Now, exercise or no exercise, if your belly is really blocked, it 
needs to be explored through ISIS regression, or another method of 
emotional release based on energy. It will save you a lot of time in 
your spiritual development and will probably transform your 
patterns of relationships and your social life. 


Chapter 21 - There Is No Real Protection But the 
Power of Truth 

And the truth shall set you free. 
John 8:32 

21.1 Power of Truth 

You may have mastered the most sophisticated techniques on 
energy. You may have spent half your life studying occult science. 
You may live in the company of great masters. If you are not 
after Truth, your protection is nothing more than an illusion. 
Sooner or later, it will fall. 

There has been a striking example of this in the distant past of 
humankind: Atlantis. As I have depicted in the epic novel 
Atlantean Secrets, in the last third of Atlantis humanity had 
reached an extraordinary level of understanding of the different 
fields of consciousness, and a tremendous capacity to influence 
laws of nature with mind power. A myriad of occult schools were 
full of initiates and experts in energy. It will probably take a few 
centuries from now before even one or two schools of esoteric 
sciences on Earth can reach the standard of their Atlantean 

However, because the quest for power and manipulation superseded 
the quest for Truth, Atlantis ended up being destroyed. And do 
not think that all these initiates were taken by surprise by the 
flood. Many could see the disaster coming. But there was nothing 
they could do, their science was completely powerless to avoid it. 
Their very knowledge was like fetters, preventing any escape. 
Everything was swallowed and disappeared in the mists of time. 
You would be very much misled if you believed that the same laws 
do not apply to you, here and now. For, you see, you may not be a 
passionate lover of Truth, but your Higher Self is. Always. You 
may play games in your life, you may seek power for childish 
motivations, you may cover yourself with mud — your Higher 
Self will still be yearning for Truth, and Truth alone, in the 
background of yourself. It does not matter where you, as an 
individual, may choose to go, your Higher Self simply cannot move 
towards any other direction than Truth, that is Its imperishable 


Chapter 21 - There Is No Real Protection But the Power of Truth 


So if you are not after Truth, your Higher Self will start working 
against you, to allow a return to the direction It has forever 
chosen. We could call this Self-sabotage. And it is supremely 
efficient. If you go astray from your Truth and try to deny it, 
your own Self will undermine any of your attempts, any of your 
constructions, and will start preparing your fall. Sometimes it 
takes a long time before the blessed hand shatters all your 
defenses. But all you had patiently built on a wrong basis will be 
destroyed, and you will have to start again in the nakedness of the 

I want to emphasize this point, especially after having covered so 
many techniques in this book. In a Taoist treatise of inner 
alchemy, The Book of the Golden Pill, it is said: "For the right 
man, even the wrong technique will work. But for the wrong man, 
even the right technique won't work." Ultimately, there is no 
other real protection than the power of Truth. If you are after 
Truth, then Truth will look after you. But if you come from the 
wrong space, you may apply all the techniques recorded in the 
archives of nature, your achievements will always be of a 
precarious nature. 

One day, when the predictions of the Apocalypse come to fruition, 
titanic dark forces will rage on the planet and try to extinguish all 
hope of further development for human beings. It will be total 
war, but a war of a new form, one that is unsuspected at present. 
Then what will you do to protect yourself? Do you really believe 
that your techniques of protection will work? Whatever tricks and 
techniques you have, you may be sure that those of the dark 
forces will be infinitely more sophisticated. Truly, you won't have 
any other power left than the manifesting power of Truth of 
your Higher Self. In a paradoxical way, that is how the devil is 
your best friend. For to overcome him, the only way will be to 
tap soul forces from the deepest of your Self and to release them 
on a cosmic level. You will have to stand in the Absolute Glory of 
the Spirit, and to liberate forces of Truth more than ever before 
in the history of humankind. Then the victory will be total and 
irreversible — that's if you've found your Self by then, of course. 
I am happy to have shared all these techniques of protection with 
you, but I do not want you to be fooled. Esoteric knowledge is like 
a double-edged sword. If you use it for anything else than finding 


Chapter 21 - There Is No Real Protection But the Power of Truth 

the Self and revealing Its Truth, it always turns and works against 
you in the end, whatever time it may take before the bell tolls. 
There has never been any exception to this rule. Seek your Self 
with all the sincerity you can and you won't have to worry about 
protection. But if your motivation is of a different nature, then 
your spiritual journey will be a long succession of disillusions, 
however clever you may be at implementing techniques. 
You may think that the concept of Truth is a bit vague, and not 
directly applicable to your daily reality. Actually, before you can 
grasp Truth with a capital T, you have to start with being true to 
yourself. That is something simple, which can start here and now. 
There are a few things you know you really should do and that 
you are not doing: decisions to make, unavoidable transitions to go 
through... Maybe also, there are a few things that you know you 
should not do and that you keep on doing, through weakness, but 
also often just by habit. 

Please understand clearly that I am not referring to any moral 
concepts. The problem has nothing to do with what is labelled 
'good' or 'bad', or with any other mental construction. It is not 
rare for spiritual seekers to have to do certain 'bad' things, or let 
us say things that moral authorities would regard as bad, in order 
to follow their truth. 

Sincerity is of another nature. Deep inside some things feel right, 
and some other things feel wrong. It is the knowingness of the 
Spirit and that is what you have to tune into. It does not scream 
inside like certain desires. You have to listen to it carefully. It is 
like an inner sense, the embryonic version of what will later 
become your capacity to know 'the Truth'. It is faint in the 
beginning, so you have to take care of it. The more you listen to 
it, meaning the more you put into action what you know to be 
right, the more the knowingness grows. The more you ignore it, 
the more it fades. And if you really don't know what is right or 
wrong, then tune in inside and ask for help. You will be surprised 
how swiftly Truth can come to the rescue of those who seek Truth 
without compromising. 

It does not matter if you make some mistakes while following 
your truth. What is a mistake, anyway? The white line that leads 
you straight to the Divine is full of meanderings, when seen 
through the eyes of a non-initiate. But to the vision of Truth, 
certain detours and failures appear as the surest and most direct 


Chapter 21 - There Is No Real Protection But the Power of Truth 

way to the Goal. 

If you consistently follow your truth, your capacity to discern 
will grow like a banyan tree and your sense of what is true or 
untrue will become more tangible than your perception of hot or 
cold. Even if the sense of Truth is faint in the beginning, you 
should cherish and nurture it as the most precious quality that 
may ever be given to you. For ultimately, there is no real 
protection but the power of Truth. 


Chapter 22 - Glimpses of What Comes Next 

22.1 ISIS, the Clair vision techniques of regression 

Astable and reliable clairvoyance requires not only the building of 
some new subtle organs but also the purification of the astral 
layer. This implies thoroughly exploring the roots of mental 
conflicts and emotional imbalances, and eradicating mental 
conditioning. Having observed a large number of people working 
on themselves, I can say that those who never seem to get 
anywhere with their spiritual practice are quite often those who 
have neglected this phase of exploring and cleansing the mess of 
the mind. 

Before one can be supernormal, one has to become normal. As long 
as the daddy-mummy, girlfriend-boyfriend level of existence has 
not been sorted out, as long as deep negative emotional patterns 
have not been clarified, there is no need to pretend you are living 
a divine life. 

On the other hand, I have seen many seekers who had major 
openings of perception while undergoing a systematic process of 
regression through ISIS. Suddenly, after a critical release, their 
techniques of clairvoyance started working. Remember the example 
of the one-metre-long pipe. As long as one single millimetre of the 
pipe is obstructed, you cannot see anything, even though 99.9% of 
the pipe is clear. In practice it means that just a few unresolved 
emotions are enough to keep you completely blind to the spiritual 

If you have been practising a form of spiritual work for a long 
period without any significant metaphysical breakthrough, I 
suggest you find a system, such as our method of regression, that 
will allow you to deeply explore and cleanse the negative emotional 
patterns of your subconscious mind. This might save you a 
considerable time of spiritual wandering. 

22.2 The vision of thought forms 

The ISIS techniques, of which regression is one of the avenues, are 
based on an alchemical perspective. They aim at allowing you to 
feel, and later on to see, your emotions as forms. They gradually 
lead you to the point where your clairvoyant perception can behold 


Chapter 22 - Glimpses of What Comes Next 

emotions as colourful movements in the matter of the astral body. 
The samskaras, or seeds of emotional conditioning, can definitely 
be seen as spots and felt through your body of energy. This 
approach gives new keys to deal with unconscious complexes by 
revealing them as something extremely concrete and objective, as 
tangible on the astral level as weeds are on the physical level. 
Once your emotional field starts to clarify and emotions are 
revealed to your vision as forms, the following step is to reach a 
similar perception of thoughts. By an extension of the same 
process, it becomes possible to feel and see the thoughts as forms, 
or 'thought forms', little waves of astral energy rushing all 
around you. You can see and feel them coming from outside 
yourself and penetrating into your aura... and within a fraction of 
a second, a thought appears inside your mind. It is exactly like 
having the flu after catching a virus. 

Have you ever tried to stop thinking? This is a most frustrating 
and hopeless exercise. The more you try to make the mind silent, 
the more it rebels and reacts with unwanted thought activity. The 
reason most people can never achieve total mental silence is that 
they operate from their mind. They try to fight the mind 
mentally. They become aware of their thoughts only after they 
have already entered their mind, when it is far too late to do 

If you reach the stage where you can see the thought forms 
coming from outside, then the situation is quite different! You can 
choose not to let them in, and thus experience inner silence. You 
realize that until then, there was an unconscious mechanism that 
attracted the thoughts inside your head, pulling them in like a 
little hand. All you need to do is to release this mechanism, and 
peace of mind is achieved immediately. There is no fight because 
you do not have to push the thought forms away, you just stop 
drawing them in. 

22.3 The transformation of thinking 

As the process advances and the mind clarifies, seekers realize that 
two completely different forms of thinking take place inside 
them. One is based on reactions and conditioning. This is the 
thinking made of all the little thought forms that people catch 
like viruses. 

The other thinking is of a completely different nature. It does not 
appear like a mechanical chain of reactions but like a creative 


Chapter 22 - Glimpses of What Comes Next 

activity of the soul. It is a thought that connects, exactly like the 
process of 'tuning in' that we described in Chapter 11. Using this 
new mode, when you think of someone, a living connection is 
established with him (instead of just getting a postcard image of 
him in your mind). When you think of an object, the qualities of 
the object become alive in you. And therefore you experience a 
completely new palette of feelings, impressions and sensations, 
which is the opposite of the sclerotic nature of the mind. 
A shift slowly takes place and the old thinking of the mind, the 
one based on conditioning and separative consciousness, is gradually 
replaced by the thinking of the 'supermind', or transubstantiated 
astral body, in which the heart plays a central role. You feel 
yourself thinking in your heart, just as the old thought process 
was previously taking place in your head. This thinking of the 
head was disconnected from the Self. Now, thinking and Self have 
married in the heart. 

Concurrently, a gradual transformation takes place in the blood. In 
the beginning, you just notice that you are more aware of your 
blood. Then you realize that a conscious life of the Spirit is 
starting to shine in the blood. Tust as, previously, it was obvious 
that the thinking process was all happening in your head, it 
becomes obvious that the Self, the Higher Ego, is living in the 
blood. Before, your existence was mainly taking place in the 
thinking of the mind, in the head. Now you live more and more in 
the consciousness of the Self, or Spirit, in the blood. This new 
thinking is none other than a thinking of the Self. You therefore 
get this clear perception that you are thinking with your blood 
and not only your heart. 

Do not think these experiences are of a vague and floaty nature, 
like a sort of half-real ethereal subjectivity. On the contrary, 
these experiences are 'hyper-dense' and infinitely more tangible 
than anything that was taking place in your consciousness before. 
If you look at how you were before the transformation, and 
compare it to the Spirit of Life now flowing in your blood, it is as 
if you had been walking on the planet like a zombie, not even 
knowing how empty your soul was. 

A deep sense of Truth develops with the thinking of the blood. 
One of the obvious characteristics of the old form of thinking of 
the mind was doubt. The mind was doubting all the time. The only 
way for the mind to decide whether a proposition was true or not, 


Chapter 22 - Glimpses of What Comes Next 

was to have recourse to logic, to engage in discussion and 
comparison to try and form an opinion. The thinking of the 
Spirit, on the contrary, is endowed with an irresistible 
knowingness of Truth. The purpose of your life shines in front of 
you, there is oneness and certitude as to where to take the next 

22.4 The quest for the Grail 

The Grail is the vessel that received the blood of Christ. It is the 

central theme of the whole western esoteric tradition. In terms of 

inner alchemy, the Grail is the vehicle that can receive the Highest 

Spirit. This refers to the building of the glorious body of 

immortality in which the highest consciousness of the Self can be 


The body of immortality is a body of connection. In it, not only 

does the Spirit live, but the whole creation, the macrocosm, as 

outlined in the Emerald Tablet: 

et recepit vim superiorum et Inferiorum 

And it receives/comprehends the force from the things that are 

above and that are below. 

One should never consider that the Spirit can be defined in any 

way. Due to Its absolute nature, It encompasses many paradoxes: 

whenever something is really true about It, then the opposite is 

usually true too. The more one knows the Spirit, the more one 

realises one's ignorance of Its unfathomable depth. 

There is a great beauty in the fact that in English, the word 

initiate means both the one that was instructed into the 

mysteries, and... a beginner! I believe that the two meanings of the 

word should not be opposed but reconciled. Whatever your level of 

perception, wisdom and enlightenment, always remember that you 

remain extremely confused as to the real nature of the Divine, and 

that the human adventure is only at its beginning. 


Appendix 1 : Paths of the Meridians 

Gallbladder, Urinary Bladder, and Stomach Meridians 

Zu shao yang, 'Gallbladder' Meridian starts at the external corner 
of the physical eye (not the third eye!) From there it follows a 
complicated path around the ear and the side of the head. From 
the side of the trunk it sends a branch to the gallbladder and to 
the liver. It is also said to have a direct connection with the heart. 
From the hip it suddenly makes a detour to the sacrum, and comes 
back on the lateral side of the thigh. It ends up on the external 
side of the nail of the fourth toe (counting the big toe as no.l). 

Zu tai yang, 'Urinary Bladder' Meridian, on the head, starts at the 
medial/internal corner of the physical eye, ascends straight up the 
forehead and skull and circles the head 1 or 2 centimetres away 
from the medial line. On the foot it travels behind the external 
malleolus and then below it. It terminates on the external part of 
the little toe. Zu tai yang connects with the urinary bladder and 
the kidney. 

Zu yang ming, 'Stomach' Meridian, starts on the head as one 
branch coming down from below the middle of the physical eye, 


Appendix 1 : Paths of the Meridians 

and another branch in front of the ear. In the neck, the meridian 
is at the anterior border of the sternocleidomastoid muscle, and 
then is said to make a sudden detour to the seventh cervical 
vertebra before coming back to the front of the chest. On the 
foot, it ends up on the second toe (counting the big toe as no.l). 


Appendix 1 : Paths of the Meridians